Contents

Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT23 Hardware User's Manual PDF

1 of 448
1 of 448

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT23 Hardware User's Manual PDF

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

-GT27 model -GT25 model -GT25 open frame model -GT25 wide model -GT25 rugged model -GT23 model -GT21 model -GT21 wide model -Handy GOT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Be sure to read these instructions before using this product. Before using the product, read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and handle the product properly with full attention to safety. Note that these precautions apply only to this product. In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

Note that failure to observe the CAUTION level instructions may also lead to serious results depending on the circumstances. Be sure to observe the instructions of both levels to ensure personal safety. Please keep this manual in accessible place and be sure to forward it to the end user.

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off.

Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch. An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident.Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident. An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning. Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.

When the GOT backlight has a failure, the GOT status will be as follows. Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction. [GT27, GT25, GT23] The POWER LED blinks (orange/blue), the display section dims, and inputs by a touch switch are disabled. [GT2105-Q] The POWER LED blinks (orange/blue), and the display section dims. However, inputs by a touch switch are still available. [GT2107-W, GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] The display section dims. However, inputs by a touch switch are still available. Even if the display section dims, inputs by a touch switch may still be available. This may cause an unintended operation of the touch switch. For example, if an operator assumes that the display section has dimmed because of the screen save function and touches the display section to cancel the screen save, a touch switch may be activated. The GOT backlight failure can be checked with a system signal of the GOT. (This system signal is not available on GT2107-W, GT2104-R, GT2104-P, and GT2103-P.)

WARNING

CAUTION

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

1

2

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING The display section of the GOT is an analog-resistive type touch panel.

When multiple points of the display section are touched simultaneously, an accident may occur due to incorrect output or malfunction. [GT27] Do not touch three points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction. [GT25, GT23, GT21] Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may cause a touch switch near the touched points to operate unexpectedly, or may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are changed, be sure to reset the GOT, or turn on the unit again after shutting off the power as soon as possible. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT, communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative. For bus connection (GT27 and GT25 only): The GOT becomes inoperative. Power on the PLC CPU again to reestablish communication. For other than bus connection: The GOT becomes inoperative. A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the GOT and the system against unauthorized access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from unreliable networks and devices via network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions. Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving GOT trouble and system trouble by unauthorized access, DoS attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks. *1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS) state.

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.

Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart. Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction.

Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver. Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section.

When the GOT connects to an Ethernet network, the IP address setting is restricted according to the system configuration. [GT27,GT25,GT23] When a GOT2000 series model and a GOT1000 series model are on an Ethernet network, do not set the IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GOTs and the controllers on this network. Doing so can cause IP address duplication at the GOT startup, adversely affecting the communication of the device with the IP address 192.168.0.18. The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system. [GT21] Setting the IP address (192.168.3.18) in the following system configurations can cause IP address duplication at GOT startup, adversely affecting communications of the device whose IP address is 192.168.3.18. The operation at IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system. When multiple GOTs connect to the Ethernet network: Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network. When one GOT connects to the Ethernet network: Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the controllers other than the GOT in the network.

When using the Ethernet interfaces, set an IP address for each interface to access a different network.

Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with the GOT. Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.

When the GOT is subject to shock or vibration, or some colors appear on the screen of the GOT, the screen of the GOT might flicker.

WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or

removing the GOT main unit to/from the panel. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option unit onto/from the GOT. (GT27, GT25 Only)

3

4

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual.

Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration. When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque

range with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. [GT27, GT25-W, GT2512-S, GT2510-V, GT2508-V, GT23, GT2107-W] Specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) [GT2505-V, GT2105-Q] Specified torque range (0.30 Nm to 0.50 Nm) [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Specified torque range (0.20 Nm to 0.25 Nm) Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.

When mounting a unit on the GOT, tighten the mounting screws in the following specified torque range. [GT27, GT25 (except GT25-W)] When loading the communication unit or option unit other than wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. When loading the wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to the side interface of GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.10 Nm to 0.14 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 1. When the GOT is installed vertically, its side interface is positioned on the bottom. To prevent the falling of the wireless LAN communication unit from the side interface, install or remove the unit while holding it with hands. [GT25-W] When mounting the wireless LAN communication unit on the GOT, fit it to the wireless LAN communication unit interface and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.10 Nm to 0.14 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.1. [GT2103-P] When mounting the SD card unit on the GOT, fit it onto the GOT rear face and tighten the tapping screws in the specified torque range (0.3 Nm to 0.6 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. Under tightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

When closing the USB environmental protection cover, note the following points to ensure the IP rating. [GT27, GT25 (except GT25-W and GT2505-V)] Push the [PUSH] mark on the latch firmly to fix the cover to the GOT. [GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W, GT2505-V, GT2107-W] Push the USB mark on the latch firmly to fix the cover to the GOT. [GT2105-Q] Tighten the lower fixing screws of the cover in the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) to fix the cover to the GOT.

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Remove the protective film of the GOT.

When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed. In addition, for the models equipped with the human sensor function, using the GOT with the protective film may cause the human sensor not to function properly

For GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, and GT2508F-V, attach an environmental protection sheet dedicated to the open frame model (sold separately) to the display section. Or, attach a user-prepared environmental protection sheet. Not doing so may damage or soil the GOT or cause foreign matter to enter the GOT, resulting in a failure or malfunction.

When installing the supplied fittings on GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, or GT2508F-V, tighten screws in the specified torque range (0.8 Nm to 1.0 Nm). Meld studs on the control panel to fasten the fittings. The studs must have strength adequate to withstand a tightening torque of 0.9 Nm or more. Make sure that no foreign matter such as welding waste is at and around the bases of the studs. Tighten nuts on the studs in the specified torque range (0.8 Nm to 0.9 Nm) with a wrench for M4 nuts. Undertightening a screw or nut may cause the GOT to drop, short-circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening a screw or nut may damage it or the GOT, causing the GOT to drop, short-circuit, or malfunction.

Do not operate or store the GOT in the environment exposed to direct sunlight, rain, high temperature, dust, humidity, or vibrations.

Although GT2507T-W is ruggedized for environments such as UV rays, temperatures and vibrations, its operation is not guaranteed in all conditions and environments. Make sure to use or store the GOT in an appropriate environment.

When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the protective cover for oil. Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT.

Do not operate the GOT with its display section frozen. The water droplets on the display section may freeze at a low temperature. Touch switches and other input objects may malfunction if the display section is frozen.

5

6

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.

Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions. After installation, wiring, or other work, make sure to attach the back cover to the Handy GOT before

turning on the power and starting operation. Not doing so may cause an electrical shock.

The Handy GOT is designed to operate on DC power. Supply power to the power supply, operation switch, and emergency stop switch within the specifications. Not doing so may cause a fire or failure.

Correctly wire the 24 V DC power cable (terminal) of the Handy GOT and [+]/[-] of the DC power supply equipment as shown in this manual. Not doing so may cause a failure due to a reverse power connection.

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Ground the FG terminal of the Handy GOT with a ground resistance of 100 or less by using a drain

wire that has a cross-sectional area of 2 or more. Do not use common grounding with higher voltage systems. Failure to observe these instructions may cause an electric shock or malfunction.

When making a connection cable or installing wiring, make sure that no chips or wire offcuts enter the Handy GOT. Not doing so may cause a fire, failure or malfunction.

CAUTION When grounding the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section, note the following

points. Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q] Make sure to ground the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section solely for the GOT (ground resistance: 100 or less, ground cable diameter: 1.6 mm or more). (GT2705-V, GT25- W, GT2505-V, GT2107-W, and GT2105-Q do not have the LG terminal.) [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Make sure to ground the FG terminal of the GOT power supply section with a ground resistance of 100 or less. (For GT2104-PMBLS and GT2103-PMBLS, grounding is unnecessary.)

When tightening the terminal screws, use the following screwdrivers. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q] Use a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] For the usable screwdrivers, refer to the following. Page 324 Power Supply Wiring to the GOT

Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range. [GT27, GT25, GT23] Specified torque range (0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm)

For a terminal processing of a wire to the GOT power supply section, use the following terminal. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q] Use applicable solderless terminals for terminal processing of a wire and tighten them with thespecified torque. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction. [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Connect a stranded wire or a solid wire directly, or use a rod terminal with an insulation sleeve.

Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product. Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.

7

8

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range.

[GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q] Specified torque range (0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm) [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Specified torque range (0.22 Nm to 0.25 Nm)

Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.

Some models have an ingress prevention label on their top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts, from entering the GOT during wiring. Do not peel this label during wiring. Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation.

Plug the communication cable into the GOT interface or the connector of the connected unit, andtighten the mounting screws and the terminal screws in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller(A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into theconnector of the connected unit until it "clicks". After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly. Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.

When you use the Handy GOT, run the connected cable in ducts or clamp the cable. Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidentalpulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

When you remove a cable from the Handy GOT, do not pull the cable portion. Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cableconnection fault.

WARNING Before testing the operation of a user-created screen (such as turning on or off a bit device, changing

the current value of a word device, changing the set value or current value of a timer or counter, and changing the current value of a buffer memory), thoroughly read the manual to fully understand the operating procedure. During the test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system. False output or malfunction can cause an accident.

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING When power is on, do not touch the terminals.

Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction. Correctly connect the battery connector.

Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire. Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.

Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all phases. Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit.

Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire. Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly.

Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure. The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.

Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull from the cable portion. Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock. A module damage may result. Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit.

Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery. If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.

Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metals, etc. to discharge static electricity from human body, etc. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

Use the battery manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Use of other batteries may cause a risk of fire or explosion.

Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children.Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before replacing the battery or using the dip switch of the terminating resistor. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction by static electricity.

9

10

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USING A DATA STORAGE]

CAUTION Before cleaning the GOT, be sure to turn off the power.

Before cleaning, check the following items. Ensure that there are no problems with the installation condition of the GOT to the control panel. Ensure that there are no damages on the environmental protection sheet (not replaceable). If the environmental protection sheet peels or the cleaning solution enters between the sheet and the display section during cleaning, stop the cleaning immediately. In such a case, do not use the GOT.

CAUTION For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required.

However, the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute the touch panel calibration.

When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be activated. This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.

WARNING If the SD card is removed from drive A of the GOT while being accessed by the GOT, the GOT may

stop processing data for about 20 seconds. The GOT cannot be operated during this period. The functions that run in the background including a screen updating, alarm, logging, scripts, and others are also interrupted. This stop affects the system operation, causing an accident. Before removing the SD card, check the following items. [GT27, GT25, GT23(Excluding GT2505-V and GT25HS-V)] Check that the SD card access LED is off before removing the SD card. [GT2505-V, GT25HS-V] Make sure to turn off the SD card access switch before removing the SD card. Not doing so may damage the SD card or files. [GT21] Disable the SD card access in the GOT utility, and then check that the SD card access LED is off before removing the SD card.

Do not remove the data storage from the file server (drive N) that is being accessed by the GOT, or the system operation may be affected. Before removing the data storage, check the relevant system signal to make sure that the data storage is not being accessed.

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USING A DATA STORAGE]

CAUTION Do not remove the data storage from the GOT while the data storage is being accessed by the GOT,

or the data storage and files may be damaged. Before removing the data storage, check the SD card access LED, relevant system signal, or others to make sure that the data storage is not being accessed.

Turning off the GOT while it accesses the SD card results in damage to the SD card and files. When using the GOT with an SD card inserted, check the following items.

[GT27, GT25, GT23(Excluding GT2505-V and GT25HS-V)] After inserting an SD card into the GOT, make sure to close the SD card cover. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written. [GT2505-V, GT25HS-V] After inserting an SD card into the GOT, make sure to turn on the SD card access switch. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written. [GT21] After inserting an SD card into the SD card unit, make sure to enable the SD card access in the GOT utility. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written.

When removing the SD card from the GOT, make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop out. Not doing so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

When inserting a USB device into a USB interface of the GOT, make sure to insert the device into the interface firmly. Not doing so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break. (GT27, GT25, and GT2107-W)

Before removing the data storage from the GOT, follow the procedure for removal on the utility screen of the GOT. After the successful completion dialog is displayed, remove the data storage by hand carefully. Not doing so may cause the data storage to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

11

12

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USE]

CAUTION When you operate the Handy GOT while holding it, slide your hand through the hand strap on the

back of the GOT to prevent falling. The hand strap length is adjustable.

When you remove a cable from the Handy GOT, do not pull the cable portion. Doing so may damage the unit or cable, or cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

Do not drop or strike the Handy GOT. Doing so may damage the GOT.

When you carry or operate the Handy GOT, hold its body. Carrying or operating the Handy GOT while holding its cable may damage the unit or cable.

Determine whether to use the emergency stop switch of the Handy GOT according to your risk assessment.

If you use a parallel circuit (to avoid entering the emergency stop status while the Handy GOT is removed), the system may not conform to the safety standards. Check the safety standards required for your system before use.

If the Handy GOT is exposed to any impact beyond the general specifications, chattering may occur in the emergency stop switch for its structural reasons. Check that your use conditions are proper.

Do not touch the edges of the touch panel (display section) repeatedly. Doing so may result in a failure.

Do not turn off the GOT while data is being written to the storage memory (ROM) or SD card. Doing so may corrupt the data, rendering the GOT inoperative.

The GOT rugged model uses the environmental protection sheet (not replaceable) with UV protection function on the front surface. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the touch panel or the liquid crystal display panel that may be caused by ultraviolet rays. Note that if the rugged model is exposed to ultraviolet rays for an extended period of time, the front surface may turn yellow. If the rugged model is likely to be exposed to ultraviolet rays for an extended period of time, it is recommended to use a UV protective sheet (option).

[PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOTE CONTROL]

[PRECAUTIONS FOR EXCLUSIVE AUTHORIZATION CONTROL]

[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Remote control is available through a network by using GOT functions, including theSoftGOT-GOT

link function, the remote personal computer operation function, the VNC server function, and the GOT Mobile function. If you remotely operate control equipment using such functions, the field operator may not notice the remote operation, leading to an accident. In addition, a communication delay or interruption may occur depending on the network environment, and remote control of control equipment cannot be performed normally in some cases. Before using the above functions to perform remote control, fully grasp the circumstances of the field site and ensure safety.

When operating the server (GOT) of the GOT Mobile function to disconnect a client, notify the operator of the client about the disconnection beforehand. Not doing so may cause an accident.

WARNING Before using the GOT network interaction function to prevent simultaneous operations from multiple

pieces of equipment, make sure you understand the function. You can enable or disable the exclusive authorization control of the GOT network interaction function for each screen. (For all screens, the exclusive authorization control is disabled by default.) Properly determine the screens for which the exclusive authorization control is required, and set the control by screen. A screen for which the exclusive authorization control is disabled is operable simultaneously from multiple pieces of equipment. Make sure to determine the operation period for each operator, fully grasp the circumstances of the field site, and ensure safety to perform operations.

CAUTION When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.

When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations. (Refer to Page 367 Low-voltage Battery Detection and Battery Replacement for details of the battery directive in the EU member states.)

13

14

[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.

(Refer to Page 433 Transportation Precautions for details of the regulated models.) Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be

exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual, as they are precision devices. Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail. Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.

When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine are used for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects, they cause malfunction when entering our products. Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter our products, or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation (heat method). Additionally, disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing products.

C O

N TE

N TS

CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Manuals for GT Works3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 31 1.1 GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

CHAPTER 2 System configuration 33 2.1 Overall Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Overall configuration of GT27, GT25-W, GT25-S, GT25-V, GT23, and GT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Overall configuration of GT25HS-V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

2.2 System Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Extension unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 59 3.1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

GT27, GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W, GT25-S, GT25-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 GT2507T-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 GT25HS-V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 GT23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 GT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

3.2 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 GT27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 GT2507T-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 GT25-S, GT25-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 GT25HS-V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 GT23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 GT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

3.3 Specifications of Power Supply Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 GT27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 GT2507T-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 GT25-S, GT25-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 GT25HS-V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 GT23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 GT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

3.4 Battery Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

15

16

CHAPTER 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 119 4.1 GT27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

GT2715-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 GT2712-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 GT2710-S, GT2710-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 GT2708-S, GT2708-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 GT2705-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Part names and settings of GT27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

4.2 GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 GT2512-WX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 GT2510-WX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 GT2507-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Part names and settings of GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, and GT2507-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

4.3 GT2507T-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 GT2507T-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Part names and settings of GT2507T-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

4.4 GT25-S, GT25-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 GT2512-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 GT2512F-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 GT2510-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 GT2510F-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 GT2508-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 GT2508F-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 GT2505-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Part names and settings of GT25-S and GT25-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

4.5 GT25HS-V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 GT2506HS-V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 GT2505HS-V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Part names and settings of GT25HS-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

4.6 GT23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 GT2310-V, GT2308-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Part names and settings of GT23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

4.7 GT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 GT2107-WTBD, GT2107-WTSD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 GT2104-RTBD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 GT2104-PMBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 GT2104-PMBDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 GT2104-PMBDS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 GT2104-PMBLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 GT2103-PMBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 GT2103-PMBDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 GT2103-PMBDS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 GT2103-PMBLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Part names and settings of GT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

CHAPTER 5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 149 5.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Conforming standards in the EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Conforming standards in the Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

C O

N TE

N TS

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Installing the GOT on the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Installing a noise filter (power supply line filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Connection of power cables and ground cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Fabricating a connection cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Grounding a cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

5.3 Low Voltage Directive Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 External wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 171 6.1 Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 6.2 Panel Cut Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

GT27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 GT2507T-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 GT25-S, GT25-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 GT23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 GT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

6.3 Stud. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Stud specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Distance between studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

6.4 Installation Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 GT27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 GT2507T-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 GT25-S, GT25-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 GT23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 GT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

6.5 Control Panel Inside Temperature and GOT Installation Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 GT27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 GT2507T-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 GT2512-S, GT2510-V, GT2508-V, GT2505-V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, GT2508F-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 GT23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 GT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

6.6 Installing the GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 GT27, GT25, GT23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 GT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

6.7 Removing the GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 GT27, GT25, GT23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 GT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

6.8 Handling the Handy GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Holding the Handy GOT in hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Hanging on a wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Placing on a desk or a floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

17

18

Installing to/removing from panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 6.9 Installing and Removing the Extension Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Installing multiple extension units (GT27, GT25). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Removing the extension unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

6.10 Installing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Installing the battery to GT2715, GT2712, GT2710, GT2512, GT2510-V, or GT2510F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Installing the battery to GT2708, GT2705, or GT2508 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Installing the battery to GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W, or GT2507T-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Installing the battery to GT2506HS-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Installing the battery to GT2505HS-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Installing the battery to GT2310 or GT2308 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Installing the battery to GT2505-V, GT2107-W, GT2105, GT2104-R, GT2104-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

6.11 Removing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Removing the battery from GT2715, GT2712, GT2710, GT2512, GT2510-V, or GT2510F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Removing the battery from GT2708, GT2705, GT2710 or GT2508 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Removing the battery from GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W, or GT2507T-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Removing the battery from GT2506HS-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Removing the battery from GT2505HS-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Removing the battery from GT2310 or GT2308 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Removing the battery from GT2505-V, GT2107-W, GT2105, GT2104-R, GT2104-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

6.12 Installing the SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 GT27, GT25, GT23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 GT25HS-V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 GT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

6.13 Removing the SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 GT27, GT25, GT23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 GT25HS-V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 GT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

6.14 Installing and Removing the USB Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Installing the USB devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Removing the USB devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

6.15 Installing and Removing the USB cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Installing the USB cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Removing the USB cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

6.16 Installing and Removing the Panel-Mounted USB Port Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Applicable panel-mounted USB port extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Parts name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Installing and removing the panel-mounted USB port extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

CHAPTER 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 271 7.1 Connector Conversion Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Applicable connector conversion box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB-42S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB-37S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Connector conversion box (GT11H-CNB-37S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

7.2 Emergency Stop Switch Guard Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Applicable emergency stop switch guard cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Installing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

7.3 Wall-mounting Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Applicable wall-mounting attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

C O

N TE

N TS

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Attachment of handy GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

7.4 Overview of Communication Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 7.5 External Cable, Relay Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Pin layout and signal names of the external cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Pin layout of the relay cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Connector specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Installing and removing of external cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

CHAPTER 8 WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION 321 8.1 Wiring of External Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 8.2 Power Supply Wiring to the GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 8.3 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Grounding the GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Causes of wiring-related malfunction and countermeasure examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

8.4 Wiring Inside and Outside the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Control panel inside wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Control panel outside wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

8.5 Attaching a Surge Suppressor to Control Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 8.6 Grounding the Extension Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Wiring of the FG cable of a bus connection cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

CHAPTER 9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 333 9.1 Internal Wiring Diagram of Handy GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

GT2506HS-V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 GT2505HS-V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

9.2 Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Power wiring and grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 The cause of malfunctions related wiring/Remedy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

9.3 Wiring inside and outside the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Wiring inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Outside the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Attaching surge killers to control equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

9.4 Switch Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Overview for switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Switch wiring example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Operation switch wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Operation switch input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 LED setting of operation switch (GT2506HS-V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Operation switch name sheet creation (GT2506HS-V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Emergency stop switch wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Grip switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Grip switch wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 LED settings of grip switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Keylock switch (2-position SW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

CHAPTER 10 OPERATING THE GOT 359 10.1 Outline Procedure to Start the GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 10.2 Creating Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

19

20

CHAPTER 11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 363 11.1 Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 11.2 Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 11.3 Screen Cleaning Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 11.4 Low-voltage Battery Detection and Battery Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

CHAPTER 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 369 12.1 GOT Restoration Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

GOT status check sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 GOT installation status check sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 System configuration check sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

12.2 Troubleshooting for the Bus Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Identifying the error position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Narrowing the possible error positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Specific example of troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

12.3 Error Messages and System Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Displayed contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Error messages and system alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

CHAPTER 13 APPENDICES 387 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

GT27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 GT2507T-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 GT25-S, GT25-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 GT25HS-V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 GT23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 GT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

13.2 Cable Bend Radius for GT27 with an Extension Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 GT2715-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 GT2712-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 GT2710-S, GT2710-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 GT2708-S, GT2708-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 GT2705-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

13.3 Cable Bend Radius for GT25 with an Extension Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 GT2512-S, GT2512F-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 GT2510-V, GT2510F-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 GT2508-V, GT2508F-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

13.4 Depth Dimensions for the GOT with an SD Card Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 13.5 Depth Dimensions for the GOT with Extension Units Mounted in Multiple Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 13.6 External Dimension Diagrams of the Communication Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 13.7 External Dimension Diagrams of the External Cable for Handy GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

GT16-C-42P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 GT16H-C-37PE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 GT14H-C-42P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 GT11H-C-37P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 GT11H-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 GT11H-C15R4-8P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 GT11H-C15R4-25P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 GT11H-C15R2-6P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

C O

N TE

N TS

13.8 Confirming of Versions and Conforming Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 GT27, GT25 (except GT2505-V and GT25HS-V), GT23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 GT2505-V, GT25HS-V, GT21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

13.9 Transportation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Relevant models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Transportation guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

13.10 Calculating Consumed Current of GT2705-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 13.11 Open Source Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

u-boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 REVISIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Intellectual Property Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444

21

22

INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT). Before using the product, read this manual carefully and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT for correct use. Manuals for GT Works3 Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons

Manuals for GT Works3 The electronic manuals related to this product are installed together with the screen design software. If you need the printed manuals, consult your local sales office.

Manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT2000)

e-Manual refers to the Mitsubishi Electric FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated tool. e-Manual has the following features: Required information can be cross-searched in multiple manuals. Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual. Hardware specifications of each part can be found from the product figures. Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked. Sample programs can be copied to the engineering tool.

Screen design software-related manuals

Connection manuals

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GT Works3 Installation Instructions - PDF

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual SH-081220ENG (1D7ML9)

PDF e-Manual

GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 SH-080862ENG (1D7MB2)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Version1 SH-081228ENG PDF e-Manual

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081197ENG (1D7MJ8)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) For GT Works3 Version1

SH-081198ENG PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) For GT Works3 Version1

SH-081199ENG PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals) For GT Works3 Version1

SH-081200ENG PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081867ENG (1D7MS9)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (2 Connection) for GT Works3 Version1 JY997D52301 PDF e-Manual

GT SoftGOT2000 manuals

GOT2000 series user's manuals

GOT SIMPLE series user's manuals

Manuals related to GT Works3 add-on projects

Manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT1000) Refer to the Help and manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT1000).

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual SH-081201ENG PDF e-Manual

MELSOFT GT OPC UA Client Operating Manual SH-082174ENG PDF

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) SH-081194ENG (1D7MJ5)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) SH-081195ENG (1D7MJ6)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor) SH-081196ENG (1D7MJ7)

PDF e-Manual

Manual name Manual number Format GOT SIMPLE Series User's Manual JY997D52901 PDF

e-Manual

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GT Works3 Add-on License for GOT2000 Enhanced Drive Control (Servo) Project Data Manual (Fundamentals)

SH-082072ENG (1D7MV1)

PDF e-Manual

GT Works3 Add-on License for GOT2000 Enhanced Drive Control (Servo) Project Data Manual (Screen Details)

SH-082074ENG (1D7MV3)

PDF e-Manual

23

24

Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons The following shows the abbreviations, generic terms, and model icons used in this manual.

GOT GOT2000 series Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable GT27 GT27-X GT2715-X GT2715-XTBA

GT2715-XTBD

GT27-S GT2712-S GT2712-STBA GT2712-STWA GT2712-STBD GT2712-STWD

GT2710-S GT2710-STBA GT2710-STBD

GT2708-S GT2708-STBA GT2708-STBD

GT27-V GT2710-V GT2710-VTBA GT2710-VTWA GT2710-VTBD GT2710-VTWD

GT2708-V GT2708-VTBA GT2708-VTBD

GT2705-V GT2705-VTBD

GT25 All GT25 models

GT25-W GT2512-WX GT2512-WXTBD GT2512-WXTSD

GT2510-WX GT2510-WXTBD GT2510-WXTSD

GT2507-W GT2507-WTBD GT2507-WTSD

GT2507T-W GT2507T-WTSD

GT25-S GT2512-S GT2512-STBA GT2512-STBD

GT2512F-S GT2512F-STNA GT2512F-STND

GT25-V GT2510-V GT2510-VTBA GT2510-VTWA GT2510-VTBD GT2510-VTWD

GT2510F-V GT2510F-VTNA GT2510F-VTND

GT2508-V GT2508-VTBA GT2508-VTWA GT2508-VTBD GT2508-VTWD

GT2508F-V GT2508F-VTNA GT2508F-VTND

GT2505-V GT2505-VTBD

GT25HS-V Handy GOT

GT2506HS-V GT2506HS-VTBD

GT2505HS-V GT2505HS-VTBD

GT23 GT23-V GT2310-V GT2310-VTBA GT2310-VTBD

GT2308-V GT2308-VTBA GT2308-VTBD

GOT SIMPLE series

GOT1000 series, GOT900 series, and GOT800 series

GT21 All GT21 models

GT21-W GT2107-W GT2107-WTBD GT2107-WTSD

GT21-Q GT2105-Q GT2105-QTBDS GT2105-QMBDS

GT21-R GT2104-R GT2104-RTBD

GT21-P GT2104-P GT2104-PMBD

GT2104-PMBDS

GT2104-PMBDS2

GT2104-PMBLS

GT2103-P GT2103-PMBD

GT2103-PMBDS

GT2103-PMBDS2

GT2103-PMBLS

GT SoftGOT2000 GT SoftGOT2000 Version1

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable GS21 GS21-W-N GS2110-WTBD-N

GS2107-WTBD-N

GS21-W GS2110-WTBD GS2107-WTBD

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable GOT1000 Series GOT1000 Series -

GOT900 Series GOT-A900 Series GOT-F900 Series

-

GOT800 Series GOT-800 Series -

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable

25

26

Communication unit

Option unit

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS

GT15-QBUS2 GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 GT15-J71BR13

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit GT25-J71GN13-T2

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15-J71GP23-SX

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13

Wireless LAN communication unit GT25-WLAN

Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M

Connection conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S

Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP

Ethernet communication unit GT25-J71E71-100

RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Printer unit GT15-PRN

Video input unit GT27-V4-Z (A set of GT16M-V4-Z and GT27-IF1000)

RGB input unit GT27-R2 GT27-R2-Z (A set of GT16M-R2-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Video/RGB input unit GT27-V4R1-Z (A set of GT16M-V4R1-Z and GT27-IF1000)

RGB output unit GT27-ROUT GT27-ROUT-Z (A set of GT16M-ROUT-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Digital video output unit GT27-VHOUT

Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z (A set of GT16M-MMR-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Video signal conversion unit GT27-IF1000

External I/O unit GT15-DIO GT15-DIOR

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT

SD card unit GT21-03SDCD

Option Abbreviations and generic terms Description SD card NZ1MEM-2GBSD

NZ1MEM-4GBSD NZ1MEM-8GBSD NZ1MEM-16GBSD L1MEM-2GBSD L1MEM-4GBSD

Battery GT11-50BAT GT15-BAT

Protective sheet GT27-15PSGC GT25-12WPSGC GT25-12PSGC GT25-10WPSGC GT25-10PSGC GT25-08PSGC GT21-07WPSGC GT25T-07WPSVC GT25-05PSGC GT25-05PSGC-2 GT21-05PSGC GT21-04RPSGC-UC GT21-03PSGC-UC GT21-04PSGC-UC GT27-15PSCC GT25-12WPSCC GT25-12PSCC GT25-10WPSCC GT25-10PSCC GT25-08PSCC GT25-05PSCC GT25-05PSCC-2 GT25-12PSCC-UC GT25-10PSCC-UC GT25-08PSCC-UC GT21-07WPSCC GT21-05PSCC GT21-04RPSCC-UC GT21-04PSCC-UC GT21-03PSCC-UC GT16H-60PSC GT14H-50PSC

Antibacterial/antiviral protective sheet GT25-12PSAC GT25-10PSAC GT25-08PSAC

Environmental protection sheet GT25F-12ESGS GT25F-10ESGS GT25F-08ESGS

Protective cover for oil GT20-15PCO GT20-12PCO GT20-10PCO GT20-08PCO GT21-12WPCO GT21-10WPCO GT21-07WPCO GT25T-07WPCO GT25-05PCO GT25-05PCO-2 GT05-50PCO GT21-04RPCO GT10-30PCO GT10-20PCO

USB environmental protection cover GT25-UCOV GT25-05UCOV GT21-WUCOV

27

28

Software Software related to GOT

Software related to iQ Works

Stand GT15-90STAND GT15-80STAND GT15-70STAND GT05-50STAND GT25-10WSTAND GT21-07WSTAND GT25T-07WSTAND

Attachment GT15-70ATT-98 GT15-70ATT-87 GT15-60ATT-97 GT15-60ATT-96 GT15-60ATT-87 GT15-60ATT-77 GT21-04RATT-40

Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S GT10-C10EXUSB-5S

Connector conversion box GT16H-CNB-42S GT16H-CNB-37S GT11H-CNB-37S

Emergency stop switch guard cover GT16H-60ESCOV GT14H-50ESCOV

Wall-mounting attachment GT14H-50ATT

Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT Works3 SW1DND-GTWK3-J, SW1DND-GTWK3-E, SW1DND-GTWK3-C

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen design software GT Designer3 for GOT2000 and GOT1000 series

GT Designer3 Screen design software for GOT2000 series included in GT Works3

GT Designer3 (GOT2000)

GT Designer3 (GOT1000) Screen design software for GOT1000 series included in GT Works3

Speech synthesis license GT Works Text to Speech License (SW1DND-GTVO-M)

Add-on license GT Works3 add-on license for GOT2000 enhanced drive control (servo) project data (SW1DND- GTSV-MZ)

GENESIS64 Advanced GENESIS64 server application (GEN64-APP)

GENESIS64 Basic SCADA GENESIS64 server application (GEN64-BASIC)

GENESIS64 Generic term of GENESIS64 Advanced and GENESIS64 Basic SCADA

GOT Mobile function license for GT SoftGOT2000 License required to use the GOT Mobile function with GT SoftGOT2000 (SGT2K-WEBSKEY-)

GT Simulator3 Screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT2000, GOT1000, and GOT900 series

GT SoftGOT2000 GOT2000 compatible HMI software GT SoftGOT2000

GT OPC UA Client MELSOFT GT OPC UA Client (SW1DNN-GTOUC-MD)

GT Converter2 Data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 and GOT900 series

GT Designer2 Classic Screen design software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series

GT Designer2 Screen design software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 and GOT900 series

DU/WIN Screen design software FX-PCS-DU/WIN for GOT-F900 series

Abbreviations and generic terms Description iQ Works iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works

MELSOFT Navigator Integrated development environment software included in SWDND-IQWK (iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works) ( represents a version.)

MELSOFT iQ AppPortal SWDND-IQAPL-M type integrated application management software ( represents a version.)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

Other software

License key (for GT SoftGOT2000)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description GX Works3 SWDND-GXW3-E (-EA, -EAZ) type programmable controller engineering software

( represents a version.)

GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-E (-EA, -EAZ) type programmable controller engineering software ( represents a version.)

Controller simulator GX Simulator3 Simulation function of GX Works3

GX Simulator2 Simulation function of GX Works2

GX Simulator SWD5C-LLT-E (-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software package (SW5D5C-LLT (-V) or later versions) ( represents a version.)

GX Developer SWD5C-GPPW-E (-EV)/SWD5F-GPPW (-V) type software package ( represents a version.)

GX LogViewer SWDNN-VIEWER-E type software package ( represents a version.)

MI Configurator Configuration and monitor tool for Mitsubishi Electric industrial computers (SWDNNMICONF-M) ( represents a version.)

PX Developer SWD5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control ( represents a version.)

MT Works2 Motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 (SWDND-MTW2-E) ( represents a version.)

MT Developer SWRNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series ( represents a version.)

CW Configurator Setting/monitoring tools for the C Controller module and MELSECWinCPU (SWDND-RCCPU-E) ( represents a version.)

MR Configurator2 SWDNC-MRC2-E type servo configuration software ( represents a version.)

MR Configurator MRZJW-SETUP type servo configuration software ( represents a version.)

FR Configurator2 Inverter setup software (SWDND-FRC2-E) ( represents a version.)

FR Configurator Inverter setup software (FR-SW-SETUP-WE) ( represents a version.)

NC Configurator2 CNC parameter setting support tool (FCSB1221)

NC Configurator CNC parameter setting support tool

FX Configurator-FP Parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software package for FX3U-20SSC-H (SWD5CFXSSCE) ( represents a version.)

FX Configurator-EN-L FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)

FX Configurator-EN FX3U-ENET type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5C-FXENET-E)

RT ToolBox2 Robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)

RT ToolBox3 Robot program creation software (3F-14C-WINE)

MX Component MX Component Version (SWD5C-ACT-E, SWD5C-ACT-EA) ( represents a version.)

MX Sheet MX Sheet Version (SWD5C-SHEET-E, SWD5C-SHEET-EA) ( represents a version.)

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool CPU module logging configuration tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description License key GT27-SGTKEY-U

29

30

Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description IAI IAI Corporation

AZBIL Azbil Corporation

OMRON OMRON Corporation

KEYENCE KEYENCE CORPORATION

KOYO EI KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

JTEKT JTEKT CORPORATION

SHARP Sharp Corporation

SHINKO Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.

CHINO CHINO CORPORATION

TOSHIBA TOSHIBA CORPORATION

SHIBAURA MACHINE SHIBAURA MACHINE CO.,LTD.

PANASONIC Panasonic Corporation

PANASONIC IDS Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

HITACHI IES Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.

HITACHI Hitachi, Ltd.

HIRATA Hirata Corporation

FUJI FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

MURATEC Muratec products manufactured by Murata Machinery, Ltd.

YASKAWA YASKAWA Electric Corporation

YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric Corporation

RKC RKC INSTRUMENT INC.

ALLEN-BRADLEY Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.

CLPA CC-Link Partner Association

GE GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc.

HMS HMS Industrial Networks

LS IS LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.

MITSUBISHI INDIA Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd.

ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.

SCHNEIDER Schneider Electric SA

SICK SICK AG

SIEMENS Siemens AG

SCHNEIDER EJH Schneider Electric Japan Holdings Ltd.

PLC Programmable controller manufactured by its respective company

Control equipment Control equipment manufactured by its respective company

Temperature controller Temperature controller manufactured by its respective company

Indicating controller Indicating controller manufactured by its respective company

Controller Controller manufactured by its respective company

TSN Switch CC-Link IE TSN Class B (Synchronized Realtime Communication) hub certified by CC-Link Partner Association

General-purpose Switch CC-Link IE TSN Class A (Realtime Communication) hub certified by CC-Link Partner Association

CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module Generic term for the following CC-Link IE TSN master/local modules and CC-Link IE TSN Plus master/local module RJ71GN11-T2 RJ71GN11-EIP FX5-CCLGN-MS

1

1 OVERVIEW Page 31 GOT Page 31 Features

1.1 GOT The GOT is designed to connect to a PLC or other equipment, and to display operation switches, lamps, data, and messages. To use the GOT, mount it on a control panel or an operation panel.

1.2 Features

Enhanced standard equipment Variety of connections with various FA devices The GOT2000 series has different types of interfaces to connect to various FA devices. GT27, GT25: Ethernet, RS-232, RS-422/485, and extension interfaces *1

GT23, GT21: Ethernet, RS-232, and RS-422/485 interfaces *1

*1 The available interfaces vary by model. For the available interfaces for each model, refer to the following. Page 66 Performance Specifications

SD card interface compatible with a large-capacity SDHC card allowing high-speed communication

You can use a large-capacity SDHC card allowing high-speed communication as a data storage. GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2105, GT2104-R, GT2104-P: equipped with the SD card unit as standard *1

GT2103-P: equipped with the SD card unit as an option *1

*1 GT2104-PMBLS and GT2103-PMBLS cannot use SD cards.

Connection with various peripheral devices with the USB host (GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W) You can connect the GOT to various peripherals via the USB (Host) interface. Using a USB memory, USB mouse, USB keyboard, or others enhances your convenience.

Sound output interface as standard equipment (GT25-W only) The speaker with a built-in amplifier is connectable to the GOT without using an extension unit.

Two Ethernet interfaces as standard equipment (GT25-W only) The GOT is connectable to multiple networks without using an extension unit.

Improved usability Enhanced troubleshooting functions The enhanced diagnosis functions and the guidance display reduce the time required for startup or troubleshooting. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)

Easy and simple screen creation You can create screens easily and simply with the screen design software, GT Designer3 Version1. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

GOT2000PLC

Monitoring device values

Data input, switch operation

1 OVERVIEW 1.1 GOT 31

32

Personal computer-like operation screen The personal computer-like operation screen enables intuitive operations.

Multi-touch function, gesture function (GT27 only) Characters can be scaled by pinch-in/out with fingers. Also, screens can be scrolled with a flick operation.

Support for the vertical installation Since the vertical installation is supported, the GOT can be installed in even a vertically oriented space.

Enhanced compatibility with Mitsubishi FA devices The sequence program monitor function enables enhanced compatibility with Mitsubishi FA devices. By using the backup/restoration function, you can save the programs and data of Mitsubishi FA devices (such as PLCs) to an SD card. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)

Easy replacement The existing project data is compatible with the GOT2000 series. You can replace an existing model with the GOT2000 series model easily. The panel cutting dimensions for the GOT2000 series are the same as those for the GOT1000 series. You do not have to rework the control panel for installation. *1

*1 To replace GT104 with GT2104-R, the attachment (GT21-04RATT-40) is required.

Adoption of LED backlight The GOT adopts a long-life LED backlight, and you do not have to replace the backlight.

Compatibility with external devices handling data such as multimedia and video (GT27 (except GT2705) only) You can input or output video signals using the GOT in combination with an extension unit for multimedia.

Abundant functions The GOT supports abundant functions such as the recipe, alarm, operation log, and operator authentication. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Adding a rugged model (GT2507T-W) The rugged model has been added, featuring an expanded operating temperature range, improved visibility, andincreased UV cutoff.

Fitted flush with the control panel (GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, and GT2508F-V) By installing the GOT from the rear of the control panel, the GOT will fit flush with the surface of the control panel.

GOT equipped with the hardware switch and touch panel (GT25HS-V only) The GOT has both the hardware switch (operation switch) and touch panel for inputting commands to controllers.

1 OVERVIEW 1.2 Features

2

2 System configuration Page 33 Overall Configuration Page 35 System Equipment

2.1 Overall Configuration The following shows the overall configuration of the GOT2000 series.

Overall configuration of GT27, GT25-W, GT25-S, GT25-V, GT23, and GT21

RFID controller (Commercially available)

USB mouse (Commercially available)

USB keyboard (Commercially available)

Peripheral device

Protective cover for oil

Protective sheet

Stand

SD card

USB memory (Commercially available)

Optional device

GOT2000

Communication unit

Option unit

Extension unit

Battery Memory card reader/writer (Commercially available)

Barcode reader (Commercially available)

2D code reader (Commercially available)

Personal computer (Commercially available)

External memoryUSB

memory SD card

Screen design softwareGT Works3

Devices for drawing, setting, and data collection

Environmental protection sheet

2 System configuration 2.1 Overall Configuration 33

34

Overall configuration of GT25HS-V Handy GOT

Optional device

SD card

USB memory (Commercially available)

Battery

Protective sheet

Connector Conversion Box

Devices for drawing, setting, and data collection

Personal computer (Commercially available) GT Works3

Screen design software

SD card USB memory

External memory

Connector Conversion Box

2 System configuration 2.1 Overall Configuration

2

2.2 System Equipment The following shows the system equipment of the GOT2000 series. Page 35 GOT Page 38 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit set Page 39 Extension unit Page 42 Software Page 43 Option Page 47 Cable Page 58 Others

GOT The following shows the meaning of the GOT model name.

*1 For GT21 only For the details of each model, refer to the remarks of the table in "2.2.1 GOT". Page 35 GOT

*2 For GT27 and GT25 only

WVGAW

GT27GT27

07 7" wide screen

XGAX SVGAS VGAV

TFT monochromeM With an Ethernet interface

and an RS-422/485 interface

With an RS-232 interface and an RS-422/485 interface,

or with an RS-422 interface only

GT25GT25 GT23GT23 GT21GT21

S *1

None*1

Symbol Model Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol

Symbol Screen size

Resolution Display section Panel color Power type Others

12 12.1" or 12.1" wide screen

10 10.4" or 10.1" wide screen

08 8.4"

05 5.7"

15 15"

T TFT color B Black

W White SilverS

N No frame

A 100 V AC to 240 V AC D 24 V DC

04 4.5" or 4.3"

03 3.8"

Symbol Structure

F Open frame

None Standard

L 5 V DC

With two RS-232 interfacesS2*1

320 128 dots or less

P

QVGAQ 480 272 dotsR CC-Link IE Field Network

communication unit set -GF *2

WXGAWX

06 6.5"

HS Handy

T Rugged

GT27 15 - X T B A

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment 35

36

Classification Model Screen size Display section Display color

Front panel color

Power supply

Remarks

GT27 GT2715 GT2715-XTBA 15" XGA TFT color 65536 colors

Black AC Multimedia Video/RGB compatible Multi-touch compatible

GT2715-XTBD DC

GT2712 GT2712-STBA 12.1" SVGA Black AC

GT2712-STBD DC

GT2712-STWA White AC

GT2712-STWD *1*2 DC

GT2710 GT2710-STBA 10.4" SVGA Black AC

GT2710-STBD DC

GT2710-VTBA 10.4" VGA AC

GT2710-VTBD DC

GT2710-VTWA White AC

GT2710-VTWD *1*2 DC

GT2708 GT2708-STBA 8.4" SVGA Black AC

GT2708-STBD DC

GT2708-VTBA 8.4" VGA AC

GT2708-VTBD DC

GT2705 GT2705-VTBD 5.7" VGA Black DC Multi-touch compatible

GT25 GT2512 GT2512-STBA 12.1" SVGA TFT color 65536 colors

Black AC

GT2512-STBD DC

GT2512F-STNA AC Open frame model

GT2512F-STND DC

GT2510 GT2510-VTBA 10.4" VGA Black AC

GT2510-VTBD DC

GT2510-VTWA White AC

GT2510-VTWD *1*2 DC

GT2510F-VTNA AC Open frame model

GT2510F-VTND DC

GT2508 GT2508-VTBA 8.4" VGA Black AC

GT2508-VTBD DC

GT2508-VTWA White AC

GT2508-VTWD *1*2 DC

GT2508F-VTNA AC Open frame model

GT2508F-VTND DC

GT2505 GT2505-VTBD 5.7" VGA Black DC

GT25 (Wide screen)

GT2512 GT2512-WXTBD 12.1" WXGA TFT color 65536 colors

Black DC Wide model

GT2512-WXTSD Silver *3

GT2510 GT2510-WXTBD 10.1" WXGA Black

GT2510-WXTSD Silver *3

GT2507 GT2507-WTBD 7" WVGA Black

GT2507-WTSD Silver *3

GT25 (Rugged)

GT2507 GT2507T-WTSD 7" WVGA TFT color 65536 colors

Silver DC Rugged model

GT25 (Handy)

GT2506 GT2506HS-VTBD 6.5" VGA TFT color 65536 colors

Black DC Handy GOT

GT2505 GT2505HS-VTBD 5.7" VGA

GT23 GT2310 GT2310-VTBA 10.4" VGA TFT color 65536 colors

Black AC

GT2310-VTBD DC

GT2308 GT2308-VTBA 8.4" VGA AC

GT2308-VTBD DC

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment

2

*1 To make the GOT comply with the ATEX Directive or KCs regulation, an optional protective sheet (GT25-PSCC-UC) and special fittings (GT25-FIT-EXS) are required. (GT2508-VTWD requires the protective sheet only.) For the details of the protective sheet and special fittings, refer to the following. Page 43 Option for GT27, GT25-W, GT25-S, GT25-V, GT23, and GT21

*2 The GOT is not compliant with the ATEX Directive or KCs regulation when any communication unit or option unit is mounted on the GOT. For compliance with the ATEX Directive and KCs regulation, refer to the following Technical Bulletin. GOT2000 Series in Compliance with the ATEX Directive and KCs Certification Requirements (GOT-A-0101)

*3 The lower part of the panel including the USB environmental protection cover is black. For information on the status of conforming to Japanese and international standards and laws (CE, ATEX, UL/cUL, Class I, Division 2, EAC, KC, KCs, and maritime certifications (ABS/BV/DNV/LR/NK/RINA)), refer to the Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website. www.MitsubishiElectric.com/fa

GT21 GT2105 GT2105-QTBDS 5.7" QVGA [320 240 dots] TFT color 65536 colors

Black DC RS-232 RS-422/485

GT2105-QMBDS TFT monochrome (black/white) 32 levels

DC

GT2104 GT2104-RTBD 4.3 [480 272 dots] TFT color 65536 colors

Black DC Ethernet RS-232 RS-422/485

GT2104-PMBD 4.5 [384 128 dots] TFT monochrome (black/white) 32 levels 5-color LED (white, green, pink, orange, and red)

Black DC Ethernet RS-422/485

GT2104-PMBDS DC RS-232 RS-422/485

GT2104-PMBDS2 DC RS-232 2 channels

GT2104-PMBLS 5 V DC RS-422 (for connection to FXCPU only)

GT2103 GT2103-PMBD 3.8 [320 128 dots] TFT monochrome (black/white) 32 levels 5-color LED (white, green, pink, orange, and red)

Black DC Ethernet RS-422/485

GT2103-PMBDS DC RS-232 RS-422/485

GT2103-PMBDS2 DC RS-232 2 channels

GT2103-PMBLS 5 V DC RS-422 (for connection to FXCPU only)

GT21 (Wide screen)

GT2107 GT2107-WTBD 7" WVGA [800 480 dots] TFT color 65536 colors

Black DC Ethernet RS-232 RS-422/485

GT2107-WTSD Silver *3

Classification Model Screen size Display section Display color

Front panel color

Power supply

Remarks

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment 37

38

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit set Classification Model Screen size Display section

Display color Front panel color

Power suppl y

Remarks

GT27 GT2715 GT2715-XTBA-GF 15" XGA TFT color 65536 colors

Black AC GOT + GT15-J71GF13-T2

GT2715-XTBD-GF DC

GT2712 GT2712-STBA-GF 12.1" SVGA Black AC

GT2712-STBD-GF DC

GT2712-STWA-GF White AC

GT2712-STWD-GF DC

GT2710 GT2710-STBA-GF 10.4" SVGA Black AC

GT2710-STBD-GF DC

GT2710-VTBA-GF 10.4" VGA AC

GT2710-VTBD-GF DC

GT2710-VTWA-GF White AC

GT2710-VTWD-GF DC

GT2708 GT2708-STBA-GF 8.4" SVGA Black AC

GT2708-STBD-GF DC

GT2708-VTBA-GF 8.4" VGA AC

GT2708-VTBD-GF DC

GT2705 GT2705-VTBD-GF 5.7" VGA Black DC

GT25 GT2512 GT2512-STBA-GF 12.1" SVGA TFT color 65536 colors

Black AC GOT + GT15-J71GF13-T2

GT2512-STBD-GF DC

GT2510 GT2510-VTBA-GF 10.4" VGA Black AC

GT2510-VTBD-GF DC

GT2510-VTWA-GF White AC

GT2510-VTWD-GF DC

GT2508 GT2508-VTBA-GF 8.4" VGA Black AC

GT2508-VTBD-GF DC

GT2508-VTWA-GF White AC

GT2508-VTWD-GF DC

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment

2

Extension unit

Communication unit Product name Model Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 Ethernet communication unit *1 GT25-J71E71-100 Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T

AUTO MDI/MDI-X *12

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin male)

*12

GT15-RS4-9S RS-422/485 serial communication unit (D-sub 9- pin female) *1*2

*12

GT15-RS4-TE RS-422/485 serial communication unit (terminal block) *1

Can be used only when connected with temperature controllers/indicating controllers by RS-485 connection or at the GOT multi-drop connection

*12

Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS Q-bus connection unit (1 channel), standard model

*12

GT15-QBUS2 Q-bus connection unit (2 channels), standard model

*12

GT15-ABUS A-bus connection unit (1 channel), standard model

*12

GT15-ABUS2 A-bus connection unit (2 channels), standard model

*12

GT15-75QBUSL Q-bus connection unit (1 channel), slim model *3 *12

GT15-75QBUS2L Q-bus connection unit (2 channels), slim model *3 *12

GT15-75ABUSL A-bus connection unit (1 channel), slim model *3 *12

GT15-75ABUS2L A-bus connection unit (2 channels), slim model *3 *12

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 Unit for the normal station (Optical loop) *12

GT15-J71BR13 Unit for the normal station (Coaxial bus) *12

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit GT25-J71GN13- T2

Unit for the local station (device station) *12

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

GT15-J71GP23- SX

Unit for the normal station (Optical loop) *12

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

GT15-J71GF13- T2

Unit for the intelligent device station *12

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13 Unit for the intelligent device station, CC-Link Ver.2 compatible

*12

Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP Adapter unit for field network communication *4 *12

Wireless LAN communication unit *5*6 GT25-WLAN IEEE802.11b/g/n compliant, built-in antenna, wireless LAN access point (base station), station (client), connection to personal computer, tablet, smartphone Compliance with Japan Radio Law *7

FCC standards *8

RE Directive (R&TTE Directive) *8*15

SRRC *9

KC *9

Radio Equipment Regulations (UKCA)*17

*14

Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M For the GOT multi-drop connection *16 *11

Connection conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S For connecting the RS-422/485 (D-sub 9-pin connector) and RS-422/485 (terminal block)

*13 *10

RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter

GT14-RS2T4-9P For connecting the RS-232 (D-sub 9-pin connector) and RS-485 (terminal block)

*13

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment 39

40

*1 May not be able to be used depending on the connection target. For details, refer to GOT2000 Series Connection Manual. *2 Cannot be used when connected with temperature controllers or indicating controllers by RS-485 (2-wire type) connection. *3 Cannot be stacked with other units. *4 The field network adapter unit can be used with the following field networks by using the Anybus CompactCom M40 network

communication module manufactured by HMS. Purchase a communication module by specifying its article number.

*5 Data transfer in wireless LAN communication may not be as stable as that in cable communication. A packet loss may occur depending on the surrounding environment and the installation location. Make sure to validate the operation before using this product.

*6 When [Operation Mode] is set to [Access Point] in [Wireless LAN Setting] of GT Designer3, up to five stations are connectable to the wireless LAN access point (base station).

*7 The product with hardware version A or later (manufactured in December 2013) complies with the regulation. The product with hardware version A can be used only in Japan.

*8 The product with hardware version B or later (manufactured from October 2014) complies with the regulation. The product with hardware version B or later can be used in Japan, the United States, the EU member states, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein.

*9 The product with hardware version D or later (manufactured from May 2016) complies with the regulation. The product with hardware version D or later can be used in Japan, the United States, the EU member states, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, Liechtenstein, China (excluding Hong Kong, Macao, and Taiwan), and South Korea.

*10 Only available to GT2105. *11 Available to GT2107-W, GT2105-Q, GT2104-R, GT2104-PMBD, GT2104-PMBDS, GT2103-PMBD, and GT2103-PMBDS. *12 Not available to GT2512-WXTBD, GT2512-WXTSD, GT2510-WXTBD, GT2510-WXTSD, GT2507-WTBD, GT2507-WTSD, GT2507T-

WTSD, GT2505-VTBD, GT2506HS-VTBD, and GT2505HS-VTBD. *13 Only available to GT2505-VTBD. *14 Not available to GT2505-VTBD, GT2506HS-VTBD and GT2505HS-VTBD. *15 The product complies with the RE Directive from March 31, 2017. *16 Not available to GT2505HS-VTBD. *17 The product with hardware version G or later (manufactured from October 2021) complies with the regulation.

The product with hardware version G or later can be used in Japan, the United States, the EU member states, the UK, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, Liechtenstein, China (excluding Hong Kong, Macao, and Taiwan), and South Korea.

Supported network Communication module product name Communication module article number PROFIBUS DP ABCC-M40-DPV1 AB6910-B, AB6910-C

DeviceNet ABCC-M40-DEV AB6909-B, AB6909-C

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment

2

Option unit

*1 Not available to GT2705. *2 Only available to GT2103-PMBD, GT2103-PMBDS, and GT2103-PMBDS2. *3 The settings for GT27-R2 and GT27-R2-Z differ in the screen design software. *4 Not available to GT2512-WXTBD, GT2512-WXTSD, GT2510-WXTBD, GT2510-WXTSD, GT2507-WTBD, GT2507-WTSD, GT2507T-

WTSD, GT2505-VTBD, GT2506HS-VTBD, and GT2505HS-VTBD.

Product name Model Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 Printer unit GT15-PRN USB device (PictBridge) for printer connection, 1 channel

Cable for connection between printer unit and printer (3m) included

*4

Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z For video input (NTSC/PAL), 1 channel, recording video/playing video files (A set of GT16M-MMR-Z and GT27-IF1000)

*1

Video input unit GT27-V4-Z For video input (NTSC/PAL), 4 channels (A set of GT16M-V4-Z and GT27-IF1000)

*1

RGB input unit GT27-R2 For analog RGB input, 2 channels (Simultaneous display) *3 *1

GT27-R2-Z For analog RGB input, 2 channels (Display by channel) *3

(A set of GT16M-R2-Z and GT27-IF1000) *1

Video/RGB input unit GT27-V4R1-Z For video input (NTSC/PAL), 4 channels/analog RGB, 1 channel input (A set of GT16M-V4R1-Z and GT27-IF1000)

*1

RGB output unit GT27-ROUT For analog RGB output, 1 channel *1

GT27-ROUT-Z For analog RGB output, 1 channel (A set of GT16M-R2-Z and GT27-IF1000)

*1

Digital video output unit GT27-VHOUT For digital video output, 1 channel HDMI Type A connector

*1

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT For sound output (3.5 stereo pin jack) *4

External I/O unit GT15-DIOR For connecting an external I/O device and an operation panel (Negative common input, source type output)

*4

GT15-DIO For connecting an external I/O device and an operation panel (Positive common input, sink type output)

*4

SD card unit GT21-03SDCD For installing an SD card *2

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment 41

42

Software

*1 Anyone can use the product as long as that person belongs to the business office (including overseas offices) of the corporation that purchased the product, or to the same public vocational training facility or other educational institution as the corporation.

*2 The desired number of licenses (2 or more) can be purchased. For details, please contact your local sales office. *3 Volume license product and additional license product are also available. For more details, please refer to the MELSOFT iQ Works

catalog (L(NA)08232ENG). *4 The product includes the following software.

System Management Software [MELSOFT Navigator] Programmable Controller Engineering Software [MELSOFT GX Works3, GX Works2, GX Developer] Motion Controller Engineering Software [MELSOFT MT Works2] GOT Screen Design Software [MELSOFT GT Works3] Robot Engineering Software [MELSOFT RT ToolBox3 mini] Inverter Setup Software [MELSOFT FR Configurator2] Setting/monitoring tools for the C Controller module and MELSECWinCPU [MELSOFT CW Configurator] Servo Setup Software [MELSOFT MR Configurator2] MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Library

*5 To use GT SoftGOT2000, each personal computer requires a license key for GT SoftGOT2000. *6 One license is required for one GOT. *7 This product does not include a DVD-ROM. The license certificate indicating the product ID number is issued only. *8 To edit sound files, each personal computer requires one license. *9 Each personal computer requires an add-on license to use add-on projects. *10 Each personal computer with GT SoftGOT2000 installed requires one license.

Product name Model Description HMI/GOT Screen Design Software MELSOFT GT Works3

SW1DND-GTWK3-E English version Standard license product DVD-ROM

SW1DND-GTWK3-EC Site license product*1

SW1DND-GTWK3-EA Volume license product *2

SW1DND-GTWK3-EAZ Additional license product *2*7

SW1DND-GTWK3-C Simplified Chinese version Standard license product DVD-ROM

FA Integrated Engineering Software MELSOFT iQ Works *3*4

SW2DND-IQWK-E English version Standard license product DVD-ROM

License key for GT SoftGOT2000 *5 GT27-SGTKEY-U For USB port

Remote Personal Computer Operation Function (Ethernet) License *6

GT25-PCRAKEY-1 1 license

GT25-PCRAKEY-5 5 licenses

GT25-PCRAKEY-10 10 licenses

GT25-PCRAKEY-20 20 licenses

VNC Server Function License *6 GT25-VNCSKEY-1 1 license (License for GOT remote access function)

GT25-VNCSKEY-5 5 licenses

GT25-VNCSKEY-10 10 licenses

GT25-VNCSKEY-20 20 licenses

MES I/F Function License *6 GT25-MESIFKEY-1 1 license

GT25-MESIFKEY-5 5 licenses

GT25-MESIFKEY-10 10 licenses

GT25-MESIFKEY-20 20 licenses

GOT Mobile Function License *6 GT25-WEBSKEY-1 1 license

GT25-WEBSKEY-5 5 licenses

GT25-WEBSKEY-10 10 licenses

GT25-WEBSKEY-20 20 licenses

GOT Mobile Function License for GT SoftGOT2000 *10

SGT2K-WEBSKEY-1 1 license

SGT2K-WEBSKEY-5 5 licenses

GT Works Text to Speech License *8 SW1DND-GTVO-M Standard license product

GT Works3 add-on license for GOT2000 enhanced drive control (servo) project data *9

SW1DND-GTSV-MZ Standard license product

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment

2

Option

Option for GT27, GT25-W, GT25-S, GT25-V, GT23, and GT21 Product name Model Description Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 Protective sheet *1 GT27-15PSGC For 15 Antiglare type

Transparent With a hole for the USB environmental protection cover A set of 5 sheets

GT25-12PSGC For 12.1"

GT25-10PSGC For 10.4"

GT25-08PSGC For 8.4"

GT25-05PSGC For 5.7"

GT25-05PSGC-2 For 5.7"

GT25-12WPSGC For 12.1" wide models

Antiglare type Transparent Without a hole for the USB environmental protection cover *10

A set of 5 sheets

GT25-10WPSGC For 10.1" wide models

GT21-07WPSGC For 7" wide models

GT27-15PSCC For 15" Clear type Transparent With a hole for the USB environmental protection cover A set of 5 sheets

GT25-12PSCC For 12.1"

GT25-10PSCC For 10.4"

GT25-08PSCC For 8.4"

GT25-05PSCC For 5.7"

GT25-05PSCC-2 For 5.7"

GT25-12WPSCC For 12.1" wide models

Clear type Transparent Without a hole for the USB environmental protection cover *10

A set of 5 sheets

GT25-10WPSCC For 10.1" wide models

GT21-07WPSCC For 7" wide models

GT25-12PSCC-UC *9

For 12.1" Clear type Transparent Without a hole for the USB environmental protection cover *2

A set of 5 sheets

*9

GT25-10PSCC-UC *9

For 10.4" *9 *9

GT25-08PSCC-UC *9

For 8.4" *9

GT21-05PSGC For 5.7" Antiglare type Transparent With a hole for the USB environmental protection cover A set of 5 sheets

GT21-04RPSGC- UC

For 4.3" Antiglare type Transparent With a hole for the USB environmental protection cover A set of 5 sheets

GT21-04PSGC-UC For 4.5"

GT21-03PSGC-UC For 3.8"

GT21-05PSCC For 5.7" Clear type Transparent With a hole for the USB environmental protection cover A set of 5 sheets

GT21-04RPSCC- UC

For 4.3" Clear type Transparent With a hole for the USB environmental protection cover A set of 5 sheets

GT21-04PSCC-UC For 4.5"

GT21-03PSCC-UC For 3.8"

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment 43

44

Antibacterial/antiviral protective sheet*16

GT25-12PSAC For 12.1" Clear type Transparent With a hole for the USB environmental protection cover Made of acrylic (PMMA) A set of 5 sheets

GT25-10PSAC For 10.4"

GT25-08PSAC For 8.4"

UV protective sheet (for the rugged model)

GT25T-07WPSVC For 7" rugged model

Antiglare type (UV cutoff) Transparent With a hole for the USB environmental protection cover 1 sheet

*12

Environmental protection sheet (for the open frame model)

GT25F-12ESGS For 12.1" For conforming to IP67F Antiglare type Silver 1 sheet

*7

GT25F-10ESGS For 10.4" *7

GT25F-08ESGS For 8.4" *7

USB environmental protection cover

GT25-UCOV For 15/12.1/ 10.4/8.4"

Environmental protection cover for the USB interface on the GOT front face (for replacement)

GT25-05UCOV For 5.7"

GT21-WUCOV For 12.1" wide models/ 10.1" wide models/7" wide models/ 5.7"

*15

GT14-50UCOV For 5.7"

Protective cover for oil *3 GT20-15PCO For 15"

GT20-12PCO For 12.1"

GT20-10PCO For 10.4"

GT20-08PCO For 8.4"

GT25-05PCO For 5.7" *13

GT25-05PCO-2 For 5.7" *14

GT21-12WPCO For 12.1" wide models

GT21-10WPCO For 10.1" wide models

GT21-07WPCO For 7" wide models

GT25T-07WPCO For 7" rugged model *12

GT05-50PCO For 5.7"

GT21-04RPCO For 4.3"

GT10-30PCO For 4.5"

GT10-20PCO For 3.8"

Stand GT15-90STAND For 15"

GT15-80STAND For 12.1"

GT15-70STAND For 10.4"/8.4"

GT05-50STAND For 5.7"

GT25-10WSTAND For 10.1" wide models

GT21-07WSTAND For 7" wide models

GT25T-07WSTAND For 7" rugged model *12

Product name Model Description Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment

2

*1 The white model does not have a front USB interface. Use a protective sheet without a hole for the USB environmental protection cover.

*2 When using a protective sheet without a hole for the USB environmental protection cover, the front USB interface cannot be used. *3 Check if the protective cover for oil can be used in the actual environment before use.

When using the protective cover for oil, you cannot use the front USB interface and the human sensor. *4 Including the GP250 and GP260 manufactured by SCHNEIDER EJH. *5 GT2103-P does not have a built-in battery. *6 GT21 does not support the system status log data backup function. *7 Only available to GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, and GT2508F-V. *8 Only available to GT2104-RTBD. *9 Necessary for the GOT to comply with the ATEX directive and KCs regulation.

For applicable GOT models, refer to Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website. www.MitsubishiElectric.com/fa

*10 The protective sheet is shaped not to cover the USB environmental protection cover. *11 An attachment is usable when the control panel has a thickness of 2 to 3 mm.

When an attachment is used, the GOT is not IP67F-rated. *12 Only available to GT2507T-W. *13 Only available to GT2705-V. *14 Only available to GT2505-V. *15 Only available to GT2107-W. *16 Not available to the open frame models and wide models.

Memory card SD card NZ1MEM-2GBSD SD memory card for GOT, 2 GB

NZ1MEM-4GBSD SDHC memory card for GOT, 4 GB

NZ1MEM-8GBSD SDHC memory card for GOT, 8GB

NZ1MEM-16GBSD SDHC memory card for GOT, 16GB

L1MEM-2GBSD SD memory card for GOT, 2 GB

L1MEM-2GBSD SDHC memory card for GOT, 4 GB

CF card GT05-MEM-128MC CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 128 MB

GT05-MEM-256MC CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 256 MB

GT05-MEM-512MC CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 512 MB

GT05-MEM-1GC CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 1 GB

GT05-MEM-2GC CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 2 GB

GT05-MEM-256MC CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 4 GB

GT05-MEM-256MC CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 8 GB

GT05-MEM-256MC CF card for GT27-MMR-Z, 16GB

Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC Conversion adapter from CF card for GT27-MMR-Z to memory card (TYPE II)

Attachment *11 GT15-70ATT-98 For 10.4" For replacing GT168, GT158, A985GOT *4

GT15-70ATT-87 For replacing A870GOT-SWS/TWS or A8GT- 70GOT-TB/TW/SB/SW

GT15-60ATT-97 For 8.4" For replacing GT167, GT157, or A97GOT

GT15-60ATT-96 For replacing A960GOT

GT15-60ATT-87 For replacing A870GOT-EWS, A8GT- 70GOTEB/EW, A77GOT-EL, or A77GOT-EL- S5/S3

GT15-60ATT-77 For replacing A77GOT-CL, A77GOT-CL-S5/ S3, A77GOT-L, or A77GOT-L-S5/S3

GT15-50ATT-95W For 5.7" For replacing A956WGOT, F940WGOT

GT15-50ATT-85 For replacing A85GOT

GT21-04RATT-40 For 4.3" For replacing GT104 *8

Battery GT11-50BAT Battery for backup of SRAM data, clock data, and system status log data. *6

(Replac ement)

(Replac ement)

(Option )

*5

(Replac ement)

Special fitting *9 GT25-12FIT-EXS For 12.1 For compliance with the ATEX directive and KCs regulation

GT25-10FIT-EXS For 10.4

Product name Model Description Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment 45

46

Option for GT25HS-V : Usable, -: Not usable

Product name Model Description Supported model

GT2506HS- V

GT2505HS- V

Protective sheet GT16H-60PSC For 6.5 Clear type A set of 5 sheets

GT14H-50PSC For 5.7 Clear type A set of 5 sheets

Emergency stop switch guard cover

GT16H-60ESCOV Cover for preventing the emergency stop switch incorrect operation

GT14H-50ESCOV

SD card NZ1MEM-2GBSD SD memory card for GOT, 2 GB

NZ1MEM-4GBSD SD memory card for GOT, 4GB

NZ1MEM-8GBSD SD memory card for GOT, 8GB

NZ1MEM-16GBSD SD memory card for GOT, 16GB

Battery GT15-BAT Battery for backing up SRAM data, clock data, and system status log data

GT11-50BAT

Connector conversion box

GT16H-CNB-42S With a D-sub connector and an Ethernet RJ45 connector

GT16H-CNB-37S With an Ethernet RJ45 connector

GT11H-CNB-37S With a D-sub connector

Wall-mounting attachment

GT14H-50ATT For Handy GOT

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment

2

Cable

Cable for MITSUBISHI PLC For external dimensions of cable for MITSUBISHI PLC, refer to the following. Page 426 External Dimension Diagrams of the Communication Cable

Product name Model Cable length

Recommended product *1

Specifications Supported model

GT 27

GT 25

GT 23

GT 21

QCPU bus connection cable

QCPU connection cable GOT-to-GOT connection cable

GT15-QC06B 0.6 m For connecting the QCPU and the GOT For connecting the GOTs

*14

GT15-QC12B 1.2 m

GT15-QC30B 3 m

GT15-QC50B 5 m

GT15-QC100B 10 m

QCPU connection cable GOT-to-GOT connection cable (long distance)

GT15-QC150BS 15 m For connecting the QCPU and the GOT (long distance), A9GTQCNB is required For connecting the GOTs (long distance)

*14

GT15-QC200BS 20 m

GT15-QC250BS 25 m

GT15-QC300BS 30 m

GT15-QC350BS 35 m

Bus extension connector box A9GT-QCNB Connect the connector box to the main base unit of PLC when connecting the QCPU and the GOT (long distance)

*14

Ferrite core for the bus connection cable

GT15-QFC Attach a ferrite core to the GOTA900 bus connection cable when an existing GOT-A900 is replaced with a GOT2000. (two ferrite cores/set)

*14

RS-485 terminal block conversion unit FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 0.5 m RS-485 terminal block conversion unit with a cable for connecting RS-422/485 (connector) of GOT2000 and a RS-485 terminal block conversion unit

*21

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 1 m

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 2 m

RS-422 connector conversion cable FA-CNV2402CBL 0.2 m For connecting the QCPU/ L02SCPU(-P) and the RS-422 cable (GT01-CR4-25P, GT10- CR4-25P, GT21-CR4-25P5) For connecting the L6ADPR2 and the RS-422 cable (GT01-CR4- 25P, GT10-CR4-25P, GT21- CR4-25P5) [MINI-DIN 6-pin D-sub 25- pin]

*12

FA-CNV2405CBL 0.5 m

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment 47

48

RS-422 cable

QnA/A/FXCPU direct connection cable Computer link connection cable CC-Link (G4) connection cable

GT01-C30R4-25P 3 m For connecting the QnA/ACPU/ Motion CPU (A series)/FXCPU and the GOT For connection between the RS- 422 connector conversion cable (FACNVCBL) and the GOT For connection between the serial communication module and the GOT For connection between the peripheral connection module (AJ65BT-G4-S3) and the GOT [D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin]

*20

*3*7

GT01-C100R4-25P 10 m

GT01-C200R4-25P 20 m

GT01-C300R4-25P 30 m

GT10-C30R4-25P 3 m For connecting the QnA/ACPU/ Motion CPU (A series)/FXCPU and the GOT For connection between the RS- 422 connector conversion cable (FACNVCBL) and the GOT For connection between the serial communication module and the GOT For connecting the peripheral connection module (AJ65BT-G4- S3) and the GOT [D-sub 25-pin separate wire (Connector terminal block 9-pin)]

*10

GT10-C100R4-25P 10 m

GT10-C200R4-25P 20 m

GT10-C300R4-25P 30 m

GT21-C30R4-25P5 3 m For connecting the QnACPU and the GOT For connecting the RS-422 connector conversion cable (FA- CNVCBL) and the GOT For connection between the serial communication module and the GOT For connection between the peripheral connection module (AJ65BT-G4-S3) and the GOT [D-sub 25-pin separate wire (Connector terminal block 5-pin)] * GT2104-PMBD and GT2103- PMBD cannot be connected to Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, A series, FX1 series, or FX2 series.

*2

GT21-C100R4-25P5 10 m

GT21-C200R4-25P5 20 m

GT21-C300R4-25P5 30 m

Computer link connection cable

GT09-C30R4-6C 3 m For connecting the serial communication module and the GOT For connection between the computer link module and the GOT [Separate wire D-sub 9-pin]

*20

*3*7

GT09-C100R4-6C 10 m

GT09-C200R4-6C 20 m

GT09-C300R4-6C 30 m

Product name Model Cable length

Recommended product *1

Specifications Supported model

GT 27

GT 25

GT 23

GT 21

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment

2

RS-422 cable

FXCPU direct connection cable FXCPU communication function extension board connection cable

GT01-C10R4-8P 1 m For connection between the FXCPU and the GOT For connecting the FXCPU communication function extension board and the GOT [MINI-DIN 8-pin D-sub 9-pin]

*20

*3*7

GT01-C30R4-8P 3 m

GT01-C100R4-8P 10 m

GT01-C200R4-8P 20 m

GT01-C300R4-8P 30 m

GT10-C10R4-8P 1 m For connection between the FXCPU and the GOT For connecting the FXCPU communication function extension board and the GOT [MINI-DIN 8-pin separate wire (Connector terminal block 9- pin)]

*4

GT10-C30R4-8P 3 m

GT10-C100R4-8P 10 m

GT10-C200R4-8P 20 m

GT10-C300R4-8P 30 m

GT21-C10R4-8P5 1 m For connection between the FXCPU and the GOT For connecting the FXCPU communication function extension board and the GOT [MINI-DIN 8-pin separate wire (Connector terminal block 5- pin)]

*2

GT21-C30R4-8P5 3 m

GT21-C100R4-8P5 10 m

GT21-C200R4-8P5 20 m

GT21-C300R4-8P5 30 m

GT10-C10R4-8PL 1 m For connection between the FXCPU and the GOT For connecting the FXCPU communication function extension board and the GOT [MINI-DIN 8-pin separate wire (Connector terminal block 9- pin)] * This cable cannot be used for FX1NC, FX2NC, FX3UC-D/DSS, FX3G, FX3GC, and FX3S.

*4

GT10-C10R4-8PC 1 m For connection between the FXCPU and the GOT For connecting the FXCPU communication function extension board and the GOT [MINI-DIN 8-pin connector terminal block 9-pin with separate wire connected]

*4

GT10-C30R4-8PC 3 m

GT10-C100R4-8PC 10 m

GT10-C200R4-8PC 20 m

GT10-C300R4-8PC 30 m

RS-422 connector conversion cable

GT10-C02H-9SC 0.2 m For connecting the PLC and the GOT [D-sub 9-pin separate wire (Connector terminal block 9-pin)]

*10

Product name Model Cable length

Recommended product *1

Specifications Supported model

GT 27

GT 25

GT 23

GT 21

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment 49

50

RS-232 cable

Q/LCPU direct connection cable

GT01-C30R2-6P 3 m For connection between the Q/ LCPU and the GOT For connection between the L6ADP-R2 and the GOT/personal computer (GT SoftGOT2000) [MINI-DIN 6-pin D-sub 9-pin]

*18

*5*8

GT10-C30R2-6P 3 m For connection between the Q/ LCPU and the GOT [MINI-DIN 6-pin separate wire (Connector terminal block 9- pin)]

*6

For connecting multiple GOTs [MINI-DIN 6-pin separate wire (Connector terminal block 9- pin)]

*11

GT11H-C30R2-6P 3 m For connecting a QCPU or LCPU and the connector conversion box for Handy GOT

*17

FXCPU communication function extension board connection cable FXCPU communication special adapter connection cable

GT01-C30R2-9S 3 m For connecting the FXCPU communication expansion board and the GOT/personal computer (GT SoftGOT2000) For connecting an FXCPU communication special adapter and the GOT/personal computer (GT SoftGOT2000) [D-sub 9-pin D-sub 9-pin]

*5*8

FXCPU communication special adapter connection cable

GT01-C30R2-25P 3 m For connecting an FXCPU communication special adapter and the GOT/personal computer (GT SoftGOT2000) [D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin]

*5*8

Computer link connection cable CC-Link (G4) connection cable

GT09-C30R2-9P 3 m For connecting the serial communication module and the GOT For connection between the computer link module and the GOT For connecting the peripheral connection module (AJ65BTR2N) and the GOT [D-sub 9-pin D-sub 9-pin]

*5*8

RS-232 cable

Computer link connection cable

GT09-C30R2-25P 3 m For connecting the serial communication module and the GOT For connection between the computer link module and the GOT [D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin]

*5*8

RS-232 connector conversion cable

GT10-C02H-6PT9P 0.2 m For connecting the PLC and the GOT For connecting multiple GOTs For connecting the barcode reader, RFID, or serial printer and the GOT [D-sub 9-pin MINI-DIN 6-pin]

*11

Data transfer cable GT01-C30R2-6P 3 m For connecting the GOT and the personal computer [D-sub 9-pin MINI-DIN 6-pin] * This cable is usable for the FA transparent function only, and cannot be used to transfer screen or OS data.

*11

Product name Model Cable length

Recommended product *1

Specifications Supported model

GT 27

GT 25

GT 23

GT 21

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment

2

Conversion cable for connecting the external I/O unit

GT15-C03HTB 0.3 m For connecting an external I/O unit (GT15-DIO) and external I/O interface unit (A8GT-C05TK, A8GTC30TB, user-fabricated cable) for GOT-A900

*14

Analog RGB cable GT15-C50VG 5 m For connecting an RGB video output device (external monitor, personal computer, or others) and GOT

USB cable Data transfer cable Printer connection cable

GT09-C30USB-5P 3 m For connecting a personal computer (screen design software) and the GOT For connecting a personal computer (GT SoftGOT2000) and QnU/L/FXCPU For connecting a PictBridge- compatible printer and printer unit (GT15-PRN) [USB-A USB Mini-B]

*9

Extended USB waterproof cable GT14-C10EXUSB-4S 1 m For routing the USB port (Host) of the GOT rear face to the front side of the control panel

*13

GT10-C10EXUSB-5S 1 m For routing the USB port (Device) of the GOT rear face to the front side of the control panel

*15

*15

*16

External cable GT16H-C30-42P 3 m For connection between the Handy GOT and the connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB- 42S)

*17

GT16H-C60-42P 6 m *17

GT16H-C100-42P 10 m *17

GT14H-C30-42P 3 m *19

GT14H-C60-42P 6 m *19

GT14H-C100-42P 10 m *19

GT16H-C30-37PE 3 m For connection between the Handy GOT and the connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB- 37S)

*17

GT16H-C60-37PE 6 m *17

GT16H-C100-37PE 10 m *17

GT11H-C30-37P 3 m For connection between the Handy GOT and the connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB-37S and GT11H-CNB-37S) For connection between the Handy GOT and the relay cable (GT11H-C15R-P)

*19

GT11H-C60-37P 6 m *19

GT11H-C100-37P 10 m *19

GT11H-C30 3 m For connection between the Handy GOT and the FA device, the power supply, or the operation switch

*19

GT11H-C60 6 m *19

GT11H-C100 10 m *19

Relay cable GT11H-C15R4-8P 1.5 m For connecting to the PLC *19

GT11H-C15R4-25P 1.5 m *19

GT11H-C15R2-6P 1.5 m *19

Product name Model Cable length

Recommended product *1

Specifications Supported model

GT 27

GT 25

GT 23

GT 21

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment 51

52

*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL, FA-CNV240CBL are developed by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Company Limited and sold through your local sales office. The other products listed are developed by Mitsubishi Electric Systems & Service Co., LTD. and sold through your local sales office.

*2 This cable is usable for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. *3 This cable is usable for GT2107-WTBD, GT2107-WTSD, GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS, GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBDS,

GT2103-PMBDS. *4 Only available to GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBDS, GT2104-PMBLS, GT2103-PMBDS, and GT2103-PMBLS.

For GT2104-PMBLS and GT2103-PMBLS, use a 3 m or shorter cable. *5 This cable is usable for GT2107-WTBD, GT2107-WTSD, GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS, GT2104-PMBDS, GT2104-PMBDS2,

GT2103-PMBDS, GT2103-PMBDS2. *6 Only available to GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBDS2, and GT2103-PMBDS2. *7 Available to GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBDS, and GT2103-PMBDS when the RS-422 connector conversion cable (GT10-C02H-9SC)

is used together. *8 This cable is usable for GT2104-PMBDS, GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBDS, and GT2103-PMBDS2 with the RS-232 connector

conversion cable GT10-C02H-6PT9P. *9 This cable is not usable for the printer connection. *10 This cable is usable for GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBDS, GT2103-PMBDS. *11 Only available to GT2104-PMBDS, GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBDS, and GT2103-PMBDS2. *12 This cable is usable for GT2107-WTBD, GT2107-WTSD, GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS, GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBD,

GT2104-PMBDS, GT2103-PMBD, GT2103-PMBDS. *13 This cable is usable for GT2107-WTBD, GT2107-WTSD. *14 Not available to GT2512-WXTBD, GT2512-WXTSD, GT2510-WXTBD, GT2510-WXTSD, GT2507-WTBD, GT2507-WTSD, GT2507T-

WTSD, GT2505-VTBD, GT2506HS-VTBD, and GT2505HS-VTBD. *15 Available to GT2712-STWA, GT2712-STWD, GT2710-VTWA, GT2710-VTWD, GT2512F-STNA, GT2512F-STND, GT2510-VTWA,

GT2510-VTWD, GT2510F-VTNA, GT2510F-VTND, GT2508-VTWA, GT2508-VTWD, GT2508F-VTNA, GT2508F-VTND, and GT2507T- WTSD

*16 This cable is usable for GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBD, GT2104-PMBDS, GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2104-PMBLS, GT2103-PMBD, GT2103-PMBDS, GT2103-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBLS.

*17 Only available to GT2506HS-VTBD. *18 Not available to GT2506HS-VTBD and GT2505HS-VTBD *19 Only available to GT2505HS-VTBD *20 The total length of the cables between the Handy GOT and a controller includes the length of external cable.

A cable of 20 m or longer cannot be used for GT2506HS-VTBD and GT2505HS-VTBD. For the details, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1

*21 Not available to GT2505-VTBD, GT2506HS-VTBD, and GT2505HS-VTBD

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment

2

Cable for OMRON PLC

*1 Available to GT2104-PMBDS, GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBDS, and GT2103-PMBDS2 when the RS-232 connector conversion cable (GT10-C02H-6PT9P) is used together.

*2 Available to GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBDS, and GT2103-PMBDS when the RS-422 connector conversion cable (GT10-C02H-9SC) is used together.

Cable for KEYENCE PLC

*1 Available to GT2104-PMBDS, GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBDS, and GT2103-PMBDS2 when the RS-232 connector conversion cable (GT10-C02H-6PT9P) is used together.

*2 Available to GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBDS, and GT2103-PMBDS when the RS-422 connector conversion cable (GT10-C02H-9SC) is used together.

Product name Model Cable length

Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 RS-232 cable GT09-C30R20101-9P 3 m For connecting the OMRON PLC/serial communication

module/communication board and the GOT *1

GT09-C30R20102-25S 3 m For connecting the OMRON connection cable and the GOT

GT09-C30R20103-25P 3 m For connecting the OMRON rack type host link unit and the GOT

RS-422 cable GT09-C30R40101-9P 3 m For connecting the OMRON PLC/serial communication module/serial communication board and the GOT

*2

GT09-C100R40101-9P 10 m

GT09-C200R40101-9P 20 m

GT09-C300R40101-9P 30 m

GT09-C30R40102-9P 3 m For connecting the OMRON rack type host link unit and the GOT

*2

GT09-C100R40102-9P 10 m

GT09-C200R40102-9P 20 m

GT09-C300R40102-9P 30 m

GT09-C30R40103-5T 3 m For connecting the OMRON communication board and the GOT

*2

GT09-C100R40103-5T 10 m

GT09-C200R40103-5T 20 m

GT09-C300R40103-5T 30 m

Product name Model Cable length

Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 RS-232 cable GT09-C30R21101-6P 3 m For connecting the KEYENCE PLC and the GOT *1

GT09-C30R21102-9S 3 m For connecting the KEYENCE multi-communication unit and the GOTGT09-C30R21103-3T 3 m

RS-422 cable GT09-C30R41101-5T 3 m For connecting the KEYENCE multi-communication unit and the GOT

*2

GT09-C100R41101-5T 10 m

GT09-C200R41101-5T 20 m

GT09-C300R41101-5T 30 m

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment 53

54

Cable for SHARP PLC

Cable for JTEKT PLC

Cable for SHINKO indicating controller

Product name Model Cable length

Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 RS-232 cable GT09-C30R20601-15P 3 m For connecting the SHARP PLC and the GOT

GT09-C30R20602-15P 3 m

RS-422 cable GT09-C30R40601-15P 3 m For connecting the SHARP PLC and the GOT

GT09-C100R40601-15P 10 m

GT09-C200R40601-15P 20 m

GT09-C300R40601-15P 30 m

GT09-C30R40602-15P 3 m

GT09-C100R40602-15P 10 m

GT09-C200R40602-15P 20 m

GT09-C300R40602-15P 30 m

GT09-C30R40603-6T 3 m

GT09-C100R40603-6T 10 m

GT09-C200R40603-6T 20 m

GT09-C300R40603-6T 30 m

Product name Model Cable length

Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 RS-232 cable GT09-C30R21201-25P 3 m For connecting the JTEKT PLC and the GOT

RS-422 cable GT09-C30R41201-6C 3 m For connecting the JTEKT PLC and the GOT

GT09-C100R41201-6C 10 m

GT09-C200R41201-6C 20 m

GT09-C300R41201-6C 30 m

Product name Model Cable length

Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 RS-232 cable GT09-C30R21401-4T 3 m For connecting the SHINKO indicating controller and

the GOT

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment

2

Cable for TOSHIBA PLC

Cable for HITACHI IES PLC

Cable for HITACHI PLC

Product name Model Cable length

Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 RS-232 cable GT09-C30R20501-9P 3 m For connecting the TOSHIBA PLC and the GOT

GT09-C30R20502-15P 3 m

RS-422 cable GT09-C30R40501-15P 3 m For connecting the TOSHIBA PLC and the GOT

GT09-C100R40501-15P 10 m

GT09-C200R40501-15P 20 m

GT09-C300R40501-15P 30 m

GT09-C30R40502-6C 3 m

GT09-C100R40502-6C 10 m

GT09-C200R40502-6C 20 m

GT09-C300R40502-6C 30 m

GT09-C30R40503-15P 3 m

GT09-C100R40503-15P 10 m

GT09-C200R40503-15P 20 m

GT09-C300R40503-15P 30 m

Product name Model Cable length

Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 RS-232 cable GT09-C30R20401-15P 3 m For connecting the HITACHI IES PLC/intelligent serial

port module and the GOT

GT09-C30R20402-15P 3 m For connecting the HITACHI IES PLC and the GOT

RS-422 cable GT09-C30R40401-7T 3 m For connecting the HITACHI IES intelligent serial port module and the GOT

GT09-C100R40401-7T 10 m

GT09-C200R40401-7T 20 m

GT09-C300R40401-7T 30 m

Product name Model Cable length

Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 RS-232 cable GT09-C30R21301-9S 3 m For connecting the HITACHI communication module

and the GOT

RS-422 cable GT09-C30R41301-9S 3 m For connecting the HITACHI PLC/communication module and the GOT

GT09-C100R41301-9S 10 m

GT09-C200R41301-9S 20 m

GT09-C300R41301-9S 30 m

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment 55

56

Cable for FUJI FA PLC

Cable for Panasonic IDS PLC

*1 Available to GT2104-PMBDS, GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBDS, and GT2103-PMBDS2 when the RS-232 connector conversion cable (GT10-C02H-6PT9P) is used together.

Cable for YASKAWA PLC

*1 Available to GT2104-PMBDS, GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBDS, and GT2103-PMBDS2 when the RS-232 connector conversion cable (GT10-C02H-6PT9P) is used together.

*2 Available to GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBDS, and GT2103-PMBDS when the RS-422 connector conversion cable (GT10-C02H-9SC) is used together.

Product name Model Cable length

Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 RS-232 cable GT09-C30R21003-25P 3 m For connecting the FUJI FA RS-232C interface card/

RS-232C interface capsule/RS-485 interface capsule/ general-purpose interface module and the GOT

RS-422 cable GT09-C30R41001-6T 3 m For connecting the FUJI FA RS-232C interface capsule/ 485 interface capsule/general-purpose interface module and the GOT

GT09-C100R41001-6T 10 m

GT09-C200R41001-6T 20 m

GT09-C300R41001-6T 30 m

Product name Model Cable length

Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 RS-232 cable GT09-C30R20901-25P 3 m For connecting the Panasonic IDS RS-422/RS-232C

conversion adapter and the GOT *1

GT09-C30R20902-9P 3 m For connecting the Panasonic IDS PLC/computer communication unit and the GOT

*1

GT09-C30R20903-9P 3 m For connecting the Panasonic IDS PLC and the GOT *1

GT09-C30R20904-3C 3 m

Product name Model Cable length

Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 RS-232 cable GT09-C30R20201-9P 3 m For connecting the YASKAWA PLC and the GOT *1

GT09-C30R20202-15P 3 m

GT09-C30R20203-9P 3 m

GT09-C30R20204-14P 3 m

GT09-C30R20205-25P 3 m For connecting the YASKAWA MEMOBUS module and the GOT

*1

RS-422 cable GT09-C30R40201-9P 3 m For connecting the YASKAWA MEMOBUS module and the GOT

*2

GT09-C100R40201-9P 10 m

GT09-C200R40201-9P 20 m

GT09-C300R40201-9P 30 m

GT09-C30R40202-14P 3 m For connecting the YASKAWA PLC and the GOT *2

GT09-C100R40202-14P 10 m

GT09-C200R40202-14P 20 m

GT09-C300R40202-14P 30 m

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment

2

Cable for YOKOGAWA PLC and temperature controller

ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC cables

*1 Available to GT2104-PMBDS, GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBDS, and GT2103-PMBDS2 when the RS-232 connector conversion cable (GT10-C02H-6PT9P) is used together.

Cable for SIEMENS PLC

*1 Available to GT2104-PMBDS, GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBDS, and GT2103-PMBDS2 when the RS-232 connector conversion cable (GT10-C02H-6PT9P) is used together.

Product name Model Cable length

Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 RS-232 cable GT09-C30R20301-9P 3 m For connecting the YOKOGAWA CPU port/D-sub 9-pin

conversion cable and the GOT

GT09-C30R20302-9P 3 m For connecting the YOKOGAWA PC link module and the GOT

GT09-C30R20304-9S 3 m For connection the YOKOGAWA converter (ML2- ) and the GOT

GT09-C30R20305-9S 3 m For connecting the YOKOGAWA PLC and the GOT

RS-422 cable GT09-C30R40301-6T 3 m For connecting the YOKOGAWA PC link module and the GOT

GT09-C100R40301-6T 10 m

GT09-C200R40301-6T 20 m

GT09-C300R40301-6T 30 m

GT09-C30R40302-6T 3 m

GT09-C100R40302-6T 10 m

GT09-C200R40302-6T 20 m

GT09-C300R40302-6T 30 m

GT09-C30R40303-6T 3 m For connecting the YOKOGAWA temperature controller (GREEN series) and the GOT

GT09-C100R40303-6T 10 m

GT09-C200R40303-6T 20 m

GT09-C300R40303-6T 30 m

GT09-C30R40304-6T 3 m For connecting the YOKOGAWA temperature controller (UT2000 series) and the GOT

GT09-C100R40304-6T 10 m

GT09-C200R40304-6T 20 m

GT09-C300R40304-6T 30 m

Product name Model Cable length

Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 RS-232 cable GT09-C30R20701-9S 3 m For connecting the ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC and the

GOT *1

Product name Model Cable length

Specifications Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 RS-232 cable GT09-C30R20801-9S 3 m For connecting the SIEMENS HMI Adapter and the

GOT *1

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment 57

58

Others

Peripherals Of the following peripheral devices, you can use some models that we validated. For the validated models expect the SD cards, refer to the following Technical Bulletin. List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT2000 Series and GOT SIMPLE Series (for Overseas) (GOT-A-0160) For the validated models of the SD cards, refer to the following Technical Bulletin. Information of valid Non-Mitsubishi SD cards applicable for GOT2000 series (GOT-A-0065) For Technical Bulletins, go to the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website. www.MitsubishiElectric.com/fa

Product name Overview Barcode reader RS-232 connection Commercially available product

USB connection

2D code reader RS-232 connection

USB connection

RFID controller RS-232 connection

USB connection

USB mouse

USB keyboard

Memory card reader/writer

SD card

USB memory

Hub

Wireless LAN access point

Video camera

Speaker

2 System configuration 2.2 System Equipment

3

3 SPECIFICATIONS Page 59 General Specifications Page 66 Performance Specifications Page 110 Specifications of Power Supply Section Page 117 Battery Specifications

3.1 General Specifications This section describes the general specifications of the GOT.

GT27, GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W, GT25-S, GT25-V

*1 Indicates the temperature inside the enclosure of the control panel on which the GOT is installed. *2 When any of the following units is mounted, the maximum operating ambient temperature must be 5C lower than the one described in

the general specifications. GT27: Multimedia unit (GT27-MMR-Z) MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13) CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) Protective cover for oil GT25 (Except for GT25-W, GT2505-V): MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13) CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) Protective cover for oil GT25-W, GT2505-V: Protective cover for oil

*3 Do not use or store the GOT under a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure at an altitude 0 m. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Air purging by applying pressure to the control panel may create clearance between the surface sheet and the touch panel. This may cause the touch panel to be not sensitive enough or the sheet to come off.

Item Specifications Operating ambient temperature *1

0 C to 55 C *2*7

Storage ambient temperature -20C to 60C

Operating ambient humidity 10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing *8

Storage ambient humidity 10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing *8

Vibration resistance Compliant with JIS B3502 and IEC 61131-2

Frequency Acceleratio n

Half amplitude

Sweep count

Under intermittent vibration

5 Hz to 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm X, Y, or Z 10 times in each direction

8.4 Hz to 150 Hz

9.8 m/s2

Under continuous vibration

5 Hz to 8.4 Hz 1.75 mm

8.4 Hz to 150 Hz

4.9 m/s2

Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147 m/s2(15 G), 3 times in each X, Y, or Z direction)

Operating atmosphere *6 No greasy fumes, corrosive gas, flammable gas, excessive conductive dust, and direct sunlight (as well as at storage)

Operating altitude *3 2000 m or less

Installation location Inside control panel

Overvoltage category *4 II or less

Pollution degree *5 2 or less

Cooling method Self-cooling

Grounding Grounding with a ground resistance of 100 or less by using a ground cable that has a cross-sectional area of 2 mm2 or more. If impossible, connect the ground cable to the control panel.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 General Specifications 59

60

*4 This indicates the power distribution section to which the equipment is assumed to be connected, between the public power grid and the machinery within the premises. Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The withstand surge voltage for the equipment with the rated voltage up to 300 V is 2500 V.

*5 This indicates the occurrence rate of conductive material in an environment where a device is used. Pollution degree 2 indicates an environment where only non-conductive pollution occurs normally and a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected depending on the conditions.

*6 Some models have ANSI/ISA12.12.01 approval for use in Class I, Division 2 (ANSI/ISA 12.12.01, C22.2 No.213-M1987) hazardous locations. For applicable GOT models, refer to the Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website. www.MitsubishiElectric.com/fa

*7 For the vertically-oriented GT2505, the operating ambient temperature must be 0 to 50C. *8 If the ambient temperature of GT2505-V exceeds 40C, observe the maximum absolute humidity that is calculated based on 90% RH at

40C.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 General Specifications

3

GT2507T-W

*1 Indicates the temperature inside the enclosure of the control panel on which the GOT is installed. *2 Do not use or store the GOT under a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure at an altitude 0 m.

Doing so may cause a malfunction. Air purging by applying pressure to the control panel may create clearance between the surface sheet and the touch panel. This may cause the touch panel to be not sensitive enough or the sheet to come off.

*3 This indicates the power distribution section to which the equipment is assumed to be connected, between the public power grid and the machinery within the premises. Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The withstand surge voltage for the equipment with the rated voltage up to 300 V is 2500 V.

*4 This indicates the occurrence rate of conductive material in an environment where a device is used. Pollution degree 2 indicates an environment where only non-conductive pollution occurs normally and a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected depending on the conditions.

*5 Communication units and options usable with the rugged model can be used in the environment described in the general specifications of the rugged model. However, when a protective cover for oil is mounted on the GOT, the operating ambient temperature must be -20C to 50C. For using peripheral devices to be connected to the GOT, refer to the manual of each device.

Item Specifications *5

Operating ambient temperature *1

-20 C to 65 C

Storage ambient temperature -30 C to 75 C

Operating ambient humidity 10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing

Storage ambient humidity 10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing

Vibration resistance IEC 60068-2-6 Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude

Sweep count

Under intermittent vibration

5 Hz to 8.4 Hz 7.0 mm X, Y, or Z 10 times in each Z direction

8.4 Hz to 150 Hz

19.6m/s2

Under continuous vibration

5 Hz to 8.4 Hz 7.0 mm

8.4 Hz to 150 Hz

19.6 m/s2

Shock resistance IEC 60068-2-27 (392 m/s2(40 G), 3 times in each X, Y, or Z direction)

Operating atmosphere No greasy fumes, corrosive gas, flammable gas, excessive conductive dust, and direct sunlight (as well as at storage)

Operating altitude *2 2000 m or less

Installation location Inside control panel

Overvoltage category *3 II or less

Pollution degree *4 2 or less

Cooling method Self-cooling

Grounding Grounding with a ground resistance of 100 or less by using a ground cable that has a cross-sectional area of 2 mm2 or more. If impossible, connect the ground cable to the control panel.

The GOT rugged model uses the environmental protection sheet (not replaceable) with UV protection function on the front surface. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the touch panel or the liquid crystal display panel that may be caused by ultraviolet rays. Note that if the rugged model is exposed to ultraviolet rays for an extended period of time, the front surface may turn yellow. If the rugged model is likely to be exposed to ultraviolet rays for an extended period of time, it is recommended to use a UV protective sheet (option).

CAUTION

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 General Specifications 61

62

GT25HS-V

*1 Do not use or store the GOT under a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure at an altitude 0 m. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

*2 This indicates the power distribution section to which the equipment is assumed to be connected, between the public power grid and the machinery within the premises. Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The withstand surge voltage for the equipment with the rated voltage up to 300 V is 2500 V.

*3 This indicates the occurrence rate of conductive material in an environment where a device is used. Pollution degree 2 indicates an environment where only non-conductive pollution occurs normally and a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected depending on the conditions.

Item Specifications Operating ambient temperature 0 C to 40 C

Storage ambient temperature -20 C to 60 C

Operating ambient humidity 10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing

Storage ambient humidity 10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing

Vibration resistance Compliant with JIS B3502 and IEC 61131-2

Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude

Sweep count

Under intermittent vibration

5 Hz to 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm X, Y, or Z 10 times in each direction

8.4 Hz to 150 Hz

9.8 m/s2

Under continuous vibration

5 Hz to 8.4 Hz 1.75 mm

8.4 Hz to 150 Hz

4.9 m/s2

Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147 m/s2(15 G), 3 times in each X, Y, or Z direction)

Operating atmosphere No greasy fumes, corrosive gas, flammable gas, excessive conductive dust, and direct sunlight (as well as at storage)

Operating altitude *1 2000 m or less

Overvoltage category *2 II or less

Pollution degree *3 2 or less

Cooling method Self-cooling

Grounding Grounding with a ground resistance of 100 or less by using a ground cable that has a cross-sectional area of 2 mm2 or more. If impossible, connect the ground cable to the control panel.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 General Specifications

3

GT23

*1 Indicates the temperature inside the enclosure of the control panel on which the GOT is installed. *2 If the ambient temperature exceeds 40 C, the absolute humidity must not exceed 90% at 40 C. *3 Do not use or store the GOT under a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure at an altitude 0 m.

Doing so may cause a malfunction. Air purging by applying pressure to the control panel may create clearance between the surface sheet and the touch panel. This may cause the touch panel to be not sensitive enough or the sheet to come off.

*4 This indicates the power distribution section to which the equipment is assumed to be connected, between the public power grid and the machinery within the premises. Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The withstand surge voltage for the equipment with the rated voltage up to 300 V is 2500 V.

*5 This indicates the occurrence rate of conductive material in an environment where a device is used. Pollution degree 2 indicates an environment where only non-conductive pollution occurs normally and a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected depending on the conditions.

Item Specifications Operating ambient temperature *1

0 to 55C

Storage ambient temperature -20C to 60C

Operating ambient humidity 10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing *2

Storage ambient humidity 10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing *2

Vibration resistance Compliant with JIS B3502 and IEC 61131-2

Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude

Sweep count

Under intermittent vibration

5 Hz to 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm X, Y, or Z 10 times in each direction

8.4 Hz to 150 Hz

9.8 m/s2

Under continuous vibration

5 Hz to 8.4 Hz 1.75 mm

8.4 Hz to 150 Hz

4.9 m/s2

Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147 m/s2(15 G), 3 times in each X, Y, or Z direction)

Operating atmosphere No greasy fumes, corrosive gas, flammable gas, excessive conductive dust, and direct sunlight (as well as at storage)

Operating altitude *3 2000 m or less

Installation location Inside control panel

Overvoltage category *4 II or less

Pollution degree *5 2 or less

Cooling method Self-cooling

Grounding Grounding with a ground resistance of 100 or less by using a ground cable that has a cross-sectional area of 2 mm2 or more. If impossible, connect the ground cable to the control panel.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 General Specifications 63

64

GT21

*1 Indicates the temperature inside the enclosure of the control panel on which the GOT is installed. *2 If the ambient temperature exceeds 40 C, the absolute humidity must not exceed 90% at 40 C. *3 Do not use or store the GOT under a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure at an altitude 0 m.

Doing so may cause a malfunction. Air purging by applying pressure to the control panel may create clearance between the surface sheet and the touch panel. This may cause the touch panel to be not sensitive enough or the sheet to come off.

*4 This indicates the power distribution section to which the equipment is assumed to be connected, between the public power grid and the machinery within the premises. Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The withstand surge voltage for the equipment with the rated voltage up to 300 V is 2500 V.

*5 This indicates the occurrence rate of conductive material in an environment where a device is used. Pollution degree 2 indicates an environment where only non-conductive pollution occurs normally and a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected depending on the conditions.

*6 For the 5 V DC type, grounding is unnecessary. *7 When a protective cover for oil is mounted on the GOT, the maximum operating ambient temperature must be 5C lower than the one

described above.

Item Specifications Operating ambient temperature *1

0C to 55C *7(Horizontal installation), 0C to 50C (Vertical installation)

Storage ambient temperature -20C to 60C

Operating ambient humidity 10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing *2

Storage ambient humidity 10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing *2

Vibration resistance Compliant with JIS B3502 and IEC 61131-2

Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude

Sweep count

Under intermittent vibration

5 Hz to 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm X, Y, or Z 10 times in each direction

8.4 Hz to 150 Hz

9.8 m/s2

Under continuous vibration

5 Hz to 8.4 Hz 1.75 mm

8.4 Hz to 150 Hz

4.9 m/s2

Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147 m/s2(15 G), 3 times in each X, Y, or Z direction)

Operating atmosphere No greasy fumes, corrosive gas, flammable gas, excessive conductive dust, and direct sunlight (as well as at storage)

Operating altitude *3 2000 m or less

Installation location Inside control panel

Overvoltage category *4 II or less

Pollution degree *5 2 or less

Cooling method Self-cooling

Grounding For GT2107-W and GT2105: Grounding with a ground resistance of 100 or less by using a ground cable that has a cross- sectional area of 2 mm2 or more. If impossible, connect the ground cable to the control panel. For GT2104 and GT2103: Grounding with a ground resistance of 100 or less by using a ground cable that has a cross- sectional area of 0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (solid wire), 0.14 to 1.0 mm2 (stranded wire), or 0.25 to 0.5 mm2 (rod terminal with an insulation sleeve). If impossible, connect the ground cable to the control panel. *6

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 General Specifications

3

MEMO

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 General Specifications 65

66

3.2 Performance Specifications The following shows the performance specifications of the GOT.

GT27

GT2715-X Item Specifications

GT2715-XTBA GT2715-XTBD

Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 15

Resolution XGA: 1024 768 dots

Display size 304.1 (11.97) (W) 228.1 (8.98) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 64 characters 48 lines (2-byte) 12-dot standard font: 85 characters 64 lines (2-byte)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 60000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *6 (per key)

Simultaneous press Up to two points

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length 1 m

Detection temperature Temperature difference between human body and ambient air: 4 C or higher

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 57 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 256 MB*8

Life (number of write times) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 2 channels (front face and rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (front face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface For installing a communication unit or an option unit

Auxiliary extension interface For installing an option unit

Side interface For installing a communication unit

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure Front: IP67F *5*7

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 397 (15.63) (W) 300 (11.81) (H) 60 (2.36) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 383.5 (15.10) (W) 282.5 (11.12) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (excluding a fitting) 4.5 (9.9) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.112S or later

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 To conform to IP67F, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (The GOT conforms to IP2X

when the USB environmental protection cover is open.) Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*6 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*7 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

*8 If the function version is B or earlier, the memory for operation (RAM) is 128 MB.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 67

68

GT2712-S Item Specifications

GT2712-STBA GT2712-STBD

GT2712-STWA GT2712-STWD

Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 12.1

Resolution SVGA: 800 600 dots

Display size 246 (9.69) (W) 184.5 (7.26) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 50 characters 37 lines (two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 66 characters 50 lines (two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 60000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots (per key) *6

Simultaneous press Up to two points

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length 1 m

Detection temperature Temperature difference between human body and ambient air: 4 C or higher

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 57 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 256 MB*8

Life (number of write times) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 2 channels (front face and rear face) 1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (front face) 1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface For installing a communication unit or an option unit

Auxiliary extension interface For installing an option unit

Side interface For installing a communication unit

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure Front: IP67F *5*7

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 316 (12.44) (W) 246 (9.69) (H) 52 (2.05) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 302 (11.89) (W) 228 (8.98) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (excluding a fitting) 2.4 (5.3) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.100E or later

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 To conform to IP67F, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (The GOT conforms to IP2X

when the USB environmental protection cover is open.) Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*6 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*7 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

*8 If the function version is B or earlier, the memory for operation (RAM) is 128 MB.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 69

70

GT2710-S, GT2710-V Item Specifications

GT2710-STBA GT2710-STBD

GT2710-VTBA GT2710-VTBD

GT2710-VTWA GT2710-VTWD

Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 10.4

Resolution SVGA: 800 600 dots VGA: 640 480 dots

Display size 211.2 (8.31) (W) 158.4 (6.24) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 50 characters 37 lines (two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 66 characters 50 lines (two-byte characters)

16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (two- byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (two- byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 60000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *6 (per key)

Simultaneous press Up to two points

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 57 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 256 MB*8

Life (number of write times) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 2 channels (front face and rear face) 1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (front face) 1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface For installing a communication unit or an option unit

Auxiliary extension interface

For installing an option unit

Side interface For installing a communication unit

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure Front: IP67F *5*7

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 303 (11.93) (W) 218 (8.58) (H) 52 (2.05) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 289 (11.38) (W) 200 (7.87) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (excluding a fitting) 2.1 (4.6) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.100E or later

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 To conform to IP67F, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (The GOT conforms to IP2X

when the USB environmental protection cover is open.) Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*6 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*7 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

*8 If the function version is B or earlier, the memory for operation (RAM) is 128 MB.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 71

72

GT2708-S, GT2708-V Item Specifications

GT2708-STBA GT2708-STBD

GT2708-VTBA GT2708-VTBD

Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 8.4

Resolution SVGA: 800 600 dots VGA: 640 480 dots

Display size 170.9 (6.73) (W) 128.2 (5.05) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 50 characters 37 lines (two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 66 characters 50 lines (two-byte characters)

16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (two- byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (two- byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 60000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *6 (per key)

Simultaneous press Up to two points

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 57 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 256 MB*8

Life (number of write times) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 2 channels (front face and rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (front face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface For installing a communication unit or an option unit

Auxiliary extension interface For installing an option unit

Side interface For installing a communication unit

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure Front: IP67F *5*7

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 241 (9.49) (W) 194 (7.64) (H) 52 (2.05) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 227 (8.94) (W) 176 (6.93) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (excluding a fitting) 1.5 (3.3) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.100E or later

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 To conform to IP67F, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (The GOT conforms to IP2X

when the USB environmental protection cover is open.) Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*6 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*7 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

*8 If the function version is B or earlier, the memory for operation (RAM) is 128 MB.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 73

74

GT2705-V Item Specifications

GT2705-VTBD Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 5.7

Resolution VGA: 640 480 dots

Display size 115.2 (4.54) (W) 86.4 (3.40) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 60000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *7 (per key)

Simultaneous press Up to two points

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 32 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 80 MB

Life (number of write times) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 2 channels (front face and rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (front face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface *6 For installing a communication unit or an option unit

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface For installing a communication unit

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure Front: IP67F *5*8

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 167 (6.57) (W) 139 (5.47) (H) 60 (2.36) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 153 (6.02) (W) 121 (4.76) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (excluding a fitting) 1.0 (2.2) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.130L or later

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 To conform to IP67F, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (The GOT conforms to IP2X

when the USB environmental protection cover is open.) Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*6 When multiple devices such as extension units, a barcode reader, and an RFID controller are connected, the total amount of current must be within the maximum amount of current supplied by the GOT. For the amount of current required for an extension unit, a barcode reader, or an RFID controller, and the maximum amount of current supplied by the GOT, refer to the following. Page 434 Calculating Consumed Current of GT2705-V

*7 The minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*8 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 75

76

GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W

GT2512-WX Item Specifications

GT2512-WXTBD GT2512-WXTSD

Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 12.1" wide screen

Resolution WXGA: 1280 800 dots

Display size 261.12 (10.28) (W) 163.2 (6.43) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters 16-dot standard font: 80 characters 50 lines (two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 106 characters 66 lines (two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 50000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *7 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 32 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 128 MB

Life (number of write times) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet 2 channels, data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (front face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Wireless LAN communication unit interface

For installing a wireless LAN communication unit

Sound output interface 1 channel, WAV format (16 bits, 8.000 kHz/16.000 kHz, monoral) Applicable plug: 3.5 stereo mini-plug (3-prong)

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure Front: IP67F *6*8

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 299 (11.77) (W) 219 (8.62) (H) 48 (1.89) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 290.5 (11.44) (W) 210.5 (8.29) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (Excluding installation fitting) 1.7 kg (3.7 lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.250L or later

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel. *6 To conform to IP67F, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the USB mark firmly. (The GOT conforms to IP2X when

the USB environmental protection cover is open.) Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*7 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*8 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 77

78

GT2510-WX Item Specifications

GT2510-WXTBD GT2510-WXTSD

Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 10.1" wide screen

Resolution WXGA: 1280 800 dots

Display size 216.96 (8.54) (W) 135.6 (5.34) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters 16-dot standard font: 80 characters 50 lines (two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 106 characters 66 lines (two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 50000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *7 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 32 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 128 MB

Life (number of write times) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet 2 channels, data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (front face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Wireless LAN communication unit interface

For installing a wireless LAN communication unit

Sound output interface 1 channel, WAV format (16 bits, 8.000 kHz/16.000 kHz, monoral) Applicable plug: 3.5 stereo mini-plug (3-prong)

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure Front: IP67F *6*8

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 252 (9.92) (W) 194 (7.64) (H) 48 (1.89) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 243.5 (9.59) (W) 185.5 (7.30) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (Excluding installation fitting) 1.2 (2.6) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.175H or later

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel. *6 To conform to IP67F, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the USB mark firmly. (The GOT conforms to IP2X when

the USB environmental protection cover is open.) Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*7 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*8 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 79

80

GT2507-W Item Specifications

GT2507-WTBD GT2507-WTSD

Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 7" wide screen

Resolution WVGA: 800 480 dots

Display size 152.40 (6.00) (W) 91.44 (3.60) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters 16-dot standard font: 50 characters 30 rows (Two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 66 characters 40 rows (Two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 50000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *7 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 32 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 128 MB

Life (number of write times) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet 2 channels Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (front face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Wireless LAN communication unit interface

For installing a wireless LAN communication unit

Sound output interface 1 channel, WAV format (16 bits, 8.000 kHz/16.000 kHz, monoral) Applicable plug: 3.5 stereo mini-plug (3-prong)

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure Front: IP67F *6*8

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 189 (7.44) (W) 142 (5.59) (H) 48 (1.89) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 180.5 (7.11) (W) 133.5 (5.26) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (excluding a fitting) 0.75 (1.7) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.175H or later

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel. *6 To conform to IP67F, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the USB mark firmly. (The GOT conforms to IP2X when

the USB environmental protection cover is open.) Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*7 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*8 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 81

82

GT2507T-W Item Specifications

GT2507T-WTBD Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 7" wide screen

Resolution WVGA: 800 480 dots

Display size 152.40 (6.00) (W) 91.44 (3.60) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters 16-dot standard font: 50 characters 30 rows (Two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 66 characters 40 rows (Two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 50000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *6 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 32 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 128 MB

Life (number of write times) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet 2 channels Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Wireless LAN communication unit interface

For installing a wireless LAN communication unit

Sound output interface 1 channel, WAV format (16 bits, 8.000 kHz/16.000 kHz, monoral) Applicable plug: 3.5 stereo mini-plug (3-prong)

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

UV cutoff Front: Approximately 95% (370 nm)

Protective structure Front: IP66F **7/IP67F **7

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 214 (8.43) (W) 158 (6.22) (H) 55 (2.17) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 197 (7.76) (W) 141 (5.55) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (excluding a fitting) 1.2 (2.6) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.195D or later

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel. *6 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged.

To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*7 The suffix "F" of IP66F and IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 83

84

GT25-S, GT25-V

GT2512-S, GT2512F-S Item Specifications

GT2512-STBA GT2512-STBD

GT2512F-STNA GT2512F-STND

Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 12.1

Resolution SVGA: 800 600 dots

Display size 246 (9.69) (W) 184.5 (7.26) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters 16-dot standard font: 50 characters 37 lines (two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 66 characters 50 lines (two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 60000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *8 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 32 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 80 MB

Life (number of write times) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 2 channels (front face and rear face) 1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (front face) 1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface For installing a communication unit or an option unit

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface For installing a communication unit

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure Front: IP67F *6*9

In control panel: IP2X Front: IP67F *7*9

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 316 (12.44) (W) 246 (9.69) (H) 52 (2.05) (D) mm (inch)

311 (12.24) (W) 237 (9.33) (H) 54 (2.13) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 302 (11.89) (W) 228 (8.98) (H) mm (inch) 269 (10.59) (W) 214 (8.43) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (Excluding installation fitting) 2.4 (5.3) kg (lb) 2.4 (5.3) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.122C or later GT Works3 Version1.150G or later

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel. *6 To conform to IP67F, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (The GOT conforms to IP2X

when the USB environmental protection cover is open.) Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*7 To conform to IP67F, attach the environmental protection sheet. Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*8 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*9 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 85

86

GT2510-V, GT2510F-V Item Specifications

GT2510-VTBA GT2510-VTBD

GT2510-VTWA GT2510-VTWD

GT2510F-VTNA GT2510F-VTND

Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 10.4

Resolution VGA: 640 480 dots

Display size 211.2 (8.31) (W) 158.4 (6.24) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 60000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *8 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 32 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 80 MB

Life (number of write times) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 2 channels (front face and rear face)

1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (front face) 1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface For installing a communication unit or an option unit

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface For installing a communication unit

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure Front: IP67F *6*9

In control panel: IP2X Front: IP67F *7*9

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 303 (11.93) (W) 218 (8.58) (H) 52 (2.05) (D) mm (inch) 298 (11.73) (W) 209 (8.23) (H) 54 (2.13) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 289 (11.38) (W) 200 (7.87) (H) mm (inch) 234 (9.21) (W) 187 (7.36) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (excluding a fitting) 2.1 (4.6) kg (lb) 2.1 (4.6) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.112S or later GT Works3 Version1.150G or later

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel. *6 To conform to IP67F, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (The GOT conforms to IP2X

when the USB environmental protection cover is open.) Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*7 To conform to IP67F, attach the environmental protection sheet. Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*8 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*9 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 87

88

GT2508-V, GT2508F-V Item Specifications

GT2508-VTBA GT2508-VTBD

GT2508-VTWA GT2508-VTWD

GT2508F-VTNA GT2508F-VTND

Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 8.4

Resolution VGA: 640 480 dots

Display size 170.9 (6.73) (W) 128.2 (5.05) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 60000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *8 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 32 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 80 MB

Life (number of write times) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 2 channels (front face and rear face)

1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (front face) 1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface For installing a communication unit or an option unit

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface For installing a communication unit

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure Front: IP67F *6*9

In control panel: IP2X Front: IP67F *7*9

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 241 (9.49) (W) 194 (7.64) (H) 52 (2.05) (D) mm (inch) 236 (9.29) (W) 185 (7.28) (H) 54 (2.13) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 227 (8.94) (W) 176 (6.93) (H) mm (inch) 194 (7.64) (W) 158 (6.22) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (excluding a fitting) 1.5 (3.3) kg (lb) 1.5 (3.3) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.112S or later GT Works3 Version1.150G or later

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel. *6 To conform to IP67F, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (The GOT conforms to IP2X

when the USB environmental protection cover is open.) Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*7 To conform to IP67F, attach the environmental protection sheet. Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*8 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*9 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 89

90

GT2505-V Item Specifications

GT2505-VTBD Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 5.7

Resolution VGA: 640 480 dots

Display size 115.2 (4.54) (W) 86.4 (3.40) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 60000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *8 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 32 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 80 MB

Life (number of write times) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Terminating resistor: 330 , 100 , OPEN (Selectable by the terminating resistor setting switch. Factory default: 330 ) *7

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 1 channel (rear face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (front face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure Front: IP67F *6*9

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 164 (6.46) (W) 139 (5.47) (H) 53.5 (2.11) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 153 (6.02) (W) 121 (4.76) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (excluding a fitting) 0.6 (1.3) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.180N or later

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel. *6 To conform to IP67F, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the USB mark firmly.

(The GOT conforms to IP2X when the USB environmental protection cover is open.) Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT may not be used in an environment where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*7 For the GOT multi-drop connection, set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT according to the connection type. For details on the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

*8 The minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*9 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 91

92

GT25HS-V

GT2506HS-V Item Specifications

GT2506HS-VTBD Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 6.5

Resolution VGA: 640 480 dots

Display size 132.5 (6.02) (W) 99.4 (4.76) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 40000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *7 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Switch Operation switch 6 switches (6 contacts/common) N/O contact, Maximum rating 10 mA/24 V DC, Life: 1000000 times

Grip switch 1 switch (single wiring) (IDEC HE3B-M2PB) Enable switch (deadman switch) 3-position system of OFF ON OFF *10

2 N/O contacts Maximum rating 1 A/24 V DC (resistance load), Maximum rating 0.3 A/24 V DC (induction load), Life: 100000 times

Emergency stop switch 1 switch (single wiring) (IDEC XA1E-BV303R) 3 N/C contacts Maximum rating 1 A/24 V DC (resistance load), Maximum rating 0.3 A/24 V DC (induction load), Life: 100000 times

Keylock switch (2-position switch)

1 switch (single wiring) (IDEC AS6M-2KT1PB) 2-notch type (Manual stop at each position/A key can be inserted and removed on only the left side./On the right side, a key cannot be removed./Two keys are provided.) 2-position, Maximum rating 1 A/24 V DC (resistance load), Maximum rating 0.3 A/24 V DC (induction load), Life: 100000 times

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 32 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 80 MB

Life (Number of writings) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT15-BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 *9 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: Square 42 pins (male)

RS-422/485 *9 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: Square 42 pins (male)

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: Square 42 pins (male)

USB (Host) 1 channel (Top face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (Top face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel.

Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel. *6 Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments.

The rating is not applied when the interface environment protection cover or the environmental protection back cover is removed. The GOT may not be used in an environment where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*7 The minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*8 The suffix "F" of IP65F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

*9 Select RS-422/485 or RS-232. Factory default: RS-422/485

*10 For details of the grip switch operation, refer to the following. Page 355 Grip switch

Protective structure IP65F *6*8 (When an external cable is connected, the rating is not applied to the relay connector side of the external cable.)

External dimensions 201 (7.91) (W) 230 (9.06) (H) 97 (3.82) (D) mm (inch) (Excluding projections such as the emergency stop switch)

Weight (excluding a fitting) 1.2 (2.6) kg (lb) (GOT main unit only)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.170C or later

Item Specifications

GT2506HS-VTBD

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 93

94

GT2505HS-V Item Specifications

GT2505HS-VTBD Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 5.7

Resolution VGA: 640 480 dots

Display size 115.2 (4.54) (W) 86.4 (3.40) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 60000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *7 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Switch Operation switch 6 switches (6 contacts/common) N/O contact, Maximum rating 10 mA/24 V DC, Life: 1000000 times

Grip switch 1 switch (single wiring) (IDEC HE3B-M2PB) Enable switch (deadman switch) 3-position system of OFF ON OFF *10

2 N/O contacts Maximum rating 1 A/24 V DC (resistance load), Maximum rating 0.3 A/24 V DC (induction load), Life: 100000 times

Emergency stop switch 1 switch (single wiring) (IDEC XA1E-BV303R) 3 N/C contacts Maximum rating 1 A/24 V DC (resistance load), Maximum rating 0.3 A/24 V DC (induction load), Life: 100000 times

Keylock switch (2-position switch)

1 switch (single wiring) (IDEC AS6M-2KT1PB) 2-notch type (Manual stop at each position/A key can be inserted and removed on only the left side./ On the right side, a key cannot be removed./Two keys are provided.) 2-position, Maximum rating 1 A/24 V DC (resistance load), Maximum rating 0.3 A/24 V DC (induction load), Life: 100000 times

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 32 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 80 MB

Life (Number of writings) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 *9 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: Round 32 pins (male)

RS-422 *9 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: Round 32 pins (male)

Ethernet *9 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: Round 32 pins (male)

USB (Host) 1 channel (Top face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (Top face)

USB 2.0 (High-Speed 480 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure IP65F *6*8 (When an external cable is connected, the rating is not applied to the relay connector side of the external cable.)

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel. *6 Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments.

The rating is not applied when the interface environment protection cover or the environmental protection back cover is removed. The GOT may not be used in an environment where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*7 The minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*8 The suffix "F" of IP65F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

*9 Select one channel, RS-422, RS-232, or Ethernet. Ethernet interface is set at factory default.

*10 For details of the grip switch operation, refer to the following. Page 355 Grip switch

External dimensions 145 (5.71) (W) 185 (7.28) (H) 79.3 (3.12) (D) mm (inch) (Excluding projections such as the emergency stop switch)

Weight (excluding a fitting) 0.79 (1.7) kg (lb) (GOT main unit only)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.195D or later

Item Specifications

GT2505HS-VTBD

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 95

96

GT23

GT2310-V Item Specifications

GT2310-VTBA GT2310-VTBD

Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 10.4

Resolution VGA: 640 480 dots

Display size 211.2 (8.31) (W) 158.4 (6.24) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 16 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 50000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *7 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 9MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 9MB

Life (Number of writings) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery (option)

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 1 channel (rear face)

USB1.1 (Full-Speed 12 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (rear face)

USB1.1 (Full-Speed 12 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Buzzer output Single tone (Tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure Front: IP67F *6*8

External dimensions 303 (11.93) (W) 218 (8.58) (H) 56 (2.20) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 289 (11.38) (W) 200 (7.87) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (excluding a fitting) 1.9 (4.2) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.100E or later

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel. *6 Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it

may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air. *7 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged.

To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*8 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 97

98

GT2308-V Item Specifications

GT2308-VTBA GT2308-VTBD

Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 8.4

Resolution VGA: 640 480 dots

Display size 170.9 (6.73) (W) 128.2 (5.05) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 16 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *4 Approx. 50000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *3 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *7 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 9MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 9MB

Life (Number of writings) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery (option)

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 1 channel (rear face)

USB1.1 (Full-Speed 12 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (rear face)

USB1.1 (Full-Speed 12 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Buzzer output Single tone (Tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure Front: IP67F *6*8

External dimensions 241 (9.49) (W) 194 (7.64) (H) 56 (2.20) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 227 (8.94) (W) 176 (6.93) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (excluding a fitting) 1.5 (3.3) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.100E or later

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate.

Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel. *6 Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it

may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air. *7 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged.

To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*8 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 99

10

GT21

GT2107-W Item Specifications

GT2107-WTBD GT2107-WTSD

Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 7" wide screen

Resolution WVGA: 800 480 dots

Display size 152.40 (6.00) (W) 91.44 (3.60) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 50 characters 30 rows (Two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 66 characters 40 rows (Two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness Adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *3 Approx. 50000 h (operating ambient temperature: 25 C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *4 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *7 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 15 MB

Life (Number of writings) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 45 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female) Terminating resistor: 330 , 100 , OPEN (Selectable by the terminating resistor setting switch.) *9

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host) 1 channel (rear face)

USB1.1 (Full-Speed 12 Mbps), Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device) 1 channel (front face)

USB1.1 (Full-Speed 12 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface

Buzzer output Single tone (Tone length adjustable)

POWER LED

Protective structure Front: IP67F *6*8

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 189 (7.44) (W) 142 (5.59) (H) 48 (1.89) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 180.5 (7.11) (W) 133.5 (5.26) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (excluding a fitting) 0.7 (1.5) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.215Z or later

0 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *4 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate. Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel.

*6 To conform to IP67F, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the USB mark firmly. (The GOT conforms to IP2X when the USB environmental protection cover is open.) Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*7 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger Distance between keys: 16 dots or more

*8 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

*9 For the GOT multi-drop connection, set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT according to the connection type. For the details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 101

10

GT2105-Q Item Specifications

GT2105-QTBDS GT2105-QMBDS Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD TFT monochrome LCD

Screen size 5.7

Resolution QVGA: 320 240 dots

Display size 115 (4.53) (W) 86 (3.39) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 20 characters 15 rows (Two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 26 characters 20 rows (Two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors 32-shade monochrome (black/white)

Brightness adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *3 Approx. 65000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *4 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *7 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 9 MB

Life (Number of writings) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 45 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet

USB (Host)

USB (Device) 1 channel (front face)

USB1.1 (Full-Speed 12 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface

Buzzer output Single tone (Tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Protective structure Front: IP67F *6*8

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 164 (6.46) (W) 135 (5.32) (H) 55 (2.17) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 153 (6.02) (W) 121 (4.76) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (Excluding installation fitting) 0.7 (1.5) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.144A or later

2 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *4 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate. Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel.

*6 To conform to IP67F, close the USB environmental protection cover firmly and tighten the fixing screw on the lower part of the cover in the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm). (The GOT conforms to IP2X when the USB environmental protection cover is open.) Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*7 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger

*8 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 103

10

GT2104-R Item Specifications

GT2104-RTBD Display section *1*2 Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 4.3

Resolution 480 272 dots

Display size 95.0 (3.74) (W) 53.8 (2.12) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 30 characters 17 rows (Two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 40 characters 22 rows (Two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *3 Approx. 50000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *4 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *7 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 9 MB

Life (Number of writings) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 45 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: 9-pin connector terminal block

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: 9-pin connector terminal block

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

USB (Host)

USB (Device) 1 channel (rear face)

USB1.1 (Full-Speed 12 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface

Buzzer output Single tone (Tone length adjustable)

POWER LED

Protective structure Front: IP67F *6*8

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 128 (5.04) (W) 102 (4.02) (H) 40 (1.57) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 118 (4.65) (W) 92 (3.62) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (Excluding installation fitting) 0.4 (0.88) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.122C or later

4 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *4 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate. Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel.

*6 Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*7 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger

*8 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 105

10

GT2104-P Item Specifications

GT2104-PMBD GT2104-PMBDS GT2104-PMBDS2 GT2104-PMBLS Display section *1*2 Display device TFT monochrome LCD

Screen size 4.5

Resolution 384 128 dots

Display size 109.4 (4.31) (W) 36.5 (1.44) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 24 characters 8 rows (Two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 32 characters 10 rows (Two-byte characters)

Display color 32-shade monochrome (black/white)

Brightness adjustment 32 levels

Backlight 5-color LED (white, green, pink, orange, red) (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *3 Approx. 50000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *4 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *7 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 6MB

Life (Number of writings) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision 45 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25 C)

Built-in interface RS-232 (rear face) 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: MINIDIN 6-pin (female)

1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: MINIDIN 6-pin (female)

RS-232 (side face) 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: 9-pin connector terminal block

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: 5-pin connector terminal block

1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: 9-pin connector terminal block

RS-422 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: 9-pin connector terminal block *9

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

6 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *4 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate. Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel.

*6 Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air.

*7 Minimum size of a key that can be arranged. To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger

*8 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

*9 Use a 3 m or shorter cable.

Built-in interface USB (Host)

USB (Device) 1 channel (rear face)

USB1.1 (Full-Speed 12 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface

Buzzer output Single tone (Tone length adjustable)

POWER LED

Protective structure Front: IP67F *6*8

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 145 (5.71) (W) 76 (2.99) (H) 32.5 (1.28) (D) mm (inch)

145 (5.71) (W) 76 (2.99) (H) 29.5 (1.16) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 137 (5.39) (W) 66 (2.60) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (Excluding installation fitting) 0.3 (0.66) kg (lb) 0.28 (0.62) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.131M or later GT Works3 Version1.137T or later

Item Specifications

GT2104-PMBD GT2104-PMBDS GT2104-PMBDS2 GT2104-PMBLS

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 107

10

GT2103-P Item Specifications

GT2103-PMBD GT2103-PMBDS GT2103-PMBDS2 GT2103-PMBLS Display section *1*2 Display device TFT monochrome LCD

Screen size 3.8

Resolution 320 128 dots

Display size 89.0 (3.50) (W) 35.6 (1.40) (H) mm (inch)

Number of displayed characters

16-dot standard font: 20 characters 8 rows (Two-byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 26 characters 10 rows (Two-byte characters)

Display color 32-shade monochrome (black/white)

Brightness adjustment 32 levels

Backlight 5-color LED (white, green, pink, orange, red) (Not replaceable)

Backlight life *3 Approx. 50000 h (Ambient temperature: 25C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel *4 Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots *9 (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available *5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensor Detection length

Detection temperature

User memory User memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 3 MB

Life (Number of writings) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision

Battery

Life

Built-in interface RS-232 (rear face) 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: MINIDIN 6-pin (female)

1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: MINIDIN 6-pin (female)

RS-232 (side face) 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: 9-pin connector terminal block

RS-422/485 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: 5-pin connector terminal block

1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: 9-pin connector terminal block

RS-422 1 channel, transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps Connector shape: 9-pin connector terminal block *11

Ethernet 1 channel Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack) AUTO MDI/MDI-X

8 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications

3

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel. Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and dark dots cannot be reduced to zero. Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering. Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors. *3 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the backlight. *4 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches.

The stylus must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a switch in an unintended location may operate. Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel.

*6 The SD card unit (GT21-03SDCD), sold separately, needs to be mounted. *7 Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT should not be used in environments where it

may be exposed to oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or where oil mist fills the air. *8 The dimension when the SD card unit (GT21-03SDCD) is mounted is 113 (4.45) (W) 74 (2.91) (H) 32 (1.26) (D) mm (inch). *9 The minimum size of a key that can be arranged.

To ensure safe use of the product, the following settings are recommended. Key size: 16 16 dots or larger

*10 The suffix "F" of IP67F is a symbol that indicates protection rate against oil. It is described in the Appendix of JIS C 0920 of the Japanese Industrial Standards.

*11 Use a 3 m or shorter cable.

Built-in interface USB (Host)

USB (Device) 1 channel (rear face)

USB1.1 (Full-Speed 12 Mbps), Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD card *6 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface

Auxiliary extension interface

Side interface

Buzzer output Single tone (Tone length adjustable)

POWER LED

Protective structure Front: IP67F *7*10

In control panel: IP2X

External dimensions 113 (4.45) (W) 74 (2.91) (H) 32 (1.26) (D) mm (inch)

113 (4.45) (W) 74 (2.91) (H) 27 (1.06) (D) mm (inch) *8

113 (4.45) (W) 74 (2.91) (H) 27 (1.26) (D) mm (inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 105 (4.13) (W) 66 (2.60) (H) mm (inch)

Weight (Excluding installation fitting) 0.2 (0.44) kg (lb) 0.18 (0.40) kg (lb)

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version1.112S or later GT Works3 Version1.119Z or later

Item Specifications

GT2103-PMBD GT2103-PMBDS GT2103-PMBDS2 GT2103-PMBLS

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 109

11

3.3 Specifications of Power Supply Section The following shows the power supply specifications of the GOT.

Operation at instantaneous power failure If an instantaneous power failure occurs in the power supply and continues for more than the permissible period, the GOT may be reset. Make sure to power on the unit more than 5 seconds after power-off.

GT27

Input power supply 100 V AC to 240 V AC Item Specifications

GT2715-XTBA GT2712-STBA GT2712-STWA

GT2710-STBA GT2710-VTBA GT2710-VTWA

GT2708-STBA GT2708-VTBA

Power supply voltage 100 V AC to 240 V AC (+10%, -15%)

Power supply frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz (5%)

Maximum apparent power 140 VA 100 VA

Power consumpti on

Under the maximum load 51 W or less 44 W or less 41 W or less 41 W or less

Main unit 25 W 19 W 17 W 15 W

Main unit (Backlight OFF) 10 W 10 W 10 W 10 W

Inrush current 40 A or less (3 ms, ambient temperature: 25 C, under the maximum load)

60 A or less (2 ms, ambient temperature: 25 C, under the maximum load)

Permissible instantaneous power failure time 20 ms or less (100 V AC or more)

Noise immunity Noise voltage: 1500 Vp-p, noise width: 1 s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 25 Hz to 60 Hz

Withstand voltage 1500 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

Insulation resistance 500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M or more by an insulation resistance tester

Applicable wire size 0.75 mm2 to 2 mm2

Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw)

0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm

0 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.3 Specifications of Power Supply Section

3

Input power supply 24 V DC

GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W

Input power supply 24 V DC

Item Specifications

GT2715-XTBD GT2712-STBD GT2712-STWD

GT2710-STBD GT2710-VTBD GT2710-VTWD

GT2708-STBD GT2708-VTBD

GT2705-VTBD

Power supply voltage 24 V DC (+25%, -20%)

Power consumpti on

Under the maximum load 48 W or less 45 W or less 42 W or less 39 W or less 30 W or less

Main unit 23 W 18 W 15 W 13 W 7 W

Main unit (Backlight OFF) 8 W 8 W 8 W 8 W 5 W

Inrush current 5 A or less (20 ms, ambient temperature: 25 C, under the maximum load) 69 A or less (1 ms, ambient temperature: 25 C, under the maximum load)

Permissible instantaneous power failure time 10 ms or less

Noise immunity Noise voltage: 500 Vp-p, noise width: 1 s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 25 Hz to 60 Hz

Withstand voltage 350 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

Insulation resistance 500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M or more by an insulation resistance tester

Applicable wire size 0.75 mm2 to 2 mm2

Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw)

0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm

Item Specifications

GT2512-WXTBD GT2512-WXTSD

GT2510-WXTBD GT2510-WXTSD

GT2507-WTBD GT2507-WTSD

Power supply voltage 24 V DC (+25%, -20%)

Power consumption

Under the maximum load

20 W or less 16 W or less 16 W or less

Main unit 14 W 9 W 9 W

Main unit (Backlight OFF)

8 W 5 W 5 W

Inrush current 59 A or less (2 ms, ambient temperature: 25 C, under the maximum load)

Permissible instantaneous power failure time

5 ms or less

Noise immunity Noise voltage: 500 Vp-p, noise width: 1 s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 25 Hz to 60 Hz

Withstand voltage 350 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

Insulation resistance 500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M or more by an insulation resistance tester

Applicable wire size 0.75 mm2 to 2 mm2 (AWG 14 to 18)

Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw)

0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.3 Specifications of Power Supply Section 111

11

GT2507T-W

Input power supply 24 V DC Item Specifications

GT2507T-WTSD Power supply voltage 24 V DC (+25%, -20%)

Power consumpti on

Under the maximum load 17 W or less

Main unit 11 W

Main unit (Backlight OFF) 7 W

Inrush current 59 A or less (2 ms, ambient temperature: 25 C, under the maximum load)

Permissible instantaneous power failure time 5 ms or less

Noise immunity Noise voltage: 500 Vp-p, noise width: 1 s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 25 Hz to 60 Hz

Withstand voltage 350 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

Insulation resistance 500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M or more by an insulation resistance tester

Applicable wire size 0.75 mm2 to 2 mm2

Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw)

0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm

2 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.3 Specifications of Power Supply Section

3

GT25-S, GT25-V

Input power supply 100 V AC to 240 V AC

Input power supply 24 V DC

Item Specifications

GT2512-STBA GT2512F-STNA

GT2510-VTBA GT2510-VTWA GT2510F-VTNA

GT2508-VTBA GT2508-VTWA GT2508F-VTNA

Power supply voltage 100 V AC to 240 V AC (+10%, -15%)

Power supply frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz (5%)

Maximum apparent power 80 VA 80 VA 70 VA

Power consumpti on

Under the maximum load 35 W or less 34 W or less 31 W or less

Main unit 14 W 12 W 11 W

Main unit (Backlight OFF) 7 W 7 W 7 W

Inrush current 60 A or less (2 ms, ambient temperature: 25 C, under the maximum load)

Permissible instantaneous power failure time 20 ms or less (100 V AC or more)

Noise immunity Noise voltage: 1500 Vp-p, noise width: 1 s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 25 Hz to 60 Hz

Withstand voltage 1500 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

Insulation resistance 500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M or more by an insulation resistance tester

Applicable wire size 0.75 mm2 to 2 mm2

Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw)

0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm

Item Specifications

GT2512-STBD GT2512F-STND

GT2510-VTBD GT2510-VTWD GT2510F-VTND

GT2508-VTBD GT2508-VTWD GT2508F-VTND

GT2505-VTBD

Power supply voltage 24 V DC (+25%, -20%) 24 V DC (+10%, -15%)

Power consumpti on

Under the maximum load 37 W or less 33 W or less 31 W or less 8.4 W or less

Main unit 13 W 10 W 8 W 4.3 W

Main unit (Backlight OFF) 6 W 6 W 6 W 2.6 W

Inrush current 5 A or less (20 ms, ambient temperature: 25 C, under the maximum load) 42 A or less (2 ms, operating ambient temperature 25, maximum load)

Permissible instantaneous power failure time 10 ms or less

Noise immunity Noise voltage: 500 Vp-p, noise width: 1 s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 25 Hz to 60 Hz

Noise voltage: 1000 Vp-p, noise width: 1 s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 30 Hz to 100 Hz

Withstand voltage 350 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth 500 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

Insulation resistance 500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M or more by an insulation resistance tester

Applicable wire size 0.75 mm2 to 2 mm2

Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw)

0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.3 Specifications of Power Supply Section 113

11

GT25HS-V

Input power supply 24 V DC Item Specifications

GT2506HS-VTBD GT2505HS-VTBD Power supply voltage 24 V DC (+10%, -15%)

Power consumpti on

Under the maximum load 11.6 W or less 8.4 W or less

Backlight OFF 8.2 W 7.0 W

Inrush current 30 A or less (2 ms, ambient temperature: 25 C, under the maximum load)

Permissible instantaneous power failure time 5 ms or less

Noise immunity Noise voltage: 1000 Vp-p, noise width: 1 s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 30 Hz to 100 Hz

Withstand voltage 500 V DC for 1 minute across power supply terminals and earth

Insulation resistance 500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M or more by an insulation resistance tester

4 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.3 Specifications of Power Supply Section

3

GT23

Input power supply 100 V AC to 240 V AC

Input power supply 24 V DC

Item Specifications

GT2310-VTBA GT2308-VTBA Power supply voltage 100 V AC to 240 V AC (+10%, -15%)

Power supply frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz (5%)

Maximum apparent power 44 VA (under the maximum load) 30 VA (under the maximum load)

Power consumpti on

Under the maximum load 18 W or less 11 W or less

Main unit 15 W 9 W

Main unit (Backlight OFF) 10 W 10 W 10 W 10 W

Inrush current 40 A or less (4 ms, ambient temperature: 25C, under the maximum load)

Permissible instantaneous power failure time 20 ms or less (100 V AC or more)

Noise immunity Noise voltage: 1500 Vp-p, noise width: 1 s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 25 Hz to 60 Hz

Withstand voltage 1500 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

Insulation resistance 500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M or more by an insulation resistance tester

Applicable wire size 0.75 mm2 to 2 mm2

Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw)

0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm

Item Specifications

GT2310-VTBD GT2308-VTBD Power supply voltage 100 V AC to 240 V AC (+25%, -20%)

Power consumpti on

Under the maximum load 16 W or less 11 W or less

Main unit 13 W 8 W

Main unit (Backlight OFF) 7 W 6 W

Inrush current 40 A or less (2 ms, ambient temperature: 25C, under the maximum load)

Permissible instantaneous power failure time 10 ms or less

Noise immunity Noise voltage: 500 Vp-p, noise width: 1 s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 25 Hz to 60 Hz

Withstand voltage 350 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

Insulation resistance 500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M or more by an insulation resistance tester

Applicable wire size 0.75 mm2 to 2 mm2

Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw)

0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.3 Specifications of Power Supply Section 115

11

GT21

Input power supply 24 V DC/5 V DC For GT2107-W, GT2105

For GT2104, GT2103

Item Specifications

GT2107-WTBD GT2107-WTSD

GT2105-QTBDS GT2105-QMBDS

Power supply voltage 24 V DC (+10%, -15%)

Power consumpti on

Under the maximum load

11.3 W or less 4.5 W or less 2.9 W or less

Backlight OFF 7.0 W 2.2 W 2.2 W

Inrush current 35 A or less (3 ms, ambient temperature: 25 C, under the maximum load)

27 A or less (2 ms, ambient temperature: 25 C, under the maximum load)

Permissible instantaneous power failure time

5 ms or less

Noise immunity Noise voltage: 1000 Vp-p, noise width: 1 s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 30 Hz to 100 Hz

Withstand voltage 500 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

Insulation resistance 500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M or more by an insulation resistance tester

Applicable wire size For power supply: 0.75 mm2 or more, For grounding: 2 mm2 or more

Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw)

0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm

Item Specifications

GT2104- RTBD

GT2104- PMBD

GT2104- PMBDS GT2104- PMBDS2

GT2103- PMBD

GT2103- PMBDS

GT2103- PMBDS2

GT2103- PMBLS GT2104- PMBLS

Power supply voltage 24 V DC (+10%, -15%) 5 V DC (+5%, -5%) Power from the sequencer

Power consumpti on

Under the maximum load

4.4 W or less 2.9 W or less 2.2 W or less 2.6 W or less 1.9 W or less 2.2 W or less 1.1 W or less

Backlight OFF 2.9 W 2.2 W 1.5 W 2.0 W 1.3 W 1.6 W 0.7 W

Inrush current 18 A or less (2 ms, ambient temperature: 25 C, under the maximum load)

30 A or less (1 ms, ambient temperature: 25 C, under the maximum load)

Permissible instantaneous power failure time

5 ms or less

Noise immunity Noise voltage: 1000 Vp-p, noise width: 1 s, measured by a noise simulator with noise frequency ranging from 30 Hz to 100 Hz

Withstand voltage 500 V AC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

Insulation resistance 500 V DC across power terminals and earth, 10 M or more by an insulation resistance tester

Applicable wire size Single wiring: solid wire 0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG26 to AWG16), stranded wire 0.14 to 1.0 mm2 (AWG26 to AWG16), or rod terminal with an insulation sleeve 0.25 to 0.5 mm2 (AWG24 to AWG20) Double wiring: solid wire 0.14 to 0.5 mm2 (AWG26 to AWG20) or stranded wire 0.14 to 0.2 mm2 (AWG26 to AWG24)

Applicable solderless terminal AI 0.25-6BU (AWG24), AI 0.34-6TQ (AWG22), AI 0.5-6WH (AWG20) (manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT) Swage: CRIMPFOX 6 (manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT)

Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw)

0.22 Nm to 0.25 Nm

6 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.3 Specifications of Power Supply Section

3

3.4 Battery Specifications

Applicable battery The following batteries are applicable for GOT2000 series.

*1 GT2103-P does not have a built-in battery. *2 Not available to GT2506HS-V. *3 GT21 does not support the system status log data backup function.

Battery specifications The following describes the battery specifications for the GOT2000 series.

*1 GT2103-P does not have a built-in battery. *2 Not available to GT2506HS-V.

For the battery directive in EU member states, refer to the following. Page 368 Handling of batteries and devices with built-in batteries in EU member states

Retention period of the battery-backed data The following shows the retainable period of battery-backed data when the GOT is turned off.

GT27, GT25, GT23, GT21 (excluding GT25HS, GT2507T-W, and GT2103-P)

*1 In the following conditions, the data backup time is 5 minutes after the power supply is turned off. (As for GT23, the data backup time is 30 seconds.) The battery connector is disconnected. A battery lead is broken.

GT25HS-V

*1 In the following conditions, the data backup time is 5 minutes after the power supply is turned off. The battery connector is disconnected. A battery lead is broken.

Model name Description Target GOT GT11-50BAT Battery for backup of SRAM data, clock data, and system status log data *3 GT27

GT25 *2

GT23 GT21 *1

GT15-BAT Battery for backup of SRAM data, clock data, and system status log data GT2506HS-V

Item Specifications

GT27 GT25 *2 GT23 GT21 *1

GT2506HS-V

Model name GT11-50BAT GT15-BAT

Type Magnesium manganese dioxide lithium primary battery

Initial voltage 3.0 V

Nominal current 550 mAh 1800 mAh

Storage life Approx.5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25C)

Total power stoppage time Page 117 Retention period of the battery-backed data

Lithium content 0.00015 kg (1.7 lb) 0.00057 kg (1.7 lb)

Ambient temperature 0 to 25 C

Operating ambient temperature of 25 to 45C

Operating ambient temperature of 45 to 55C

Data backup time after detection of battery voltage low *1

3 years 4 years 3 years 14 days

Operating ambient temperature of 0 to 25C

Operating ambient temperature of 25 to 40C

Data backup time after detection of battery voltage low *1

3 years 4 years 14 days

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.4 Battery Specifications 117

11

GT2507T-W

*1 In the following conditions, the data backup time is 5 minutes after the power supply is turned off. The battery connector is disconnected. A battery lead is broken.

Battery life and replacement time GT27, GT25, GT23, and GT21 (excluding GT25HS-V and GT2103-P) Battery life reference: Approx.5 years in actual use (Ambient temperature: 25C) Battery replacement time reference: 3 to 4 years The battery is susceptible to self-discharge. Consult your local sales office when necessary. GT25HS-V Battery life reference: Approx.5 years in actual use (Ambient temperature: 25C) Battery replacement time reference: 3 to 4 years The battery is susceptible to self-discharge. Consult your local sales office when necessary. Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility. Refer to the following for details on the battery status display. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Operating ambient temperature of -20 to 25C

Operating ambient temperature of 25 to 45C

Operating ambient temperature of 45 to 65C

Data backup time after detection of battery voltage low *1

3 years 4 years 3 years 14 days

8 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.4 Battery Specifications

4

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS Page 119 GT27 Page 123 GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W Page 127 GT2507T-W Page 129 GT25-S, GT25-V Page 135 GT25HS-V Page 143 GT21

4.1 GT27 GT2715-X

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 122 Part names and settings of GT27

8)

19) 17)18)

7) 7) 7)

7) 7)

7)

20)

7)

7)

25) 24) 22) 21)

5)

6)

3)4)

1)2) 9)

10)

11) 12)

13)

14)

15) 16)

23)28)

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.1 GT27 119

12

GT2712-S

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 122 Part names and settings of GT27

GT2710-S, GT2710-V

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 122 Part names and settings of GT27

1)2)

5)

25)

19)

8)

17)

9)

10)

11) 12)

13) 14)

20)

15)

24) 22) 21)

7) 7)

7) 7)

3)4)

26)

16)

23)

6)

18)

27)

27)

27)

27)

28)

13)

10)

11) 12)

14)

15)

25) 24) 22) 21)

7) 7)19)

8)

17)

9)7) 7)

26)

1)2)

5)

3)4)

16)

20)

23) 18)

27) 27)

28)

0 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.1 GT27

4

GT2708-S, GT2708-V

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 122 Part names and settings of GT27

GT2705-V

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 122 Part names and settings of GT27

10)

11)12)13)

17)

14)

15)

25) 24) 22) 21)

7) 7)19)

8) 9)7) 7)1)2)

5)

3)4)

16) 26)

20)

23) 18)

28)

7) 7)19) 17)23)

10)

11)12)13)

15)

8)

9)7) 7)

14)

20)

25) 24) 22) 21)

5)

3)4)

1)2)28)

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.1 GT27 121

12

Part names and settings of GT27

*1 The special fittings are sold separately. To obtain the special fittings, contact your local sales office.

No. Name Description 1) Display section Displays the utility and the user-created screen.

2) Touch panel For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user-created screen

3) USB interface (Host/front) For connecting a USB mouse, a USB keyboard, or a USB barcode reader, and transferring or saving data (Connector shape: TYPE-A) Applicable models: GT2715-XTBA/D, GT2712-STBA/D, GT2710-STBA/D, GT2710-VTBA/D, GT2708- STBA/D, GT2708-VTBA/D, GT2705-VTBD

4) USB interface (Device/front) For connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: Mini-B) Applicable models: GT2715-XTBA/D, GT2712-STBA/D, GT2710-STBA/D, GT2710-VTBA/D, GT2708- STBA/D, GT2708-VTBA/D, GT2705-VTBD

5) POWER LED Lit in blue: Power is properly supplied. Lit in orange: Screen saving Blinks in orange and blue: Backlight failure Not lit: Power is not supplied.

6) Human sensor Detects human movement. Applicable models: GT2715-XTBA/D and GT2712-STBA/D

7) Unit installation fitting Mounting fixtures for fixing the GOT to the control panel

8) Reset switch Hardware reset switch

9) S.MODE switch Used for OS installation at the GOT startup

10) SD card access LED ON: SD card installed Blink: SD card accessed OFF: SD card not installed or SD card installed but removal possible

11) SD card interface (inside the cover) For installing an SD card

12) SD card cover Has the function to switch the access to the SD card between enabled and disabled states. When the cover is opened: Access prohibited When the cover is closed: Access allowed

13) Battery (inside the cover) Space for housing the battery

14) Side interface (inside the cover) For installing a communication unit

15) USB interface (Host/back) For connecting a USB mouse, a USB keyboard, or a USB barcode reader, and transferring or saving data (Connector shape: TYPE-A)

16) Cable clamp mounting hole Cable clamp mounting hole as a precaution against a disconnection of the USB cable

17) Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)

Switches the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port between used and unused states (initial setting (unused))

18) Auxiliary extension interface For installing an option unit Applicable models: GT2715-XTBA/D, GT2712-STBA/D, GT2712-STWA/D, GT2710-STBA/D, GT2710- VTBA/D, GT2710-VTWA/D, GT2708-STBA/D, GT2708-VTBA/D

19) Extension interface For installing a communication unit or an option unit

20) Vertical installation arrow mark For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the arrow points upward.

21) Power terminal Power input terminal, FG terminal, LG terminal (except GT2705-VTBD)

22) Ethernet interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack))

23) Ethernet communication status LED SD/RD LED ON: Data sent or received SD/RD LED OFF: Data not sent or received SPEED LED ON: Communicating at 100 Mbps SPEED LED OFF: Communicating at 10 Mbps or disconnected

24) RS-232 interface For communicating with a controller (connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male), #4-40UNC inch screw thread) For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

25) RS-422/485 interface For communicating with a controller (connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female), M2.6 metric screw thread) For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

26) USB interface (Device/back) For connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: Mini-B) Applicable model: GT2712-STWA/D, GT2710-VTWA/D

27) Special fitting installation hole *1 For fixing the GOT to the control panel to comply with the ATEX directive and KCs regulation Applicable model: GT2712-STWA/D, GT2710-VTWA/D

28) Rating plate

2 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.1 GT27

4

4.2 GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W GT2512-WX

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 125 Part names and settings of GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, and GT2507-W

GT2510-WX

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 125 Part names and settings of GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, and GT2507-W

14)

8)

4)

1)2) 5) 5)6)7)

11)12) 23)

15)

13)

16)

24)

5) 5) 3)

22) 21) 18) 19) 17) 20)

10) 9)

10) 9)

8)

14)

15)

22) 21) 18) 19) 17) 20)

4)

3)

1)2)

23)5) 5)

16)

24)

11)12)5) 5)6)7) 13)

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.2 GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W 123

12

GT2507-W

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 125 Part names and settings of GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, and GT2507-W

11)12)5) 5)7) 6)1)2)

4)

22) 21) 18) 19) 17) 20)

10) 9)

14)

23) 15)

13)5) 5)

16)

3)

8)24)

4 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.2 GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W

4

Part names and settings of GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, and GT2507-W

*1 When you remove the USB cable from the GOT, support it by hand after the successful completion dialog is displayed. For closing the USB environmental protection cover, fix the cover to the GOT by firmly pushing the USB mark on the latch to comply with the protective structure.

*2 Leave the GOT on for more than 10 minutes before replacing the battery. Replace the battery within five minutes. Use GT11-50BAT for the battery. Incorrect handling may cause the battery to explode. Dispose of the battery as industrial waste.

*3 Use the copper wires for the wires to be connected to the power supply terminal.

No. Name Description 1) Display section Displays the utility and the user-created screen.

2) Touch panel For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user-created screen

3) USB interface (Device/front) For connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: Mini-B) mark: *1

4) POWER LED Lit in blue: Power is properly supplied. Lit in orange: Screen saving Blinks in orange and blue: Backlight failure Not lit: Power is not supplied.

5) Unit installation fitting Mounting fixtures for fixing the GOT to the control panel

6) Reset switch Hardware reset switch

7) S.MODE switch Used for OS installation at the GOT startup

8) SD card access LED ON: SD card installed Blink: SD card accessed OFF: SD card not installed or SD card installed but removal possible

9) SD card interface (inside the cover) For installing an SD card

10) SD card cover Has the function to switch the access to the SD card between enabled and disabled states. When the cover is opened: Access prohibited When the cover is closed: Access allowed

11) Battery (inside the cover) Space for housing the battery

12) Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)

Switches the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port between used and unused states (initial setting (unused))

13) Wireless LAN communication unit interface (inside the cover)

For installing a wireless LAN communication unit

14) USB interface (Host/back) For connecting a USB mouse, a USB keyboard, or a USB barcode reader, and transferring or saving data (Connector shape: TYPE-A)

15) Cable clamp mounting hole For attaching a cable clamp to prevent the USB cable or the sound output cable from being accidentally pulled out

16) Vertical installation arrow mark For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the arrow points upward.

17) Power terminal Power input terminal, FG terminal

18) Ethernet interface (port 1) For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack))19) Ethernet interface (port 2)

20) Ethernet communication status LED SD/RD LED ON: Data sent or received SD/RD LED OFF: Data not sent or received SPEED LED ON: Communicating at 100 Mbps SPEED LED OFF: Communicating at 10 Mbps or disconnected

21) RS-422/485 interface For communicating with a controller (connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female), M2.6 metric screw thread) For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

22) RS-232 interface For communicating with a controller (connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male), #4-40UNC inch screw thread) For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

23) Sound output interface For outputting sounds (applicable plug: 3.5 stereo mini-plug (3-prong))

24) Rating plate mark: *2*3

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.2 GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W 125

12

MEMO

6 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.2 GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W

4

4.3 GT2507T-W GT2507T-W

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 128 Part names and settings of GT2507T-W

10)11)4) 4)5)6) 12)

9) 8)

13) 23)

14) 7)16)

24)

1)2)

3)

22) 21) 17)18) 19) 20)

4) 4)

15)

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.3 GT2507T-W 127

12

Part names and settings of GT2507T-W No. Name Description 1) Display section Displays the utility and the user-created screen.

2) Touch panel For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user-created screen

3) POWER LED Lit in blue: Power is properly supplied. Lit in orange: Screen saving Blinks in orange and blue: Backlight failure Not lit: Power is not supplied.

4) Unit installation fitting Mounting fixtures for fixing the GOT to the control panel

5) Reset switch Hardware reset switch

6) S.MODE switch Used for OS installation at the GOT startup

7) SD card access LED ON: SD card installed Blink: SD card accessed OFF: SD card not installed or SD card installed but removal possible

8) SD card interface (inside the cover) For installing an SD card

9) SD card cover Has the function to switch the access to the SD card between enabled and disabled states. When the cover is opened: Access prohibited When the cover is closed: Access allowed

10) Battery (inside the cover) Space for housing the battery

11) Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover) Switches the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port between used and unused states (initial setting (unused))

12) Wireless LAN communication unit interface (inside the cover)

For installing a wireless LAN communication unit

13) USB interface (Host/back) For connecting a USB mouse, a USB keyboard, or a USB barcode reader, and transferring or saving data (Connector shape: TYPE-A)

14) USB interface (Device/back) For connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: Mini-B)

15) Cable clamp mounting hole For attaching a cable clamp to prevent the USB cable or the sound output cable from being accidentally pulled out

16) Vertical installation arrow mark For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the arrow points upward.

17) Power terminal Power input terminal, FG terminal

18) Ethernet interface (port 1) For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack))19) Ethernet interface (port 2)

20) Ethernet communication status LED SD/RD LED ON: Data sent or received SD/RD LED OFF: Data not sent or received SPEED LED ON: Communicating at 100 Mbps SPEED LED OFF: Communicating at 10 Mbps or disconnected

21) RS-422/485 interface For communicating with a controller (connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female), M2.6 metric screw thread) For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

22) RS-232 interface For communicating with a controller (connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male), #4-40UNC inch screw thread) For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

23) Sound output interface For outputting sounds (applicable plug: 3.5 stereo mini-plug (3-prong))

24) Rating plate

8 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.3 GT2507T-W

4

4.4 GT25-S, GT25-V GT2512-S

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 133 Part names and settings of GT25-S and GT25-V

GT2512F-S

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 133 Part names and settings of GT25-S and GT25-V

1)2)

5)

25)

19)

8)

17)

9)

10)

11) 12)

13) 14)

20)

15)

24) 22) 21)

7) 7)

7) 7)

3)4)

26)

16)

23)29)

10)

11)12)

14)

5)

7)

27)

13)

15)

25) 24) 22) 21)

27) 7) 27)19)

8)

17)

9)

27) 7)

26)

1)2)

16)

20)

27)

27)

27)27)

27)

27)

7)

23)29)

The figure shows a GOT with the fittings installed on the top, bottom, right, and left. Install the fittings on the top and bottom, or the right and left of the GOT.

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.4 GT25-S, GT25-V 129

13

GT2510-V

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 133 Part names and settings of GT25-S and GT25-V

GT2510F-V

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 133 Part names and settings of GT25-S and GT25-V

13)

10)

11) 12)

14)

15)

25) 24) 22) 21)

7) 7)19)

8)

17)

9)7) 7)

26)

1)2)

5)

3)4)

16)

20)

23)

28) 28)

29)

11)12)

14)

5) 7)

13)

15)

25) 24) 22) 21)

27) 27)19)

8)

17)

9)

27)

26)

1)2)

16)

20)

27)

27)

7)

7)

10)

27)

27)

27) 27)

27)

7)

23)29)

The figure shows a GOT with the fittings installed on the top, bottom, right, and left. Install the fittings on the top and bottom, or the right and left of the GOT.

0 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.4 GT25-S, GT25-V

4

GT2508-V

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 133 Part names and settings of GT25-S and GT25-V

GT2508F-V

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 133 Part names and settings of GT25-S and GT25-V

10)

11)12)13)

17)

14)

15)

25) 24) 22) 21)

7) 7)19)

8) 9)7) 7)1)2)

5)

3)4)

16) 26)

20)

23)29)

10)

11)12)13)

27)

27)

5) 7)

15)

14)

25) 24) 22) 21)

27) 7) 27)19)

8)

17)

9) 7) 27)

26)

1)2)

20)

27)

7)

27)

27)

23)29)

The figure shows a GOT with the fittings installed on the top, bottom, right, and left. Install the fittings on the top and bottom, or the right and left of the GOT.

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.4 GT25-S, GT25-V 131

13

GT2505-V

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 133 Part names and settings of GT25-S and GT25-V

11)

13)

8) 23)

7)

10)7) 7)

15)

5)

1) 2)

4)

24)

25)

7) 17)

20)

30)

22) 21)

29)

31)

2 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.4 GT25-S, GT25-V

4

Part names and settings of GT25-S and GT25-V No. Name Description 1) Display section Displays the utility and the user-created screen.

2) Touch panel For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user-created screen

3) USB interface (Host/front) For connecting a USB mouse, a USB keyboard, or a USB barcode reader, and transferring or saving data (Connector shape: USB-A) Applicable models: GT2512-STBA/D, GT2510-VTBA/D, GT2508-VTBA/D

4) USB interface (Device/front) For connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: USB Mini-B) Applicable models: GT2512-STBA/D, GT2510-VTBA/D, GT2508-VTBA/D, GT2505-V

5) POWER LED Lit in blue: Power is properly supplied. Lit in orange: Screen saving Blinks in orange and blue: Backlight failure Not lit: Power is not supplied. (For GT2512F-STNA/D, GT2510F-VTNA/D, and GT2508F-VTNA/D, you can check the LED status from the GOT rear face.)

7) Unit installation fitting Mounting fixtures for fixing the GOT to the control panel

8) Reset switch Hardware reset switch

9) S.MODE switch *3 Used for OS installation at the GOT startup

10) SD card access LED ON: SD card installed Blink: SD card accessed OFF: SD card not installed or SD card installed but removal possible

11) SD card interface (inside the cover) For installing an SD card

12) SD card cover Has the function to switch the access to the SD card between enabled and disabled states. When the cover is opened: Access prohibited When the cover is closed: Access allowed

13) Battery (inside the cover) Space for housing the battery

14) Side interface (inside the cover) For installing a communication unit

15) USB interface (Host/back) For connecting a USB mouse, a USB keyboard, or a USB barcode reader, and transferring or saving data (Connector shape: USB-A)

16) Cable clamp mounting hole Cable clamp mounting hole as a precaution against a disconnection of the USB cable

17) Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)

GT2512, GT2510, GT2508 Switches the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port between used and unused states (initial setting (unused)) GT2505-V

For switching the terminating resistor setting of the RS-422/485 communication port to 330 , 110 , or OPEN (Default: 330 )

19) Extension interface For installing a communication unit or an option unit

20) Vertical installation arrow mark For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the arrow points upward.

21) Power terminal Power input terminal, FG terminal, LG terminal *2

22) Ethernet interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack))

23) Ethernet communication status LED SD/RD LED ON: Data sent or received SD/RD LED OFF: Data not sent or received SPEED LED ON: Communicating at 100 Mbps SPEED LED OFF: Communicating at 10 Mbps or disconnected

24) RS-232 interface For communicating with a controller (connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male), #4-40UNC inch screw thread) For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

25) RS-422/485 interface For communicating with a controller (connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female), M2.6 metric screw thread) For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

26) USB interface (Device/back) For connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: USB Mini-B) Applicable models: GT2512F-STNA/D, GT2510-VTWA/D, GT2510F-VTNA/D, GT2508-VTWA/D, GT2508F-VTNA/D

27) Fitting installation hole For fixing the fitting to the control panel Applicable models: GT2512F-STNA/D, GT2510F-VTNA/D, and GT2508F-VTNA/D

28) Special fitting installation hole *1 For fixing the GOT to the control panel to comply with the ATEX directive and KCs regulation Applicable model: GT2510-VTWA/D

29) Rating plate

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.4 GT25-S, GT25-V 133

13

*1 The special fittings are sold separately. To obtain the special fittings, contact your local sales office.

*2 GT2505 does not have the LG terminal. *3 GT2505-V does not have the S.MODE switch.

To install OSs on the GT2505-V, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

30) SD card access switch For enabling or disabling the access to the SD card when the SD card is inserted/removed to/from the GOT ON: SD card access allowed (The SD card cannot be removed.) OFF: SD card access prohibited (The SD card can be removed.)

31) USB cable fixing hole For passing through a cable tie used to fix the USB cable to prevent the cable from being accidentally pulled out

No. Name Description

4 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.4 GT25-S, GT25-V

4

4.5 GT25HS-V GT2506HS-V

Front Panel

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 139 Part names and settings of GT25HS-V

Back Panel

*1 Do not loosen or remove the two screws. For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 139 Part names and settings of GT25HS-V

5)

6) 7) 3) 8)

1) 2)

4)4)

24)

18)

17)

19)

20)23)

11)

10)

15)

9)

13)

14)

12)

16)

*1

Environmental protection back cover closed Environmental protection back cover opened

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.5 GT25HS-V 135

13

Top Face (Interface)

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 139 Part names and settings of GT25HS-V

25 2726

Interface environmental protection cover closed

29

28

32 35

31 30

LED1 LED2 33 34

Interface environmental protection cover opened

6 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.5 GT25HS-V

4

GT2505HS-V

Front Panel

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 139 Part names and settings of GT25HS-V

Back Panel

*1 Do not loosen or remove the two screws. For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 139 Part names and settings of GT25HS-V

12

86

3

27 5

13

11

17

18

10

16

12

Environmental protection back cover closed Environmental protection back cover opened

15)

1921 2223)9

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.5 GT25HS-V 137

13

Top Face (Interface)

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 139 Part names and settings of GT25HS-V

26

25

Interface environmental protection cover closed

35 LED2 LED1

34

2829

3332

Interface environmental protection cover opened

8 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.5 GT25HS-V

4

Part names and settings of GT25HS-V No. Name Description 1) Display section Displays the utility and the user-created screen.

2) Touch panel For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user-created screen

3) Operation switch (6 switches) Switch for external direct wiring (independent contact)

4) Operation switch name sheet installation place

Place (concave shape) where the operation switch name sheet (Insert into the space from a transverse direction) is installed. For the details, refer to the following. Page 351 Operation switch name sheet creation (GT2506HS-V)

5) Emergency stop switch Switch for external direct wiring (independent contact)

6) POWER LED Lit in blue: Power is properly supplied. Lit in orange: Screen saving Blinks in orange and blue: Backlight failure Not lit: Power is not supplied.

7) Display LED for operation switch (6 LEDs)

Display LED for operation switch (green) (lighting control from display section)

8) Display LED for grip switch Display LED for grip switch (green) (lighting control from display section)

9) External interface connector GT2506HS-V For external cable connection (for PLC, switch and power supply external wiring) (Connector shape: square 42 pins, male) GT2505HS-V

For connecting an external cable to a PLC, switch, or power supply (Connector shape: Round 37 pins, male)

10) Environmental protection back cover GT2506HS-V Opened and closed when the PLC communication type is changed (RS-422/485 RS-232,before shipping: RS-422/485), or the battery is replaced. GT2505HS-V

Opened and closed when the PLC communication type is changed among Ethernet, RS-422, and RS- 232 (factory default: Ethernet), or when the battery is replaced.

11) Environmental protection back cover screw

For opening and closing the environmental protection back cover (drop prevention screw)

12) Hook for hanging on walls Hook when the Handy GOT is used hanging on walls.

13) Hand strap Used to hold the Handy GOT in hand by putting a hand under the strap. Length adjustable.

14) Grip angle changing screw Used when changing the angle of the grip. (5, M4 screw) The angle of the grip can be set either to the standard angle (as before shipping) or 15 degrees to the right.

15) Grip switch Switch for external direct wiring (independent contact)

16) Rating plate

17) Battery (inside the cover) For backing up clock data, system log data, and buffering data

18) Connector for battery connection (inside the cover)

For battery connection

19) RS-232 connector Connector for PLC communication using RS-232 For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1

20) RS-422/485 connector Connector for PLC communication using RS-422/485 For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1

21) RS-422 connector For communicating with a PLC using RS-422 For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1

22) Ethernet connector For communicating with a PLC using Ethernet

23) Cable connector for PLC communication

Interface cable connector for PLC communication GT2506HS-V

Connector for either 19) or 20) and for selection of the PLC communication type. (Connected to RS-422/485 before shipping.) GT2505HS-V

Connect this connector to one of the above connectors (19), 21), or 22)), and select a PLC communication type. (Connected to the Ethernet connector at factory default.)

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.5 GT25HS-V 139

14

24) Terminating resistor setting switch For switching the RS-422/485 communication interface terminating resistor (Set to Disable before shipping)

25) Emergency stop switch guard cover installing hole

For installing an emergency stop switch guard cover (option)

26) Interface environmental protection cover

GT2506HS-V Opened and closed to use the USB port, SD card, S.MODE switch, or reset switch. GT2505HS-V

Opened and closed to use the USB port or an SD card.

27) Keylock switch (2-position switch) Switch for external direct wiring (independent contact)

28) USB interface (Host) For data transfer, data storage (connector type: USB-A)

29) USB interface (Device) For PC connection (connector type: USB Mini-B)

30) Reset switch Switch for resetting the hardware

31) S.MODE switch (OS install switch) Switch used for OS installation at GOT startup.

32) SD card access switch For enabling or disabling the access to the SD card when the SD card is inserted/removed to/ from the Handy GOT ON: SD card access allowed (The SD card cannot be removed.) OFF: SD card access prohibited (The SD card can be removed.)

33) SD card access LED ON: SD card installed Blink: SD card accessed OFF: SD card not installed or SD card installed but removal possible

34) SD card interface For installing an SD card

35) Ethernet communication status LED LED1: ON during data transfer or reception, LED2: ON during 100 Mbps transmission

No. Name Description

ON side

OFF side

ON

1 2

Switch No.

Terminating resistor setting switch enlarged view

Terminating resistor

Enable

Disable

ON ON

OFF OFF

Set to Disable before shipping

1 2

0 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.5 GT25HS-V

4

4.6 GT23 GT2310-V, GT2308-V Example) GT2310-VTBA

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 142 Part names and settings of GT23

1)2)

3)

5) 6)

7)

8)

10)

9)

19) 18) 16) 15)

4) 13) 4)

4) 4)

12) 11)

14)

17)20)

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.6 GT23 141

14

Part names and settings of GT23 No. Name Description 1) Display section Displays the utility and the user-created screen.

2) Touch panel For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user-created screen

3) POWER LED Lit in blue: Power is properly supplied. Lit in orange: Screen saving Blinks in orange and blue: Backlight failure Not lit: Power is not supplied.

4) Unit installation fitting Mounting fixtures for fixing the GOT to the control panel

5) S.MODE switch Used for OS installation at the GOT startup

6) SD card access LED ON: SD card installed Blink: SD card accessed OFF: SD card not installed or SD card installed but removal possible

7) SD card interface (inside the cover) For installing an SD card

8) SD card cover Has the function to switch the access to the SD card between enabled and disabled states. When the cover is opened: Access prohibited When the cover is closed: Access allowed

9) USB interface (Host) For connecting a USB mouse, a USB keyboard, or a USB barcode reader, and transferring or saving data (Connector shape: TYPE-A)

10) USB interface (Device) For connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: Mini-B)

11) Cable clamp mounting hole Cable clamp mounting hole as a precaution against a disconnection of the USB cable

12) Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)

Switches the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port between used and unused states (initial setting (unused))

13) Battery (inside the cover) Space for housing the battery

14) Vertical installation arrow mark For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the arrow points upward.

15) Power terminal Power input terminal, LG terminal, FG terminal

16) Ethernet interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack))

17) Ethernet communication status LED SD/RD LED ON: Data sent or received SD/RD LED OFF: Data not sent or received SPEED LED ON: Communicating at 100 Mbps SPEED LED OFF: Communicating at 10 Mbps or disconnected

18) RS-232 interface For communicating with a controller (connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male), #4-40UNC inch screw thread) For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

19) RS-422/485 interface For communicating with a controller (connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female), M2.6 metric screw thread) For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

20) Rating plate

2 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.6 GT23

4

4.7 GT21 GT2107-WTBD, GT2107-WTSD

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 147 Part names and settings of GT21

GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 147 Part names and settings of GT21

1)2) 13)

4) 12) 16) 13)

14) 15)

19)

10)

13) 5)7)3)

13) 11)

9)

20)

1)2) 13)

11)

9)

6) 15)

16)

7)

12)

14)

18) 13)

13)

13)

20)

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.7 GT21 143

14

GT2104-RTBD

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 147 Part names and settings of GT21

GT2104-PMBD

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 147 Part names and settings of GT21

1)2) 11)

15)

14)

9) 3)

7)

12) 16)5)

4)13) 13)

13) 13)

20)

1)2) 11)

12) 16)

3)

7) 14)

9)

15)

13) 13)

13) 13)

20)

4 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.7 GT21

4

GT2104-PMBDS

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 147 Part names and settings of GT21

GT2104-PMBDS2

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 147 Part names and settings of GT21

GT2104-PMBLS

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 147 Part names and settings of GT21

1)2) 11)

12) 16)

14)7) 9)

5)

13)13)

13) 13) 15)

20)

1)2) 11)

16)

14)6) 9)

5)

15)13) 13)

13)13) 20)

1)2) 11)

16)

8)

13) 13)

13) 13)20)

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.7 GT21 145

14

GT2103-PMBD

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 147 Part names and settings of GT21

GT2103-PMBDS

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 147 Part names and settings of GT21

GT2103-PMBDS2

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 147 Part names and settings of GT21

GT2103-PMBLS

For the names of parts, refer to the following. Page 147 Part names and settings of GT21

1)2) 11)

12)

3)

7) 9)

17)4)

13) 13)

13) 13)

20)

1)2) 11)

12)

5) 7) 9)

17)

13) 13)

13) 13)

20)

1)2) 11)

5) 6) 9)

17)

13) 13)

13) 13)

20)

1)2)

8)

13) 13)

13) 13)

11) 20)

6 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.7 GT21

4

Part names and settings of GT21 No. Name Description 1) Display section Displays the utility and the user-created screen.

2) Touch panel For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user-created screen

3) Ethernet interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: RJ45 (modular jack))

4) Ethernet communication status LED SD/RD LED ON: Data sent or received SD/RD LED OFF: Data not sent or received SPEED LED ON: Communicating at 100 Mbps SPEED LED OFF: Communicating at 10 Mbps or disconnected

5) RS-232 interface (Rear face) For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (FA transparent function) Connector shape is different depending on the model of the GT21. GT2107-W: D-sub 9-pin (male), #4-40UNC inch screw thread GT2104-R: 9-pin connector terminal block GT2104-P: MINI-DIN 6-pin GT2103-P: MINI-DIN 6-pin

For connecting multiple GOTs, a barcode reader, an RFID, or a serial printer For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

6) RS-232 interface (Side face) For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (FA transparent function) Connector shape is different depending on the model of the GT21. GT2105: D-sub 9-pin (male), #4-40UNC inch screw thread GT2104-P: 9-pin connector terminal block GT2103-P: 9-pin connector terminal block

For connecting multiple GOTs, a barcode reader, an RFID, or a serial printer For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

7) RS-422/485 interface For communicating with a controller Connector shape is different depending on the model of the GT21. GT2107-W, GT2105: D-sub 9-pin (female), M2.6 metric screw thread GT2104-R: 9-pin connector terminal block GT2104-P: 9-pin or 5-pin connector terminal block GT2103-P: 9-pin or 5-pin connector terminal block

For the pin layout of the connector, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

8) RS-422 interface For communicating with a controller (9-pin connector terminal block)

9) Power terminal Power input terminal, FG terminal

10) USB interface (Host) For connecting a USB mouse, a USB keyboard, or a USB barcode reader, and transferring or saving data (Connector shape: USB-A)

11) USB interface (Device) For connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: Mini-B)

12) Terminating resistor setting switch Switches the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port among 330 , 110 , and OPEN

13) Unit installation fitting Mounting fixtures for fixing the GOT to the control panel

14) SD card interface (inside the cover) For installing an SD card

15) SD card access LED ON: SD card installed Blink: SD card accessed OFF: SD card not installed or SD card installed but removal possible

16) Battery (inside the cover) Space for housing the battery

17) SD card unit connector (inside the cover) For mounting the SD card unit

18) POWER LED Lit in blue: Power is properly supplied. Lit in orange: Screen saving Blinks in orange and blue: Backlight failure Not lit: Power is not supplied.

19) Cable clamp mounting hole Cable clamp mounting hole as a precaution against a disconnection of the USB cable

20) Rating plate

4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.7 GT21 147

14

MEMO

8 4 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS 4.7 GT21

5

5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE

Page 149 Overview Page 151 EMC Directive Requirements Page 169 Low Voltage Directive Requirements

5.1 Overview For electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and electrical safety, regulatory standards are established in each country. Especially, for the products to be sold in European countries, conformance to the EMC Directive, which is one of the European Directives, has been mandatory as the EMC standards since 1996. In addition, conformance to the Low Voltage Directive, another European Directive, has also been mandatory as the electrical safety standards since 1997. In European countries, if a product meets the requirements of the EMC Directive or the Low Voltage Directive, the product's manufacturer must declare conformity of the product and affix the CE mark to the product. In some countries or regions other than European countries, the product's manufacturer also must declare conformity of the product and affix a designated mark to the product (example: UKCA mark in the UK). This section describes the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive as examples for conformance to EMC and electrical safety standards. EMC and electrical safety standards in each country are stipulated to be consistent with the corresponding international standards. When the requirements are consistent with the same standards, common measures are taken to conform to the standards in different countries. For the EMC Directive, regulatory compliance with equivalent EMC standards are required for example in the UK and Korea. For the Low Voltage Directive, regulatory compliance with equivalent electrical safety standards are required for example in the UK.

Authorized representative in the EU and the UK The authorized representative in the EU and the UK is shown below. Company name: Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV Address: Mitsubishi-Electric-Platz 1, 40882 Ratingen, Germany

5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.1 Overview 149

15

Conforming standards in the EMC Directive The GOT complies with the following standards in the EMC Directive.

*1 The GOT is an open type device (designed to be integrated in equipment). Make sure to install the GOT on a control panel. This test item is conducted in the condition where the GOT is installed on a control panel and combined with the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC.

*2 The length of a sound output cable must be 30 m or less. *3 QP: Quasi-peak value, Mean: Average value *4 This test item is conducted in the following conditions.

30 MHz to 230 MHz QP: 40 dBV/m (measured at 10 m) 230MHz to 1000MHz QP: 47 dBV/m (measured at 10 m)

Conforming standards in the Low Voltage Directive The GOT complies with the following standards in the Low Voltage Directive. EN61131-2: Programmable controllers - Equipment requirements and tests

Applied standard

Test standard Test details Standard value

EN61131-2 : 2007

CISPR16-2-3 Radiated noise *1*2

Test for measuring electromagnetic emissions from the product

30 MHz to 230 MHz QP: 30 dBV/m (measured at 30 m) *3*4

230MHz to 1000MHz QP: 37 dBV/m (measured at 30 m) *3*4

CISPR16-2-1 Conducted noise *1*2

Test for measuring electromagnetic emissions from the product to the power cables

150kHz to 500kHz QP: 79dB, Mean: 66dB *3

500kHz to 30MHz QP: 73dB, Mean: 60dB *3

IEC61000-4-2 Electrostatic immunity *1*2

Immunity test in which static electricity is applied to the cabinet of the equipment

Contact discharge: 4 kV Aerial discharge: 8 kV

IEC61000-4-3 Radiated electromagnetic field, amplitude modulation *1*2

Immunity test in which an electric field is applied to the product

80 MHz to 1000 MHz: 10 V/m 1.4GHz to 2GHz: 3V/m 2.0GHz to 2.7GHz: 1V/m (80% amplitude modulation at 1 kHz)

IEC61000-4-4 Fast transient burst noise *1*2

Immunity test in which burst noise is applied to the power cables and the signal lines

Power cable: 2kV Digital I/O: 1kV Analog I/O: 1kV Signal cable: 1kV

IEC61000-4-5 Surge immunity *1*2

Immunity test in which lightening surge is applied to the product

AC power type Power cable (between cable and ground): 2 kV Power cable (between cables): 1 kV Data communication port: 1 kV DC power type

Power cable (between cable and ground): 0.5kV Power cable (between cables): 0.5kV Data communication port: 1 kV

IEC61000-4-6 Conducted RF immunity *1*2

Immunity test in which a noise inducted on the power cable and the signal lines is applied

Power cable: 10V Data communication port: 10 V

IEC61000-4-8 Power supply frequency magnetic field immunity *1*2

Test for checking normal operations under the circumstance exposed to the ferromagnetic field noise of the power supply frequency (50/ 60 Hz)

30 A/m

EN61131-2 : 2007

IEC61000-4-11 Instantaneous power failure and voltage dips immunity

Test for checking normal operations at instantaneous power failure

AC power type 0.5 cycle 0% (Interval 1 second to 10 seconds) 250/300 cycle 0% 10/12 cycle 40% 25/30 cycle 70%

0 5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.1 Overview

5

5.2 EMC Directive Requirements The EMC Directive requires the following. Strong electromagnetic waves are not emitted to the outside.: Emission (Electromagnetic interference) The product is not affected by the electromagnetic waves from the outside.: Immunity (Electromagnetic sensitivity) To comply with the EMC Directive, this section explains the precautions for configuring equipment integrating the GOT. The data described herein are produced with our best, based on the regulation requirements and standards obtained by Mitsubishi Electric. However, the data do not guarantee that the whole equipment produced according to the data comply with the above directive. The manufacturer of the equipment must determine the method to comply with the EMC Directive and conformance to the directive.

Installing the GOT on the control panel The GOT is an open type device (designed to be integrated in equipment). Make sure to install the GOT in a control panel. This restriction ensures safety and also has a large effect of suppressing noise generated from the GOT by using the control panel.

Control panel The control panel must be conductive. When fixing a top or bottom plate of the control panel with bolts, do not coat the plate and bolt surfaces so that they contact each other. Connect the door and the box using a thick grounding cable to ensure the low impedance under high frequency. To ensure electric conductivity in the large area as much as possible between an inner plate and the control panel, do not coat the fixing bolt area of the inner plate and the control panel. Ground the control panel using a thick grounding cable to ensure the low impedance under high frequency. The diameter of cable holes on the control panel must be 10 cm or less. If the diameter of the hole is 10 cm or more, radio waves may leak. To reduce the chance of radio waves leaking out, ensure that the space between the control panel and its door is as small as possible. Pasting the following EMI gasket directly on the painted surface seals the space, reducing the leak of electric waves.

Our test has been carried out on a panel having the damping characteristics of 37 dB max. and 30 dB mean (measured by 3m method with 30 MHz to 300 MHz).

Connection of power and ground cables Ground the GOT and connect power supply cables as shown below.

Wiring the ground cable Provide a ground point near the GOT. Short-circuit the line ground terminal (LG terminal) and the frame ground terminal (FG terminal) of the GOT, and ground them with the thickest and shortest cable as possible.

Ground cable length The ground cable length must be 30 cm or shorter. The LG and FG terminals pass the noise generated in the GOT system to the ground. Therefore, ensure an impedance as low as possible. Since the ground cables relieve the noise, the cables themselves carry a large noise. Thus, short wiring prevents the cable from acting as an antenna. (A long conductor is an antenna radiating noise more efficiently.)

Manufacturer Series name Contact KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. RFSG series (Recommended Product) +81-587-34-3561

5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements 151

15

Treatment of the power cable and the ground cable Twist the ground cable led from the ground point with the power cable. Twisting with the ground cable relieves more noise from the power cable to the ground. When a noise filter is installed to the power cable, twisting the power cable and the ground cable may not be required.

Installing a noise filter (power supply line filter) A noise filter is a part to effectively reduce conducted noise. Except some models, installation of a noise filter to the power supply lines is not necessary. However, installing the noise filter can reduce conducted noise. The noise filter is effective to reduce conducted noise in the band of 10 MHz or less. Use a noise filter equivalent to the following noise filters (double -type filters).

Precautions The following shows the precautions for installing a noise filter.

Prohibition of bundling cables Do not bundle the input and output cables of the noise filter. Bundling the cables inducts the noise from the output-side cable into the input-side cable where noise has been eliminated by the noise filter.

Grounding the noise filter Connect the ground terminal of the noise filter to the control panel with a short cable as much as possible (approximately 10 cm).

Model Manufacturer Rated current Rated voltage FN343-3/05 SCHAFFNER 3A 250V

FN660-6/06 SCHAFFNER 6A

RSHN-2003 TDK 3A

Input side (power supply side)

Output side (device side)

Filter

Wire the input and output cables separately.

Filter

Input side (power supply side)

Induction

Output side (device side)

Bundling the input and output cables inducts noise.

Bundling

2 5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5

System configuration You can also check the EMC Directive compliance status of the GOT2000 series at the Mitsubishi Electric Factory Automation Global Website. For the latest information, go to the Mitsubishi Electric Factory Automation Global Website. www.MitsubishiElectric.com/fa

GOT Use the following GOTs having a CE mark on the rating plate. For how to check the hardware version of the GOT, refer to the following. Page 432 Confirming of Versions and Conforming Standards : Compliant : Not compliant

Product name Model Hardware version (Manufacture year and month)

EMC Directive

GT2715 GT2715-XTBA Version A or later (April 2014)

GT2715-XTBD

GT2712 GT2712-STBA Version A or later (August 2013)

GT2712-STBD

GT2712-STWA

GT2712-STWD

GT2710 GT2710-STBA

GT2710-STBD

GT2710-VTBA

GT2710-VTBD

GT2710-VTWA

GT2710-VTWD

GT2708 GT2708-STBA

GT2708-STBD

GT2708-VTBA

GT2708-VTBD

GT2705 GT2705-VTBD Version A or later (April 2015)

GT2512 GT2512-WXTBD Version A or later (January 2021)

GT2512-WXTSD

GT2512-STBA Version A or later (October 2014)

GT2512-STBD

GT2512F-STNA Version A or later (January 2016)

GT2512F-STND

GT2510 GT2510-WXTBD Version A or later (April 2017)

GT2510-WXTSD

GT2510-VTBA Version A or later (April 2014)

GT2510-VTBD

GT2510-VTWA

GT2510-VTWD

GT2510F-VTNA Version A or later (January 2016)

GT2510F-VTND

GT2508 GT2508-VTBA Version A or later (April 2014)

GT2508-VTBD

GT2508-VTWA

GT2508-VTWD

GT2508F-VTNA Version A or later (January 2016)

GT2508F-VTND

5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements 153

15

Connection type The following table lists the connection types compliant with the EMC Directive. : Compliant : Not compliant

*1 For the details of each connection type, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 that covers the controller used

*2 When connecting the GOT to other controllers such as a non-Mitsubishi Electric PLC, fabricate connection cables and configure the system following the EMC Directive specifications. Page 167 Non-Mitsubishi Electric PLC, microcomputer, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC, MODBUS/RTU, and MODBUS/TCP connections

*3 Not available to GT25-W, GT2505-V and GT25HS-V. *4 Not available to GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2104-PMBLS, GT2103-PMBDS2, and GT2103-PMBLS. *5 Not available to GT25HS-V.

GT2507 GT2507-WTBD Version A or later (April 2017)

GT2507-WTSD

GT2507T-WTSD Version A or later (April 2018)

GT2505 GT2505-VTBD Version A or later (August 2017)

GT2505HS-VTBD Version A or later (April 2018)

GT2506 GT2506HS-VTBD Version A or later (August 2017)

GT2310 GT2310-VTBA Version A or later (August 2013)

GT2310-VTBD

GT2308 GT2308-VTBA

GT2308-VTBD

GT2107 GT2107-WTBD Version A or later (February 2017)

GT2107-WTSD

GT2105 GT2105-QTBDS Version B or later (May 2016)

GT2105-QMBDS

GT2104 GT2104-RTBD Version B or later (March 2015)

GT2104-PMBD Version B or later (October 2015)

GT2104-PMBDS

GT2104-PMBDS2 Version B or later (April 2016)

GT2104-PMBLS

GT2103 GT2103-PMBD Version B or later (October 2014)

GT2103-PMBDS

GT2103-PMBDS2 Version B or later (April 2015)

GT2103-PMBLS

Connection type *1 GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 Ethernet connection

Direct CPU connection (serial)

Serial communication connection

Bus connection *3

MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) *3

CC-Link IE TSN connection *3

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection *3

CC-Link IE Field Network connection *3

CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station) *3

CC-Link connection (Via G4)

GOT multi-drop connection *5 *4

Other connections (Connection with non-Mitsubishi Electric PLC, microcomputer, inverter, temperature controller, servo amplifier, CNC, and MODBUS equipment) *2

Product name Model Hardware version (Manufacture year and month)

EMC Directive

4 5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5

Connected devices When connecting the GOT to a non-Mitsubishi Electric PLC, refer to the manual about the EMC Directive compliance of the connected device (such as a PLC and a microcomputer). The GT25HS-V is compliant with the EMC Directive only when it is connected via a connector conversion box using an applicable connection type mentioned above.

Communication unit To comply with the EMC Directive, use the following communication units. When any other than the following communication units is used, the GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive.

Connection type Communication unit Hardware version (Manufacture year and month) Ethernet connection GOT Ethernet interface -

GT25-J71E71-100 Version A or later (September 2016)

Direct CPU connection (serial) GOT RS-232 interface -

GOT RS-422/485 interface -

GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S

Version D or later (January 2006)

Serial communication connection GOT RS-232 interface -

GOT RS-422/485 interface -

GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S

Version D or later (January 2006)

Bus connection GT15-QBUS Version D or later (October 2005)

GT15-QBUS2 GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Version C or later (October 2005)

GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L

Version G or later (March 2005)

MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)

GT15-J71LP23-25 GT15-J71BR13

Version C or later (September 2006)

CC-Link IE TSN connection GT25-J71GN13-T2 Version A or later (June 2019)

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

GT15-J71GP23-SX Version A or later (December 2007)

CC-Link IE Field Network connection

GT15-J71GF13-T2 Version A or later (April 2011)

CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station)

GT15-J61BT13 Version C or later (September 2006)

Non-Mitsubishi Electric PLC connection

GOT RS-232 interface -

GOT RS-422/485 interface -

GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S

Version D or later (January 2006)

Microcomputer connection (Ethernet)

GOT Ethernet interface -

Microcomputer connection (Serial) GOT RS-232 interface -

GOT RS-422/485 interface -

GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S

Version D or later (January 2006)

Temperature controller connection GOT RS-232 interface -

GOT RS-422/485 interface -

GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE

Version D or later (January 2006)

Inverter connection GOT RS-422/485 interface -

GT15-RS4-9S Version D or later (January 2006)

5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements 155

15

Option unit To comply with the EMC Directive, use the following option units. When any other than the following option units is used, the GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive.

*1 To use the unit on GT2715, the hardware version of the supplied GT16M-V4R1-Z/GT16M-V4-Z/GT16M-R2-Z and GT27-IF1000 must also be B or later.

Option The following lists the options compliant with the EMC Directive. : Compliant : Not compliant

Servo amplifier connection GOT RS-232 interface -

GOT RS-422/485 interface -

GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S

Version D or later (January 2006)

CNC connection GOT RS-232 interface -

GOT RS-422/485 interface -

GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S

Version D or later (January 2006)

GT15-J71LP23-25 GT15-J61BT13

Version C or later (September 2006)

GOT Ethernet interface -

MODBUS/RTU connection GOT RS-232 interface -

GOT RS-422/485 interface -

GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S Version D or later (January 2006)

MODBUS/TCP connection GOT Ethernet interface -

Product name Model Hardware version (Manufacture year and month) Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z Version A or later (August 2013)

Video/RGB input unit GT27-V4R1-Z Version A or later (August 2013), GT2715: Version B or later (April 2014) *1Video input unit GT27-V4-Z

RGB input unit GT27-R2 Version A or later (April 2015)

GT27-R2-Z Version A or later (August 2013), GT2715: Version B or later (April 2014) *1

RGB output unit GT27-ROUT Version A or later (April 2015)

GT27-ROUT-Z Version A or later (August 2013)

Printer unit GT15-PRN Version B or later (Feb 2006)

Digital video output unit GT27-VHOUT Version A or later (November 2018)

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT Version B or later (May 2007)

External I/O unit GT15-DIO Version B or later (May 2007)

GT15-DIOR Version A or later (July 2008)

SD card unit GT21-03SDCD - (October 2014)

Product name Model Hardware version (Manufacture year and month) EMC Directive Connector conversion box GT16H-CNB-42S Version D or later (January 2006)

GT16H-CNB-37S -

GT11H-CNB-37S -

Connection type Communication unit Hardware version (Manufacture year and month)

6 5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5

Cable MELSECNET/H (coaxial cable), and video connections Use a double shielded coaxial cable. The 5C-2V connector plug is applicable to the double shielded coaxial cable. Connect the 5C-2V connector plug to the coaxial cable inside the double shielded coaxial cable. Ground the shielded part outside the double shielded coaxial cable as shown in the following figure.

CC-Link IE Field Network connection Use the following cable dedicated to the CC-Link IE Field Network.

External cable Use version C or later of GT11H-C-37P.

Other connections For the details of the cables used, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 that covers the controller used

Fabricating cables To comply with the EMC Directive, fabricate cables (including user-created cables). For how to fabricate a cable, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 that covers the controller used

Manufacturer Model Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. SC-E5EW-SM

Grounding

Mitsubishi cable: 5C-2V-CCY Double-shielded coaxial cable

Internal conductor Insulation

material External conductor

Sheath

External conductor (Grounding)

Sheath Enlarged view of cable

5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements 157

15

Connection of power cables and ground cables Carry out wiring and connect the power and ground cables according to the following instruction. By the different wiring or connection method, the system may not comply with EMC Directive.

Wiring method As shown in the figure below, connect the power cable and the ground cable, and then attach a ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330, manufactured by TDK Corporation) within the specified range. GT23 does not need ferrite cores. Make sure to ground the LG cable and FG cable. For connection of power cables and ground cables, refer to the following. Page 151 Connection of power and ground cables GT2705-VTBD, GT25-W, GT2505-VTBD, and GT21 do not have the LG ground terminal.

100 V AC to 240 V AC GOT power supply section (GT27, GT25, GT23 only)

24 V DC power supply section (GT27, GT25 except Handy GOT, and GT23 only)

INPUT 100-240VAC

(LG) (FG)

90 m

m o

r l es

s

Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330)

INPUT 24VDC

+- (LG) (FG)

90 m

m o

r l es

s

Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330)

8 5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5

24 V DC power supply section (Handy GOT only)

1 turn

75 mm or less

5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements 159

16

Fabricating a connection cable Fabricate the cables used for the GOT by the methods as shown in this section. The fabrication requires a ferrite core, cable clamp, and cable shielding materials. The following products have passed the Mitsubishi Electric EMC Directive compliance test. ZCAT3035-1330 ferrite core (TDK Corporation) AD75CK-type cable clamp (Mitsubishi Electric Corporation) Zipper tubing SHNJ type (Zippertubing (Japan),Ltd)

Ethernet connection Ethernet cable Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose braided shield for grounding. The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp. Page 168 Grounding a cable Connecting to the Ethernet interface of the GOT or the Ethernet communication unit (GT25-J71E71-100)

Connecting to the multimedia unit (GT27-MMR-Z)

Direct CPU connection (serial) RS-232 cable and RS-422 cable Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below.

PLC/personal computer sideGOT side

230 or less 40 40 400 or less Unit: mm (inch) (9.06) (1.57) (1.57) (15.75)

120 or less

Personal computer side

Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330) GOT side

230 or less 40 Unit: mm (inch)

120 or less(4.72) (4.72)

(9.06) (1.57)

100 or less

Unit : mm (inch)

GOT side PLC sideFerrite Core (ZCAT3035-1330)

(3.94)

100 or less (3.94)

0 5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5

Serial communication connection RS-232 cable and RS-422 cable Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose braided shield sections for grounding. The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp. Page 168 Grounding a cable

Bus connection GT15-QCB and GT15-QCBS Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose braided shield sections for grounding. The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp. Page 168 Grounding a cable

GT15-CBS 1. Cut the ground cables from both ends of the cable to the length as shown in the figure below.

2. Install ferrite cores to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below, and insert the ground cables through the ferrite cores.

3. Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose braided shield sections for grounding.

The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp. Page 168 Grounding a cable

230 or less 40

230 or less

Unit: mm (inch)

GOT side PLC CPU side

40 (9.06) (1.57) (1.57) (9.06)

GOT side

40 40

PLC/GOT side

Unit: mm (inch)

360 or less360 or less (14.17) (14.17)(1.57) (1.57)

(14.17) (14.17)

(2.36) (2.36)

Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330)

360 or less 40 40Ground cables

(280 (11.02))

60 or less

GOT side

60 or less

360 or less

Unit: mm (inch)

PLC/GOT side

(1.57) (1.57)

5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements 161

16

Other bus connection cables 1. Wrap the cable shielding material around the cable, and pull out the braided cables for grounding from the cable

shielding material with the length as shown in the figure below.

2. Install ferrite cores to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below, and insert the braided cable for grounding at the PLC side through the ferrite core.

MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) connection Coaxial cable 1. Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose outer braided shield for grounding. The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp. Page 168 Grounding a cable

2. Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below.

Fiber-optic cable Fabricating a cable is not required.

80

GOT side PLC side

40 or less Unit: mm (inch)

Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330)

Grounding braided wire (50(1.97))

Grounding braided wire (200 (7.87))

Cable shielding material 80

40 or less (1.57)

(3.15)

(1.57)

(3.15)

130 or less

GOT side PLC side Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

230 or less 400 or less40 40 Unit: mm (inch)

130 or less (5.12)

(9.06) (1.57)

(5.12)

(15.75)(1.57)

2 5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5

CC-Link IE TSN connection Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose braided shield for grounding. The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp. Page 168 Grounding a cable

CC-Link IE Field Network connection 1. Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose braided shield for grounding. The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp. Page 168 Grounding a cable

2. Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below.

230 or less 40 40

Controller sideGOT side

400 or less Unit: mm (inch)(9.06) (1.57) (15.75)(1.57)

230 or less 40 40

120 or less

Controller side Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330)

GOT side

400 or less Unit: mm (inch)

(4.72)

(9.06) (1.57) (15.75)(1.57)

5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements 163

16

CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station) 1. Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose braided shield for grounding. The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp. Page 168 Grounding a cable

2. Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below. CC-Link dedicated cable for connecting the GOT and PLC

CC-Link dedicated cable for connecting the GOT and GOT

External I/O device connection 1. Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose braided shield for grounding. The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp. Page 168 Grounding a cable

2. Connect the braided shield to the connector with the connector cover.

3. Twist the power cables.

130

GOT side PLC side Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

230 or less 400 or less40 40 Unit: mm (inch)

130 (5.12)

(9.06) (1.57) (15.75)

(5.12)

(1.57)

130

GOT side GOT side Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

230 or less 230 or less40 40 Unit: mm (inch)

130 (5.12)

(9.06) (1.57)

(5.12)

(9.06)(1.57)

Connector cover

Braided shield GOT side

External I/O device side

360 or less 360 or less40 40

Unit: mm (inch)

Power cable

(14.17) (1.57) (14.17)(1.57)

4 5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5

Video/RGB/HDMI connection Video input cable Strip off the sheath at both ends of the cable as shown in the figure below to expose outer braided shield for grounding. The braided shield sections are used for grounding with a cable clamp. Page 168 Grounding a cable

RGB input cable 1. Wrap the cable shielding material around the cable, and pull out the braided cables for grounding from the cable

shielding material with the length as shown in the figure below.

2. Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below.

RGB output cable 1. Wrap the cable shielding material around the cable, and pull out the braided cables for grounding from the cable

shielding material with the length as shown in the figure below.

2. Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below.

(9.06) (1.57) (15.75)(1.57)

Video camera/ vision sensor sideGOT side

Unit: mm (inch)

230 or less 40 40 400 or less

GOT side Vision sensor/ personal computer side

40 or less130 or less

Unit: mm (inch)

Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330)

Grounding braided wire (50 (1.97))

Cable shielding material

170 or less

(5.12) (1.57) (6.69)

GOT side Vision sensor/ personal computer side

40 or

less130 or less Unit: mm (inch)

Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330)

Grounding braided wire (50 (1.97))

Cable shielding material

110 or less (5.12) (1.57) (4.33)

GT2715

GT2712,GT2710,GT2708

GOT side External display side

200 or less 200 or less20 or less 20 or less

Unit: mm (inch)

Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330)

Grounding braided wire (50 (1.97))

Cable shielding material

(7.87) (0.79) (0.79) (7.87)

5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements 165

16

HDMI output cable Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below.

Sound output device connection (GT25-W only) Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below.

90 or less

Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330)

90 or less Unit: mm (inch)

(3.54)(3.54)

60 or less 100 or less

Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330)GOT side

Unit: mm (inch)

(3.94)(2.36)

Sound output device side

6 5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5

Non-Mitsubishi Electric PLC, microcomputer, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC, MODBUS/RTU, and MODBUS/TCP connections Create the cables (RS-232 cable, RS-422/485 cable) for connecting the GOT and a controller by yourself. For how to create a cable, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 that covers the controller used

Treatment of the RS-232 cable and RS-422/485 cable When the GOT is connected to a controller, configure the system according to the EMC Directive specifications for the controller. The following shows the recommended instructions to comply with the EMC Directive. However, the manufacturer of the equipment must determine the method to comply with the EMC Directive and conformance to the directive. RS-422/485 cable When connecting each signal wire (except SG and FG wires), twist two signal wires as shown below.

Connect two or more SG wires. RS-232 cable Twist each signal wire (except SG and FG wires) with the SG wire.

Install a ferrite core to the cable in the positions as shown in the figure below.

SDA RDA

RDBSDB

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RD

RDSD

SD

DTR

DTR

DSR

DSR

SG SG

100 or less

Ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330)

100 or less

GOT side PLC CPU side

Unit: mm (inch) (3.94) (3.94)

5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements 167

16

Grounding a cable

Grounding method Ground the cable and ground cable to the control panel where the GOT and the PLC are installed. Ground the braided shield section of the cable to the control panel with the cable clamp (AD75CK).

To ground a bus connection cable, ground the braided cable for grounding to the control panel by tightening a screw.

Precautions Do not arrange the cable clamp close to the other cables that are not clamped. The noise from the control panel may enter the cable clamp and adversely affect the GOT.

Braided shield

Cable clamps For the attachment details of cable clamps, refer to AD75CK-type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual .

Ground the ground cable to the FG terminal at the GOT power supply section when using GT15-CEXSS-1 or GT15-CBS.

GOT FG terminal FG wire Bus connection cable

8 5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive Requirements

5

5.3 Low Voltage Directive Requirements The Low Voltage Directive requires that the equipment operating with power supply ranging from 50 V AC to 1000 V AC or 75 V DC to 1500 V DC has enough safety. This section explains the precautions for the installation and wiring of the GOT to comply with the Low Voltage Directive. The data described herein are produced with our best, based on the regulation requirements and standards obtained by Mitsubishi Electric. However, the data do not guarantee that the equipment produced according to the data comply with the above directive. The manufacturer of the equipment must determine the method to comply with the Low Voltage Directive and conformance to the directive.

Power supply The insulation specification of the GOT is designed assuming installation category II. Make sure to supply power to the GOT in installation category II.

The installation category indicates the withstand surge voltage generated by lightning strike. Installation category I indicates the lowest withstand level, and installation category IV indicates the highest withstand level. Installation category II indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more levels of isolation transformers from the public power distribution.

Control panel The GOT is an open type device (designed to be integrated in equipment). Make sure to install the GOT in a control panel.

Electric shock protection To prevent a person who does not have enough knowledge of electric facilities, such as an operator, from electric shock, take the following measures on the control panel.

Locking the control panel Lock the control panel, and allow only a person who is well educated and has enough knowledge of electric facilities to unlock the control panel.

Automatic power shutdown Build the structure so that the power supply is shut down when the control panel is opened.

Category IV Category III Category II Category I

5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.3 Low Voltage Directive Requirements 169

17

Dustproof and waterproof features The control panel also prevents dust and water. Insufficient dustproof and waterproof protection may lower the insulation withstand voltage, resulting in an insulation breakdown. Since the insulation of the GOT is designed assuming pollution degree 2, use the GOT in an environment of pollution degree 2 or less.

Grounding The ground terminals must be grounded in use. Ground the GOT to ensure the safety and to comply with the EMC Directive. The GOT has the following ground terminals. Functional grounding : The functional ground terminal improves noise resistance.

External wiring

External controllers If an external device connected to the GOT has a hazardous voltage circuit, the interface circuit to the GOT must have a reinforced insulation.

Reinforced insulation The reinforced insulation indicates the insulation with the following withstand voltage. Reinforced insulation withstand voltage (Source: Installation Category II of IEC664)

Pollution degree Description 1 Environment where the air is dry and nonconductive dust occurs

2 Environment where normally nonconductive dust occurs However, temporary conductivity occasionally occurs due to the accumulated dust. For example, the inside of the control panel in a control room or in the floor at a typical factory

3 Environment where conductive dust occurs and conductivity may occur due to the accumulated dust For example, a typical factory floor

4 Environment where continuous conductivity may occur due to rain, snow, and others For example, outdoor

Rated voltage of hazardous voltage area Withstand surge voltage (1.2/50 s) 150 V AC or less 2500V

300 V AC or less 4000V

0 5 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5.3 Low Voltage Directive Requirements

6

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL Page 171 Installation Precautions Page 172 Panel Cut Dimensions Page 179 Stud Page 182 Installation Position Page 198 Control Panel Inside Temperature and GOT Installation Angle Page 204 Installing the GOT Page 215 Removing the GOT Page 220 Handling the Handy GOT Page 227 Installing and Removing the Extension Unit Page 230 Installing the Battery Page 241 Removing the Battery Page 250 Installing the SD Card Page 257 Removing the SD Card Page 264 Installing and Removing the USB Devices Page 266 Installing and Removing the USB cable Page 268 Installing and Removing the Panel-Mounted USB Port Extension

6.1 Installation Precautions Install the GOT with consideration of the control panel inside dimensions and the installation prohibited area. Depending on the types of connection cables connected to the GOT, the distance more than the described dimensions may be required. Install the GOT with consideration of the connector dimensions and the cable bend radius.

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.1 Installation Precautions 171

17

6.2 Panel Cut Dimensions GT27

GT2715-X Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions as shown below.

Unit: mm (inch)

The C dimension shows the measurements for installing fittings on the control panel.

Model A B C Panel thickness GT2715-X 383.5 (15.10)

(+2 (0.08), 0 (0)) 282.5 (11.12) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

10 (0.39) or More 1.6 (0.06) to 4 (0.16)

A

B

CC

C C

A

B

C C

CC

Horizontal Vertical

2 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.2 Panel Cut Dimensions

6

GT2712-S, GT2710-S, GT2710-V, GT2708-S, GT2708-V, GT2705-V Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions as shown below.

Unit: mm (inch)

The C dimension shows the measurements for installing fittings on the control panel.

Model A B C Panel thickness GT2712-S 302 (11.89)

(+2 (0.08), 0 (0)) 228 (8.98) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

10 (0.39) or More 1.6 (0.06) to 4 (0.16)

GT2710-S, GT2710-V 289 (11.38) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

200 (7.87) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

GT2708-S, GT2508-V 227 (8.94) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

176 (6.93) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

GT2705-V 153 (6.02) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

121 (4.76) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

A

B C

C

A

BC C

Horizontal Vertical

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.2 Panel Cut Dimensions 173

17

GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions as shown below.

Unit: mm (inch)

Model A B Panel thickness GT2512-WX 290.5 (11.44)

(+1 (0.04), 0 (0)) 210.5 (8.29) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

1.6 (0.06) to 4 (0.16)

GT2510-WX 243.5 (9.59) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

185.5 (7.30) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

GT2507-W 180.5 (7.11) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

133.5 (5.26) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

A

B A

B

Horizontal Vertical

4 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.2 Panel Cut Dimensions

6

GT2507T-W Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions as shown below.

Unit: mm (inch)

Model A B Panel thickness GT2507T-W 197 (7.76)

(+1 (0.04), 0 (0)) 141 (5.55) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

1.6 (0.06) to 4 (0.16)

A

B A

B

Horizontal Vertical

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.2 Panel Cut Dimensions 175

17

GT25-S, GT25-V

GT2512-S, GT2510-V, GT2508-V, GT2505-V Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions as shown below.

Unit: mm (inch)

The C dimension shows the measurements for installing fittings on the control panel.

Model A B C Panel thickness GT2512-S 302 (11.89)

(+2 (0.08), 0 (0)) 228 (8.98) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

10 (0.39) or More 1.6 (0.06) to 4 (0.16)

GT2510-V 289 (11.38) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

200 (7.87) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

GT2508-V 227 (8.94) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

176 (6.93) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

GT2505-V 153 (6.02) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

121 (4.76) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

A

B C

C

A

BC C

Horizontal Vertical

6 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.2 Panel Cut Dimensions

6

GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, GT2508F-V Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions as shown below.

Unit: mm (inch)

The C to F dimensions show the measurements for installing fittings on the control panel. Additionally, install studs on the control panel. For information on how to install studs, refer to the following. Page 179 Stud

Model Fitting installation position (on the GOT)

A B C D E F Panel thickness

GT2512F-S Long side of the GOT

269 (10.59) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

214 (8.43) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

28 (1.10) 17 (0.67) 36 (1.42) 26 (1.02) 1.5 (0.06) to 4 (0.16)

Short side of the GOT

10 (0.39) 35 (1.38) 18 (0.71) 44 (1.73)

GT2510F-V Long side of the GOT

234 (9.21) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

187 (7.36) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

28 (1.10) 33 (1.30) 32 (1.26) 33 (1.30)

Short side of the GOT

10 (0.39) 51 (2.01) 14 (0.55) 51 (2.01)

GT2508F-V Long side of the GOT

194 (7.64) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

158 (6.22) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

28 (1.10) 14 (0.55) 32 (1.26) 29 (1.14)

Short side of the GOT

10 (0.39) 32 (1.26) 14 (0.55) 47 (1.85)

A

C E

B

A

B

D F

F D

C

Horizontal

Back of the control panel Back of the control panel

Vertical

E

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.2 Panel Cut Dimensions 177

17

GT23 Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions as shown below.

Unit: mm (inch)

The C dimension shows the measurements for installing fittings on the control panel.

GT21 Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions as shown below.

Unit: mm (inch)

The C dimension shows the measurements for installing fittings on the control panel.

Model A B C Panel thickness GT2310 289 (11.38)

(+2 (0.08), 0 (0)) 200 (7.87) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

10 (0.39) or More 1.6 (0.06) to 4 (0.16)

GT2308 227 (8.94) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

176 (6.93) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

Model A B C Panel thickness GT2107-W 180.5 (7.11)

(+1 (0.04), 0 (0)) 133.5 (5.26) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

13 (0.51) or more 1.6 (0.06) to 4 (0.16)

GT2105 153 (6.02) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

121 (4.76) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

10 (0.39) or More 1.6 (0.06) to 4 (0.16)

GT2104-R 118 (4.65) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

92 (3.62) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

13 (0.51) or more 1 (0.04) to 4 (0.16)

GT2104-P 137 (5.39) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

66 (2.60) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

13 (0.51) or more 1 (0.04) to 4 (0.16)

GT2103-P 105 (4.13) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

66 (2.60) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

13 (0.51) or more 1 (0.04) to 4 (0.16)

A

B C

C

A

BC C

Horizontal Vertical

A

B C

C

A BC C

Horizontal Vertical

8 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.2 Panel Cut Dimensions

6

6.3 Stud Stud specifications Use the studs that satisfy the following specifications.

The studs on the control panel must have strength adequate to withstand a tightening torque of 0.9 Nm or more. Make sure that no foreign matter such as welding waste is at and around the bases of the studs. Tighten nuts on the studs in the specified torque range (0.8 Nm to 0.9 Nm) with a wrench for M4 nuts.

Distance between studs

GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, GT2508F-V To mount the GOT on the control panel, studs are necessary. Align the studs with the installation holes of the fittings, and install the studs. The fittings must be installed on the top and bottom, or the right and left of the GOT. For GT2512F, you are recommended to install the fittings on the long sides of the GOT.

Measurements based on the screen center

Unit: mm (inch)

Diameter Length M4 10 mm (0.39 inch) or more

Model X X1 X2 Y Y1 Y2 GT2512F-S 214 (8.43)

(+2 (0.08), 0 (0)) 103 (4.06) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

(111 (4.37)) 269 (10.59) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

134.5 (5.30) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

(134.5 (5.30))

GT2510F-V 187 (7.36) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

89.5 (3.52) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

(97.5 (3.84)) 234 (9.21) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

117 (4.61) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

(117 (4.61))

GT2508F-V 158 (6.22) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

75.25 (2.96) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

(82.75 (3.26)) 194 (7.64) (+2 (0.08), 0 (0))

97.5 (3.84) (+1 (0.04), 0 (0))

(96.5 (3.80))

Y1 Y2 Y

X 1

X 2

X

Y 1

Y 2

Y

X1 X2 X

panel opening Back of the control panel

Screen center Screen center

Back of the control panel

Horizontal Vertical

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.3 Stud 179

18

Measurements for the horizontally-oriented GOT with fittings on its top and bottom

Unit: mm (inch)

Measurements for the horizontally-oriented GOT with fittings on its right and left

Unit: mm (inch)

Model A1 A2 A3 C1 C2 C3 D1 D2 GT2512F-S 98 (3.86)

0.15 (0.01) 113 (4.45) 0.15 (0.01)

7.5 (0.30) 0.15 (0.01)

98 (3.86) 0.15 (0.01)

113 (4.45) 0.15 (0.01)

7.5 (0.30) 0.15 (0.01)

128.5 (5.06) 0.15 (0.01)

132.5 (5.22) 0.15 (0.01)

GT2510F-V 105.5 (4.15) 0.15 (0.01)

105.5 (4.15) 0.15 (0.01)

0 (0) 105.5 (4.15) 0.15 (0.01)

105.5 (4.15) 0.15 (0.01)

0 (0) 114.5 (4.51) 0.15 (0.01)

118.5 (4.67) 0.15 (0.01)

GT2508F-V 64.5 (2.54) 0.15 (0.01)

74.5 (2.93) 0.15 (0.01)

- 64.5 (2.54) 0.15 (0.01)

74.5 (2.93) 0.15 (0.01)

- 104.5 (4.11) 0.15 (0.01)

104.5 (4.11) 0.15 (0.01)

Model B1 B2 C4 C5 D3 D4 GT2512F-S 75.5 (2.97)

0.15 (0.01) 79.5 (3.13) 0.15 (0.01)

160 (6.30) 0.15 (0.01)

175 (6.89) 0.15 (0.01)

75.5 (2.97) 0.15 (0.01)

79.5 (3.13) 0.15 (0.01)

GT2510F-V 58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

161 (6.34) 0.15 (0.01)

161 (6.34) 0.15 (0.01)

58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

GT2508F-V 58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

126 (4.96) 0.15 (0.01)

134 (5.28) 0.15 (0.01)

58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

A3

C3

A1 A2

C1 C2

D 1

D 2

panel opening

Back of the control panel Stud

Screen center

C4 C5

D 3

D 4

B 1

B 2

panel opening

Back of the control panel

Stud

Screen center

0 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.3 Stud

6

Measurements for the vertically-oriented GOT with fittings on its top and bottom

Unit: mm (inch)

Measurements for the vertically-oriented GOT with fittings on its right and left

Unit: mm (inch)

Model B1 B2 C4 C5 D3 D4 GT2512F-S 75.5 (2.97)

0.15 (0.01) 79.5 (3.13) 0.15 (0.01)

160 (6.30) 0.15 (0.01)

175 (6.89) 0.15 (0.01)

75.5 (2.97) 0.15 (0.01)

79.5 (3.13) 0.15 (0.01)

GT2510F-V 58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

161 (6.34) 0.15 (0.01)

161 (6.34) 0.15 (0.01)

58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

GT2508F-V 58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

126 (4.96) 0.15 (0.01)

134 (5.28) 0.15 (0.01)

58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

58 (2.28) 0.15 (0.01)

Model A1 A2 A3 C1 C2 C3 D1 D2 GT2512F-S 98 (3.86)

0.15 (0.01) 113 (4.45) 0.15 (0.01)

7.5 (0.30) 0.15 (0.01)

98 (3.86) 0.15 (0.01)

113 (4.45) 0.15 (0.01)

7.5 (0.30) 0.15 (0.01)

128.5 (5.06) 0.15 (0.01)

132.5 (5.22) 0.15 (0.01)

GT2510F-V 105.5 (4.15) 0.15 (0.01)

105.5 (4.15) 0.15 (0.01)

0 (0) 105.5 (4.15) 0.15 (0.01)

105.5 (4.15) 0.15 (0.01)

0 (0) 114.5 (4.51) 0.15 (0.01)

118.5 (4.67) 0.15 (0.01)

GT2508F-V 64.5 (2.54) 0.15 (0.01)

74.5 (2.93) 0.15 (0.01)

- 64.5 (2.54) 0.15 (0.01)

74.5 (2.93) 0.15 (0.01)

- 104.5 (4.11) 0.15 (0.01)

104.5 (4.11) 0.15 (0.01)

D3 D4

B1 B2

C 5

C 4

panel opening

Back of the control panel Stud

Screen center

C 3

A 3

A 1

A 2

D1 D2

C 2

C 1

panel opening

Back of the control panel

Screen center

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.3 Stud 181

18

6.4 Installation Position To install the GOT, some distance is required between the GOT and the other devices.

GT27 Depending on the units and cables used for the GOT, the distance more than the described dimensions may be required. Install the GOT with consideration of the connector dimensions and the cable bend radius. For the cable pull-out distance from the bottom of the GOT, refer to the following. Page 415 Cable Bend Radius for GT27 with an Extension Unit For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the vertical installation arrow printed on the GOT rear face points upward. Page 119 GT27

B

D E

A

C

Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mm (0.06 to 0.16inch)

Horizontal

B

D

E A

C

Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mmVertical (0.06 to 0.16inch)

2 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position

6

The following tables list the distance required between the GOT and the other devices. The dimensions within the parentheses apply when no equipment generating radiated noise (such as a contactor) or heat is installed near the GOT. However, always keep the ambient temperature of the GOT to 55 C or lower. Unit: mm (inch)

*1 This value is for use of the coaxial cable 3C-2V (JIS C 3501). For specifications of the cable, refer to the GOT2000 Series Connection Manual for a controller used.

*2 This value differs depending on the cable used. *3 This value differs depending on the cable used.

If the bending radius of the cable used is greater than the value specified above, apply the value of the cable used. *4 When opening or closing the battery cover: 72 (2.83) or more

Item GT27

GT2715-X GT2712-S GT2710-S GT2710-V

GT2708-S GT2708-V

GT2705-V

A GOT only 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

48 (1.89) or more [29 (1.14) or more]

59 (2.33) or more

Ethernet communication unit fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

Bus connection unit is fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

23 (0.91) or more [29 (1.14) or more]

48 (1.89) or more

Serial connection unit is fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

47 (1.85) or more

CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) fitted

48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

50 (1.97) or more [22 (0.87) or more]

MELSECNET/H communication unit (coaxial) fitted *1

48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

48 (1.89) or more [38 (1.50) or more]

48 (1.89) or more [45 (1.77) or more]

67 (2.64) or more 81 (3.19) or more

MELSECNET/H communication unit(optical) fitted *2

48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

77 (3.04) or more

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

48 (1.89) or more

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit fitted

48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

55 (2.17) or more

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit fitted

48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

55 (2.17) or more

Video input unit fitted *1 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

48 (1.89) or more [38 (1.50) or more]

48 (1.89) or more [45 (1.77) or more]

67 (2.64) or more -

RGB input unit fitted *3 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

-

Video/RGB input unit fitted *1*3 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

48 (1.89) or more [38 (1.50) or more]

48 (1.89) or more [45 (1.77) or more]

67 (2.64) or more -

RGB output unit fitted *3 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

-

Multimedia unit fitted *1 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

48 (1.89) or more [38 (1.50) or more]

48 (1.89) or more [45 (1.77) or more]

67 (2.64) or more -

Printer unit fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

External I/O unit fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

Sound output unit fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

B Horizontal: 78 (3.07) or more [18 (0.71) or more] Vertical: 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

C When the SD card is used 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

50 (1.97) or more 100 (3.94) or more

When the SD card is not used 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

D Horizontal: 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more] Vertical: 80 (3.15) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

E *4 100 (3.94) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position 183

18

GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W Depending on the units and cables used for the GOT, the distance more than the described dimensions may be required. Install the GOT with consideration of the connector dimensions and the cable bend radius. For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the vertical installation arrow printed on the GOT rear face points upward. Page 123 GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W

B

D E

A

C

Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mm (0.06 to 0.16inch)

Horizontal

B

D

E A

C

Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mmVertical (0.06 to 0.16inch)

4 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position

6

The following tables list the distance required between the GOT and the other devices. The dimensions within the parentheses apply when no equipment generating radiated noise (such as a contactor) or heat is installed near the GOT. However, always keep the ambient temperature of the GOT to 55 C or lower. Unit: mm (inch)

*1 When opening or closing the battery cover: 72 (2.83) or more.

Item GT25

GT2512-WX GT2510-WX GT2507-W A 51 (2.01) or more

[23 (0.91) or more] 64 (2.52) or more

B Horizontal: 81 (3.19) or more [23 (0.91) or more] Vertical: 53 (2.09) or more [23 (0.91 or more]

C 53 (2.09) or more [23 (0.91) or more]

53 (2.09) or more [32 (1.26) or more]

D Horizontal: 53 (2.09) or more [23 (0.91) or more] Vertical: 81 (3.19) or more [23 (0.91) or more]

E *1 100 (3.94) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position 185

18

GT2507T-W Depending on the units and cables used for the GOT, the distance more than the described dimensions may be required. Install the GOT with consideration of the connector dimensions and the cable bend radius. For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the vertical installation arrow printed on the GOT rear face points upward. Page 127 GT2507T-W

B

D E

A

C

Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mm (0.06 to 0.16inch)

Horizontal

B

D

E A

C

Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mmVertical (0.06 to 0.16inch)

6 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position

6

The following tables list the distance required between the GOT and the other devices. The dimensions within the parentheses apply when no equipment generating radiated noise (such as a contactor) or heat is installed near the GOT. However, always keep the ambient temperature of the GOT to 65 C or lower. Unit: mm (inch)

*1 When opening or closing the battery cover: 72 (2.83) or more.

Item GT25

GT2507T-W A 64 (2.52) or more

B Horizontal: 81 (3.19) or more [23 (0.91) or more] Vertical: 53 (2.09) or more [23 (0.91 or more]

C 53 (2.09) or more [32 (1.26) or more]

D Horizontal: 53 (2.09) or more [23 (0.91) or more] Vertical: 81 (3.19) or more [23 (0.91) or more]

E *1 100 (3.94) or more [20 (0.79) or more

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position 187

18

GT25-S, GT25-V

GT2512-S, GT2510-V, GT2508-V, GT2505-V Depending on the units and cables used for the GOT, the distance more than the described dimensions may be required. Install the GOT with consideration of the connector dimensions and the cable bend radius. For the cable pull-out distance from the bottom of the GOT, refer to the following. Page 420 Cable Bend Radius for GT25 with an Extension Unit For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the vertical installation arrow printed on the GOT rear face points upward. Page 129 GT25-S, GT25-V

For GT2512-S, GT2510-V, GT2508-V

B

D E

A

C

Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mm (0.06 to 0.16inch)

Horizontal

B

D

E A

C

Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mmVertical (0.06 to 0.16inch)

8 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position

6

The following tables list the distance required between the GOT and the other devices. The dimensions within the parentheses apply when no equipment generating radiated noise (such as a contactor) or heat is installed near the GOT. However, always keep the ambient temperature of the GOT to 55 C or lower. Unit: mm (inch)

*1 This value is for use of the coaxial cable 3C-2V (JIS C 3501). For specifications of the cable, refer to the GOT2000 Series Connection Manual for a controller used.

*2 This value differs depending on the cable used. *3 When opening or closing the battery cover: 72 (2.83) or more.

Item GT25

GT2512-S GT2510-V GT2508-V A GOT only 48 (1.89) or more

[18 (0.71) or more] 48 (1.89) or more [29 (1.14) or more]

Ethernet communication unit fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

Bus connection unit is fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

23 (0.91) or more [29 (1.14) or more]

Serial connection unit is fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

MELSECNET/H communication unit (coaxial) fitted *1 48 (1.89) or more [38 (1.50) or more]

48 (1.89) or more [45 (1.77) or more]

67 (2.64) or more

MELSECNET/H communication unit(optical) fitted *2 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

Printer unit fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

External I/O unit fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

Sound output unit fitted 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

B Horizontal: 78 (3.07) or more [18 (0.71) or more] Vertical: 48 (1.89) or more [18 (0.71) or more]

C When the SD card is used 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

50 (1.97) or more

When the SD card is not used 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

D Horizontal: 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more] Vertical: 80 (3.15) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

E *3 100 (3.94) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position 189

19

For GT2505-V

B

D E

A

C

Horizontal Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mm (0.06 to 0.16inch)

B

D

E A

C

Vertical Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mm (0.06 to 0.16inch)

0 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position

6

The following tables list the distance required between the GOT and the other devices. The dimensions within the parentheses apply when no equipment generating radiated noise (such as a contactor) or heat is installed near the GOT. However, always keep the ambient temperature of the GOT to 55 C or lower. Unit: mm (inch)

*1 When opening or closing the battery cover: 72 (2.83) or more.

Item GT25

GT2505-V A 50 (1.97) or more

[20 (0.79) or more]

B Horizontal: 80 (3.15) or more [20 (0.79) or more] Vertical: 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

C Horizontal: 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more] Vertical: 80 (3.15) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

D 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

E *1 When the SD card is used 100 (3.94) or more [100 (3.94) or more]

When the SD card is not used 100 (3.94) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position 191

19

GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, GT2508F-V Depending on the units and cables used for the GOT, the distance more than the described dimensions may be required. Install the GOT with consideration of the connector dimensions and the cable bend radius. For the cable pull-out distance from the bottom of the GOT, refer to the following. Page 420 Cable Bend Radius for GT25 with an Extension Unit For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the vertical installation arrow printed on the GOT rear face points upward. Page 129 GT25-S, GT25-V

E

B

C

A

D

Panel thickness: 1.5 mm to 4 mm (0.06 to 0.16inch)

Back of the Horizontal

E

D

C

BA

Panel thickness: 1.5 mm to 4 mm (0.06 to 0.16inch)

Back of the Vertical

2 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position

6

The following tables list the distance required between the GOT and the other devices. The dimensions within the parentheses apply when no equipment generating radiated noise (such as a contactor) or heat is installed near the GOT. However, always keep the ambient temperature of the GOT to 55 C or lower. Unit: mm (inch)

*1 This value is for use of the coaxial cable 3C-2V (JIS C 3501). For specifications of the cable, refer to the GOT2000 Series Connection Manual for a controller used.

*2 This value differs depending on the cable used. *3 When opening or closing the battery cover: 72 (2.83) or more.

Item GT25

GT2512F-S GT2510F-V GT2508F-V A GOT only 58 (2.28) or more

[28 (1.10) or more] 58 (2.28) or more [39 (1.54) or more]

Ethernet communication unit fitted 58 (2.28) or more [28 (1.10) or more]

Bus connection unit is fitted 58 (2.28) or more [28 (1.10) or more]

33 (1.30) or more [39 (1.54) or more]

Serial connection unit is fitted 58 (2.28) or more [28 (1.10) or more]

CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) fitted

58 (2.28) or more [28 (1.10) or more]

MELSECNET/H communication unit (coaxial) fitted *1

58 (2.28) or more [48 (1.89) or more]

58 (2.28) or more [55 (2.17) or more]

77 (3.03) or more

MELSECNET/H communication unit (optical) fitted *2

58 (2.28) or more [28 (1.10) or more]

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit fitted 58 (2.28) or more [28 (1.10) or more]

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit fitted

58 (2.28) or more [28 (1.10) or more]

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit fitted

58 (2.28) or more [28 (1.10) or more]

Printer unit fitted 58 (2.28) or more [28 (1.10) or more]

External I/O unit fitted 58 (2.28) or more [28 (1.10) or more]

Sound output unit fitted 58 (2.28) or more [28 (1.10) or more]

B Horizontal: 88 (3.46) or more [28 (1.10) or more] Vertical: 58 (2.28) or more [28 (1.10) or more]

C When the SD card is used 58 (2.28) or more [28 (1.10) or more]

58 (2.28) or more

When the SD card is not used 58 (2.28) or more [28 (1.10) or more]

D Horizontal: 58 (2.28) or more [28 (1.10) or more] Vertical: 88 (3.46) or more [28 (1.10) or more]

E *3 100 (3.94) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position 193

19

GT23 Depending on the units and cables used for the GOT, the distance more than the described dimensions may be required. Install the GOT with consideration of the connector dimensions and the cable bend radius. For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the vertical installation arrow printed on the GOT rear face points upward. Page 141 GT23

Unit: mm (inch)

*1 When opening or closing the battery cover: 72 (2.83) or more

Item GT23

GT2310-V GT2308-V A 48 (1.89) or more

[18 (0.71) or more]

B Horizontal: 78 (3.07) or more [18 (0.71) or more] Vertical: 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

C When the SD card is used Horizontal: 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more] Vertical: 80 (3.15) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

Horizontal: 50 (1.97) or more Vertical: 80 (3.15) or more [50 (1.97) or more]

When the SD card is not used Horizontal: 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more] Vertical: 80 (3.15) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

D 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

E *1 100 (3.94) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

B

D E

A

C

Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mm(0.06 to 0.16inch)Horizontal

B

D

EA

C

Panel thickness: 1.6 mm to 4 mm(0.06 to 0.16inch)Vertical

4 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position

6

MEMO

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position 195

19

GT21 Depending on the units and cables used for the GOT, the distance more than the described dimensions may be required. Install the GOT with consideration of the connector dimensions and the cable bend radius. For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the power supply terminal, which is located on the GOT rear face, is at the lower side. When installing GT2107-W vertically, make sure that the power supply terminal on the GOT rear face is at the upper side. Page 143 GT21 Horizontal

Vertical (except GT2107-W)

B

D E

A

C

Panel thickness: 1 mm to 4 mm (0.06 to 0.16 inch)

C

B E

D

A

Panel thickness: 1 mm to 4 mm (0.04 to 0.16 inch)

6 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position

6

Vertical (For GT2107-W)

The following table lists the distance required between the GOT and the other devices. The dimensions within the parentheses apply when no equipment generating radiated noise (such as a contactor) or heat is installed near the GOT. Unit: mm (inch) For GT2107-W, GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P

*1 For GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBDS, GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBDS, and GT2103-PMBDS2, a distance of 80 mm (3.15 inches) or more is required to connect an RS-232 cable or personal computer connection cable to the GOT rear face. When a user-created RS-232 cable is connected to the connector terminal block at the rear face of GT2104-RTBD, a distance of 20 mm (0.79 inch) or more is required.

*2 For GT2107-W, a distance of 60 mm (2.36 inches) or more is required to connect an RS-485 cable or RS-232 cable. For GT2105-Q

Item GT21

GT2107-W GT2104-R GT2104-P GT2103-P

A *2 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

B 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

C When the SD card is used 50 (1.97) or more

When the SD card is not used 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

D 50 (1.97) or more

E *1 80 (3.15) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

Item GT21

GT2105-Q A 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

B Horizontal: 80 (3.15) or more [20 (0.79) or more] Vertical: 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

C Horizontal: 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more] Vertical: 80 (3.15) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

D 50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

E When the SD card is used 100 (3.94) or more

When the SD card is not used 100 (3.94) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

D

A E

C

B

Panel thickness: 1 mm to 4 mm (0.04 to 0.16 inch)

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.4 Installation Position 197

19

6.5 Control Panel Inside Temperature and GOT Installation Angle

Install the GOT with its display section positioned as shown below. Using the GOT with the installation angle other than the following accelerates the deterioration of the GOT.

GT27

Installing the GOT horizontally When the GOT is installed at any angle from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 55 C. When the GOT is installed at any angle outside the range from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 40 C.

Installing the GOT vertically When the GOT is installed at a 90-degree angle, the control panel inside temperature must be within 55C. When the GOT is installed at any angle other than 90, the control panel inside temperature must be within 40C.

GOT

Display section

Control panel or others

105

60

GOT

Display section

Control panel or others

90

8 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.5 Control Panel Inside Temperature and GOT Installation Angle

6

GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W

Installing the GOT horizontally When the GOT is installed at any angle from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 55 C. When the GOT is installed at any angle outside the range from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 40 C.

Installing the GOT vertically When the GOT is installed at a 90-degree angle, the control panel inside temperature must be within 55C. When the GOT is installed at any angle other than 90, the control panel inside temperature must be within 40C.

GOT

Display section

Control panel or others

105

60

GOT

Display section

Control panel or others

90

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.5 Control Panel Inside Temperature and GOT Installation Angle 199

20

GT2507T-W

Installing the GOT horizontally When the GOT is installed at any angle from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 65 C. When the GOT is installed at any angle outside the range from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 50 C.

Installing the GOT vertically When the GOT is installed at a 90-degree angle, the control panel inside temperature must be within 65C. When the GOT is installed at any angle other than 90, the control panel inside temperature must be within 50C.

GOT

Display section

Control panel or others

105

60

GOT

Display section

Control panel or others

90

0 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.5 Control Panel Inside Temperature and GOT Installation Angle

6

GT2512-S, GT2510-V, GT2508-V, GT2505-V

Installing the GOT horizontally When the GOT is installed at any angle from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 55 C. When the GOT is installed at any angle outside the range from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 40 C.

Installing the GOT vertically When the GOT is installed at a 90-degree angle, the control panel inside temperature must be within 55C *1. When the GOT is installed at any angle other than 90, the control panel inside temperature must be within 40C.

*1 For GT2505-V, the control panel inside temperature must be within 50C.

GOT

Display section

Control panel or others

105

60

GOT

Display section

Control panel or others

90

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.5 Control Panel Inside Temperature and GOT Installation Angle 201

20

GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, GT2508F-V

Installing the GOT horizontally When the GOT is installed at any angle from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 55 C. When the GOT is installed at any angle outside the range from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 40 C.

Installing the GOT vertically When the GOT is installed at a 90-degree angle, the control panel inside temperature must be within 55C. When the GOT is installed at any angle other than 90, the control panel inside temperature must be within 40C.

GOTDisplay section

Control panel or others

105

60

GOT Display section

Control panel or others

90

2 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.5 Control Panel Inside Temperature and GOT Installation Angle

6

GT23 Regardless of the installation orientation, install the GT23 so that the following conditions are satisfied. When the GOT is installed at any angle from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 55 C.When the GOT is installed at any angle outside the range from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 40 C.

GT21

Installing the GOT horizontally When the GOT is installed at any angle from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 55 C. When the GOT is installed at any angle outside the range from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 40 C.

Installing the GOT vertically When the GOT is installed at any angle from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 50 C. When the GOT is installed at any angle outside the range from 60 to 105 , the control panel inside temperature must be within 40 C.

GOT

Display section

Control panel or others

105

60

GOT

Display section

Control panel or others

105

60

GOT

Display section

Control panel or others

105

60

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.5 Control Panel Inside Temperature and GOT Installation Angle 203

20

6.6 Installing the GOT Install the GOT in the following procedure. For the panel cut dimensions for the GOT, refer to the following. Page 172 Panel Cut Dimensions

GT27, GT25, GT23 The following shows an installation example for the horizontal direction. For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the vertical installation arrow printed on the GOT rear face points upward. Page 119 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS

GT27, GT2512-WX, GT2512-S, GT2510-WX, GT2510-V, GT2508-V, GT2507-W, GT2507T- W, GT23 1. Insert the GOT rear face into the panel opening.

2. While positioning a fitting on the mounting hole of the GOT, tighten a screw within the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm).

Tightening the screw with a torque exceeding the specified torque range may deform the GOT front panel, causing the protective sheet to become crinkled. For GT2715-X (8 fittings)

Panel opening

GOT

4 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.6 Installing the GOT

6

For GT27 except GT2715-X, GT25, and GT23 (4 fittings)

3. Remove the protective film from the GOT.

GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, GT2508F-V To fasten the fittings on the control panel, studs are neccessary. For the details of panel cutting dimensions and studs, refer to the following. Page 172 Panel Cut Dimensions Page 179 Stud The following table shows the material and surface treatment of the control panel recommended for attaching the environmental protection sheet..

*1 When you coat the environmental protection sheet, use melamine resins or acrylic resins. *2 The environmental protection sheet must be coated with melamine resins or acrylic resins.

Check that no dirt or damage is on the control panel on which the environmental protection sheet is attached. Since the environmental protection sheet cannot be reattached, make sure to check the attachment method and attach the sheet carefully. After removing the protective film from the GOT, make sure that no dust or other substances adhere to the display section. Check that the GT25 open frame model is installed properly, and then remove the protective film from the GOT. Do not conduct this work in a dusty place, or foreign substances may adhere to the display section. The following shows the procedure for installing GT2512F-S as an example. In this example, the supplied fittings are installed on the top and bottom of the GOT, and the control panel thickness is 3 mm.

Item Description Material Stainless *1 or aluminum *1 or steel *2

Surface roughness Ra0.2 to 0.5 (m)

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.6 Installing the GOT 205

20

1. Install the supplied fittings on the top and bottom of the GOT with screws. Each fitting has two types of holes as shown below.Use the appropriate type of holes according to the control panel thickness. Hole A: for the control panel thickness 1.5 mm to 3.0 mm Hole B: for the control panel thickness 2.0 mm to 4.0 mm When installing the fittings on the GOT, you are recommended to put a cloth or others under the GOT to prevent the display section from being damaged.

2. Align the installation holes of the fittings with the studs, and insert the studs in the holes.

1.5

3.0

2.0

4.0

Hole A Hole B

Fittings (Top: 1, bottom: 1)

Screws (Top: 3, bottom: 3)

Cloth

panel opening

GOT Fittings

Stud

6 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.6 Installing the GOT

6

3. Tighten nuts on the studs in the specified torque range (0.8 Nm to 0.9 Nm) with a wrench for M4 nuts. Loosen the screws in the slotted holes of the fittings, and adjust the positons of the screws to make the GOT display section and the control panel surface be in the same plane.

To attach the environmental protection sheet (sold separately), proceed to step 4. To attach a user-prepared environmental protection sheet, follow the maunal of the sheet used.

4. Remove the inner part of the supplied stencil. Position the stencil on the panel opening, and attach the stencil using backside double-sided tape in four places.

Check that the arrow on the stencil points in the direction as shown below. For the horizontally-oriented GOT, the arrow on the stencil must point upward. For the vertically-oriented GOT, the arrow on the stencil must point leftward.

Stud Nut

Slotted hole

panel opening

Double-sided tape on the back of the stencil

panel

GOT

Stencil

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.6 Installing the GOT 207

20

5. Mark the four corners of the stencil on the control panel with a pencil or others. Remove the stencil.

6. Remove the protective film from the GOT, and make sure that no dust or other substances adhere to the display section.

7. Peel off a part of the release paper on the back of the environmental protection sheet. Do not touch the adhesive part of the sheet where the release paper is peeled off. Align the sheet with the four markings on the control panel, and attach the peeled off part of the sheet to the control panel.

Peeling off

panel

Marking

Stencil

panel

Marking

A part of the release paper

Environmental protection sheet

Release paper

8 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.6 Installing the GOT

6

8. Peel off the remainder of the release paper, and attach the whole environmental protection sheet to the control panel. Make sure to attach the sheet from the attached part in step 7, and fit the sheet onto the control panel without leaving any air between them.

9. Erase the markings.

10.Apply enough pressure to the adhesive part of the environmental protection sheet. (Roll a roller back and forth two times with a load of 2 kg.) To ensure adequate adhesive strength, you are recommended to use the GOT about 24 hours later after the environmental protection sheet is attached. Check that the environmental protection sheet has no wrinkle, dirt, or others, and then remove the protective film from the sheet.

Environmental protection sheet

Marking

Remainder of the release paper

Environmental protection sheet

protection sheet

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.6 Installing the GOT 209

21

GT2505-V For the vertical installation, check that the vertical installation arrow mark on the GOT rear face points upward.

1. Install a packing to the packing installation groove on the GOT rear face. Fit the thin side of the packing in the packing installation groove.

2. Insert the GOT rear face into the panel opening.

3. Fix the GOT. Insert the hook of an installation fitting (supplied) into the mounting hole of the GOT. Tighten the supplied screws within the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) to fix the GOT Fix the GOT using 4 fittings at the top and the bottom of the GOT.

Packing

Enlarged view

Packing Packing installation groove

Panel opening

Enlarged view

Installation fitting

Mounting screw

0 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.6 Installing the GOT

6

Precautions for installing the GOT Tightening torque of the mounting screws Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop. In addition, waterproof effect and oilproof effect may not be produced. Overtightening may damage the GOT or distort the panel, causing wrinkles on the surface of the display section. The wrinkles may lower visibility and lead to an incorrect input to the touch panel. The distorted GOT or panel may compromise the waterproof and oilproof performance. Mounting screw tightening procedure Tighten each of the four screws gradually and evenly. Concentration of excessive force on a fitting may damage the GOT or distort the panel. Tighten the mounting screws at right angles to the surface of the panel. (See Figure 1 below.) If mounting screws are not at right angles to the surface of the panel, excessive force will be applied and may damage the GOT. (See Figure 2 below.)

4. The GOT in the factory shipment state has a protective film on the display section. After installing the GOT, remove the film.

1. Good example 2. Bad example

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.6 Installing the GOT 211

21

GT21 The following shows an installation example for the horizontal direction. For the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the power supply terminal, which is located on the GOT rear face, is at the lower side. When installing GT2107-W vertically, make sure that the power supply terminal on the GOT rear face is at the upper side. Page 119 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS

GT21

Cautions for an installation panel Use a panel that has no warpage, damage, and unevenness on its surface. Failure to do so may not result in waterproof effect. Determine the panel thickness considering the panel strength. (For example, even though the panel has thickness within the range, the strength may be insufficient depending on the material and size. Insufficient panel strength may result in warpage depending on the installation position of the GOT and other devices.)

1. Install a packing to the packing installation groove on the GOT rear face. (except GT2107-W)

2. Insert the GOT rear face into the panel opening. (The following shows an example of the horizontal installation.)

Packing installation groove

Packing

Enlarge

Packing

Panel opening

2 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.6 Installing the GOT

6

3. For GT2107-W Insert the hook of an installation fitting (supplied) into the mounting hole of the GOT. Tighten the supplied screws within the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) to fix the GOT.

For GT2105 Insert the hook of an installation fitting (supplied) into the mounting hole of the GOT. Tighten the supplied screws within the specified torque range (0.3 Nm to 0.5 Nm) to fix the GOT.

For GT2104, GT2103 Insert the hook of an installation fitting (supplied) into the mounting hole of the GOT. Slide the installation fitting toward the GOT rear face. Then, viewing from the GOT rear face, slide the fitting to the left to fix, and tighten a screw within the specified torque range (0.20 Nm to 0.25 Nm). Fix the GOT using 4 fittings at the top and the bottom of the GOT.

Installation fitting

Mounting screw

Enlarged view

Mounting screw Installation fitting

1)

2)

3)

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.6 Installing the GOT 213

21

Precautions for installing the GOT Tightening torque of the mounting screws Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop. In addition, waterproof effect and oilproof effect may not be produced. Overtightening may damage the GOT or distort the panel, causing wrinkles on the surface of the display section. The wrinkles may lower visibility and lead to an incorrect input to the touch panel. The distorted GOT or panel may compromise the waterproof and oilproof performance. Mounting screw tightening procedure Tighten each of the four screws gradually and evenly. Concentration of excessive force on a fitting may damage the GOT or distort the panel. Tighten the mounting screws at right angles to the surface of the panel. (See Figure 1 below.) If mounting screws are not at right angles to the surface of the panel, excessive force will be applied and may damage the GOT. (See Figure 2 below.) If the GOT is powered on with an incorrect input on the bottom right of the touch panel due to distortion, the message [Please install the package data.] appears.

4. The GOT in the factory shipment state has a protective film on the display section. After installing the GOT, remove the film.

1. Good example 2. Bad example

4 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.6 Installing the GOT

6

6.7 Removing the GOT The following shows the procedure for removing the GOT.

GT27, GT25, GT23

GT27, GT2512-WX, GT2512-S, GT2510-WX, GT2510-V, GT2508-V, GT2507-W, GT2507T- W, GT2505-V, GT23 1. Remove the screws from the GOT. Remove the fittings from the GOT. For GT2715-X (8 fittings)

For GT27 except GT2715-X, GT25, and GT23 (4 fittings)

2. Remove the GOT from the panel opening.

Panel opening

GOT

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.7 Removing the GOT 215

21

GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, GT2508F-V The following shows the procedure for removing GT2512F-S as an example.

1. Remove the nuts.

2. Remove the GOT from the panel opening.

3. Remove the environmental protection sheet gradually. If the sheet is difficult to remove, warm the sheet with a dryer or others.

Nut

panel opening

GOT

Stud

Environmental protection sheet

6 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.7 Removing the GOT

6

4. Remove the screws from the GOT. Remove the fittings from the GOT. You are recommended to put a cloth or others under the GOT to prevent the display section from being damaged.

Fittings (Top: 1, bottom: 1)

Screws (Top: 3, bottom: 3)

Cloth

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.7 Removing the GOT 217

21

GT21 1. For GT2107-W Remove the installation fitting on the GOT.

For GT2105 Remove the installation fitting on the GOT.

For GT2104, GT2103 Remove the mounting screws from the GOT installation fittings. Remove the GOT installation fittings in the following order, 1) to 3).

Installation fitting

Mounting screw

Enlarged view

Mounting screw Installation fitting

2)

3) 1)

8 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.7 Removing the GOT

6

2. Remove the GOT from the panel opening.

Installation hole

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.7 Removing the GOT 219

22

6.8 Handling the Handy GOT Holding the Handy GOT in hand When operating the Handy GOT with holding it in hand, put a hand under the hand strap on the back. The hand strap length is adjustable. When you carry or operate the Handy GOT, hold its body. Carrying or operating the Handy GOT while holding its cable may damage the unit or cable.

Changing the grip angle (GT2506HS-V only) For GT2506HS-V, the grip angle is changeable.

1. Loosen the five grip angle changing screws on the back surface.

*1 Do not loosen or remove the screws (two screws).

Hand strap

*1 *1

0 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.8 Handling the Handy GOT

6

2. Turn the grip. Align the grip angle changing screws on the installation holes, and tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.69 Nm to 0.88 Nm). Too much tightening may cause damage.

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.8 Handling the Handy GOT 221

22

Hanging on a wall

Hanging the Handy GOT on a wall using the hook When operating the Handy GOT with hanging on a wall, use the hook for hanging on a wall on the back.

The GOT and the connection cable put a load of about 1.5 kg to 5 kg on the fitting. Take the above load into consideration to attach a fitting on the wall.

Hanging the Handy GOT on a wall using a wall-mounting attachment (GT2505HS-V only) GT2505HS-V can be fixed on a wall or table using a wall-mounting attachment. For the wall-mounting attachment, refer to the following. Page 305 Wall-mounting Attachment

Model Weight GT2506HS-VTBD 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)

GT2505HS-VTBD 0.79 kg (1.7 lb)

Hook for hanging on walls Hook for hanging on walls

GT2506HS-V GT2505HS-V

2 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.8 Handling the Handy GOT

6

Placing on a desk or a floor When placing the Handy GOT on a desk or floor, pay attention to the following. Example) GT2506HS-V

You are recommended to keep the GOT horizontal to the desk to prevent falling, and to fix the connection cable to the desk or others.

The cable should be fixed.

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.8 Handling the Handy GOT 223

22

Installing to/removing from panel

Installing the Connector Conversion Box Configuration The following shows the configuration for using the GOT that is connected to the connector conversion box on a control panel or operation panel.

: Usable, -: Not usable

Select the cable according to the communication method and controller. For the cable selection, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1

Panel cutting dimensions for Connector Conversion Box The Connector Conversion Box can be installed on the panel face directly or with mounting bracket offered as an accessory. For details on installing procedure and panel cutting dimensions, refer to the following. Page 271 Connector Conversion Box

1) PLC connection cable 2) Connector conversion box 3) External cable 4) Handy GOT

GT2506HS-V GT2505HS-V Cable selected or created according to the communication method and controller

GT16H-CNB-42S GT16H-C30-42P -

GT16H-C60-42P -

GT16H-C100-42P -

GT14H-C30-42P -

GT14H-C60-42P -

GT14H-C100-42P -

GT16H-CNB-37S GT16H-C30-37PE -

GT16H-C60-37PE -

GT16H-C100-37PE -

GT11H-C30-37P -

GT11H-C60-37P -

GT11H-C100-37P -

GT11H-CNB-37S GT11H-C30-37P -

GT11H-C60-37P -

GT11H-C100-37P -

3 1

2

Handy GOT Control panel or operation panel

PLC

4 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.8 Handling the Handy GOT

6

Installing a relay cable connector (GT2505HS-V only) Configuration The following shows the configuration for using the GOT connected to the connector that is attached on a control panel or operation panel.

*1 Use C or later version. Select the cable according to the communication method and controller For the cable selection, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 If a relay cable other than the above is required, create the cable by yourself. To use a cable with loose wires at one end for external connection (GT11H-C30, GT11H-C60, or GT11H-C100), refer to the following and select one according to the application. GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1

Name Description 1) External cable

(Relay cable connection side D-Sub 37pin) GT11H-C30-37P *1

GT11H-C60-37P *1

GT11H-C100-37P *1

2) Relay cable for connecting to a PLC GT11H-C15R4-8P *1

GT11H-C15R4-25P *1

GT11H-C15R2-6P *1

Handy GOT

PLC

For panel cutting dimensions, refer to the following page.

1)

2)

Control panel or operation panel

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.8 Handling the Handy GOT 225

22

Panel cutting dimensions when using a relay cable To install the relay cable connector to the panel, make holes in the panel with the following dimensions.

Insert a jack socket into a round hole and fix it with a M3 nut (supplied with the relay cable).

63.5 (2.5)

59.1 (2.33) or more

4- R3.4 (0.14)10

11 .4

o r m

or e

2-3.20.1

The part in gray indicates cut portions.

Unit: mm (inch)

(Panel thickness: 0.8 to 1.3 (0.031 to 0.051))

Jack socket Connecting to the external cable

Cable side M3 nut

Mounting panel face

M2.6

M3 4.8

Jack socket

6 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.8 Handling the Handy GOT

6

6.9 Installing and Removing the Extension Unit For installing and removing a single extension unit, refer to the user's manual included in each extension unit.

Installing the extension interface relay board Installing any of the following communication units to the GOT does not require the extension interface relay board to be installed. Bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2) MELSECNET/H communication unit CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit CC-Link communication unit

For installing/removing a wireless LAN communication unit to/from GT27 or GT25, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Wireless LAN Communication Unit User's Manual For installing/removing an SD card to/from GT21, refer to the following. GT21-03SDCD General Description The procedure of installing and removing the multiple extension units is as follows.

Installing multiple extension units (GT27, GT25) This section explains the procedure for mounting an extension unit on an already mounted extension unit.

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Remove the connector cover and the stickers from the mounted extension unit.

3. Mount an extension unit on the mounted extension unit.

Connector cover

Sticker

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.9 Installing and Removing the Extension Unit 227

22

4. Tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm).

5. To mount another extension unit, repeat Step 2 to Step 3. When you do not mount another extension unit, cover the screws with the accessory stickers to avoid static electricity. Keep the connector cover and the stickers attached.

Mounting a unit on another unit For mounting a unit on another unit, the mounting position is limited depending on a unit to be used together. For the mounting positions of the units, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1 When the multi-channel function is used When the multi-channel function is used, the combination of connection types is restricted. For the combination of connection types, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

Sticker

Accessory sticker

Connector cover

8 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.9 Installing and Removing the Extension Unit

6

Removing the extension unit 1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Remove the accessory stickers from the mounted extension unit.

3. Loosen the screws of the unit.

4. Remove the extension unit.

5. Install the connector covers and stickers of the extension interface.

Connector cover

Sticker

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.9 Installing and Removing the Extension Unit 229

23

6.10 Installing the Battery Install a battery to the GOT before the first startup. The following shows the procedure for installing a battery.(Described with the GOT rear face facing up.)

Battery GT27, GT25 GT27 and GT25 come with a battery in the battery holder. Before using GT27 and GT25, connect the battery connector to the GOT connector. For GT2505-V, GT2506HS-V, and GT2505HS-V, the battery is connected to the GOT before shipment. GT23 Batteries for GT23 (GT11-50BAT) are sold separately. Purchase a battery before using GT23, mount it to the GOT, and connect the GOT connector to battery connector. GT2107-W, GT2105, GT2104-R, and GT2104-P GT2107-W, GT2105, GT2104-R, and GT2104-P come with a battery in the battery holder. The battery is connected to the GOT before shipment. GT2103-P Installing a battery is not required for GT2103-P. (GT2103-P holds the data by the built-in flash ROM.) battery replacement time GT27, GT25 To replace the battery, leave the GOT on for more than 10 minutes before replacing the battery. Replace the battery within 5 minutes. GT23 To replace the battery, leave the GOT on for more than 10 minutes before replacing the battery. Replace the battery within 30 seconds. GT2107-W, GT2105, GT2104-R, and GT2104-P Replace the battery within 30 seconds.

The battery installation procedure differs depending on the GOT models. Page 231 Installing the battery to GT2715, GT2712, GT2710, GT2512, GT2510-V, or GT2510F Page 232 Installing the battery to GT2708, GT2705, or GT2508 Page 234 Installing the battery to GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W, or GT2507T-W Page 235 Installing the battery to GT2506HS-V Page 236 Installing the battery to GT2505HS-V Page 237 Installing the battery to GT2310 or GT2308 Page 239 Installing the battery to GT2505-V, GT2107-W, GT2105, GT2104-R, GT2104-P

0 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.10 Installing the Battery

6

Installing the battery to GT2715, GT2712, GT2710, GT2512, GT2510-V, or GT2510F The following shows the battery installation procedure, taking GT2712 as an example.

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Install the battery to the GOT rear face. Open the battery cover as shown below.

3. To replace the battery, remove the old battery, and then disconnect the connector. For information on how to remove the battery, refer to the following. Page 241 Removing the Battery

4. The GOT-side connector depends on whether the GOT has a battery extension cable. Without a battery extension cable Insert the battery connector to the GOT connector. With a battery extension cable Insert the battery connector to the battery extension cable connector of the GOT.

The GT27 models with the following hardware versions have no battery extension cable. GT2715: Version G or later (manufactured in September 2014) GT2712: Version M or later (manufactured in September 2014) GT2710: Version Nor later (manufactured in September 2014) The GT25 models have no battery extension cable regardless of the hardware version. For how to check the hardware version, refer to the following. Page 432 Confirming of Versions and Conforming Standards

Battery cover

With a battery extension cable

Battery coverBattery extension cable

Battery

Black cable

Red cable

Red cable

Connector

Black cable

Battery cover

Without a battery extension cable Battery Connector

Black cable

Red cable

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.10 Installing the Battery 231

23

5. After installing the battery to the battery holder of the GOT, close the battery cover until it clicks.

6. Turn on the GOT.

7. Check that the battery condition is normal with the utility. For the details of the battery condition display, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Installing the battery to GT2708, GT2705, or GT2508 The following shows the battery installation procedure, taking GT2708 as an example.

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Install the battery inside the SD card cover on the side of the GOT. Open the SD card cover as shown in the following figure.

Battery coverBattery

Connector

SD card cover

2 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.10 Installing the Battery

6

3. To replace the battery, remove the old battery, and then disconnect the connector. For information on how to remove the battery, refer to the following. Page 241 Removing the Battery

4. Insert the battery connector to the GOT connector.

5. After installing the battery to the battery holder of the GOT, close the SD card cover until it clicks.

6. Turn on the GOT.

7. Check that the battery condition is normal with the utility. For the details of the battery condition display, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

SD card cover

Battery

Connector

Black cable

Red cable

SD card coverBattery

Connector

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.10 Installing the Battery 233

23

Installing the battery to GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W, or GT2507T-W The following shows the battery installation procedure, taking GT2510-WX as an example.

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Install the battery to the GOT rear face. Open the battery cover as shown below.

3. To replace the battery, remove the old battery, and then disconnect the connector. For information on how to remove the battery, refer to the following. Page 241 Removing the Battery

4. Insert the battery connector to the GOT connector.

Battery cover

Battery cover

ConnectorBattery

4 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.10 Installing the Battery

6

5. After installing the battery to the battery holder of the GOT, close the battery cover until it clicks.

6. Turn on the GOT.

7. Check that the battery condition is normal with the utility. For the details of the battery condition display, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Installing the battery to GT2506HS-V The following shows the battery installation procedure.

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Loosen the environmental protection back cover screws at two points on GOT rear face to remove the cover.

3. Insert the battery connector to the connector for battery connection on the GOT, and put the battery into place. Insert the red lead as to pass it through the notch on the circuit board.

Battery cover

Battery Connector

Environmental protection back cover screw

Connector for battery connection

Battery

Notch

Circuit board

Insertion direction

Lead (Black)

Lead (Red)

Battery

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.10 Installing the Battery 235

23

4. Attach the environmental protection back cover and tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm).

5. Turn on the GOT.

6. Check that the battery condition is normal with the utility. For the details of the battery condition display, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Installing the battery to GT2505HS-V The following shows the battery installation procedure.

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Loosen the environmental protection back cover screws at four points on GOT rear face to remove the cover.

3. Insert the battery connector to the connector for battery connection on the GOT, and put the battery into place.

Environmental protection back cover screw

Environmental protection back cover screw

6 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.10 Installing the Battery

6

4. Install the battery to the GOT.

5. Attach the environmental protection back cover and tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm).

6. Turn on the GOT.

7. Check that the battery condition is normal with the utility. For the details of the battery condition display, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Installing the battery to GT2310 or GT2308 The following shows the battery installation procedure, taking GT2310 as an example.

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Install the battery to the GOT rear face. Open the battery cover as shown below.

3. To replace the battery, remove the old battery, and then disconnect the connector. For information on how to remove the battery, refer to the following. Page 241 Removing the Battery

Circuit board

Insertion direction

Lead (Black)

Lead (Red)

Battery

Battery

Connector for battery connection

Battery cover

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.10 Installing the Battery 237

23

4. Insert the battery connector to the GOT connector.

5. After installing the battery to the battery holder of the GOT, close the battery cover until it clicks.

6. Turn on the GOT.

7. Check that the battery condition is normal with the utility. For the details of the battery condition display, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Battery cover

Connector

Battery

Red cable Black cable

Battery cover

Connector

Battery

8 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.10 Installing the Battery

6

Installing the battery to GT2505-V, GT2107-W, GT2105, GT2104-R, GT2104-P The following shows the battery installation procedure, taking GT2505-V, GT2107-W, GT2105, GT2104-R, GT2104-P as an example.

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Open the battery cover as shown below.

3. To replace the battery, remove the old battery, and then disconnect the connector. For information on how to remove the battery, refer to the following. Page 241 Removing the Battery

4. Insert the battery connector to the GOT connector.

Battery cover

For GT2104-R For GT2104-P

Battery cover

Battery cover

Connector

For GT2505-V and GT2105For GT2107-W

Battery cover

Connector

For GT2104-R For GT2104-P

ConnectorConnector

Connector

Battery cover

For GT2505-V and GT2105For GT2107-W

Battery cover

Connector

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.10 Installing the Battery 239

24

5. After installing the battery to the battery holder of the GOT, close the battery cover until it clicks.

6. Turn on the GOT.

7. Check that the battery condition is normal with the utility. For the details of the battery condition display, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

For GT2104-R For GT2104-P

Battery cover

Battery

Battery cover

Battery

Connector

Battery cover

For GT2505-V and GT2105For GT2107-W

Battery cover

Connector

0 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.10 Installing the Battery

6

6.11 Removing the Battery The battery removal procedure differs depending on the GOT models. Page 241 Removing the battery from GT2715, GT2712, GT2710, GT2512, GT2510-V, or GT2510F Page 243 Removing the battery from GT2708, GT2705, GT2710 or GT2508 Page 244 Removing the battery from GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W, or GT2507T-W Page 245 Removing the battery from GT2506HS-V Page 246 Removing the battery from GT2505HS-V Page 247 Removing the battery from GT2310 or GT2308 Page 248 Removing the battery from GT2505-V, GT2107-W, GT2105, GT2104-R, GT2104-P

Removing the battery from GT2715, GT2712, GT2710, GT2512, GT2510-V, or GT2510F The following shows the battery removal procedure, taking GT2712 as an example.

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. The battery is stored in the GOT rear face. Open the battery cover as shown below.

Battery coverBattery

Connector

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.11 Removing the Battery 241

24

3. After removing the battery from the battery holder of the GOT, unplug the connector. The GOT-side connector depends on whether the GOT has a battery extension cable. Without a battery extension cable Unplug the battery connector from the GOT connector. With a battery extension cable Unplug the battery connector from the battery extension cable connector of the GOT.

The GT27 models with the following hardware versions have no battery extension cable. GT2715: Version G or later (manufactured in September 2014) GT2712: Version M or later (manufactured in September 2014) GT2710: Version Nor later (manufactured in September 2014) The GT25 models have no battery extension cable regardless of the hardware version. For how to check the hardware version, refer to the following. Page 432 Confirming of Versions and Conforming Standards

4. Push and close the battery cover until it clicks.

With a battery extension cable

Battery coverBattery extension cable

Battery

Black cable

Red cable

Red cable

Connector

Black cable

Battery cover

Without a battery extension cable Battery Connector

Black cable

Red cable

Battery cover

2 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.11 Removing the Battery

6

Removing the battery from GT2708, GT2705, GT2710 or GT2508 The following shows the battery removal procedure, taking GT2708 as an example.

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. The battery is stored inside the SD card cover on the side of the GOT. Open the SD card cover as shown in the following figure.

3. After removing the battery from the battery holder of the GOT, unplug the battery connector from the GOT connector.

4. Close the SD card cover until it clicks.

SD card coverBattery

Connector

SD card cover

Battery

Connector

Black cable

Red cable

SD card cover

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.11 Removing the Battery 243

24

Removing the battery from GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W, or GT2507T-W The following shows the battery removal procedure, taking GT2510-WX as an example.

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. The battery is stored in the GOT rear face. Open the battery cover as shown below.

3. After removing the battery from the battery holder of the GOT, unplug the connector.

4. Push and close the battery cover until it clicks.

Battery cover

Battery Connector

Battery Connector

Battery cover

Battery cover

4 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.11 Removing the Battery

6

Removing the battery from GT2506HS-V The following shows the battery removal procedure.

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Loosen the environmental protection back cover screws at two points on GOT rear face to remove the cover.

3. Remove the battery from the GOT, and unplug the battery connector.

4. Attach the environmental protection back cover and tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm).

Environmental protection back cover screw

Connector for battery connection

Battery

Environmental protection back cover screw

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.11 Removing the Battery 245

24

Removing the battery from GT2505HS-V The following shows the battery removal procedure.

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Loosen the environmental protection back cover screws at four points on GOT rear face to remove the cover.

3. Remove the battery from the GOT, and unplug the battery connector.

4. Attach the environmental protection back cover and tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm).

Environmental protection back cover screw

Connector for battery connection

Battery

6 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.11 Removing the Battery

6

Removing the battery from GT2310 or GT2308 The following shows the battery removal procedure, taking GT2310 as an example.

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. The battery is stored in the GOT rear face. Open the battery cover as shown below.

3. After removing the battery from the battery holder of the GOT, unplug the battery connector from the GOT connector.

4. Push and close the battery cover until it clicks.

Battery cover

Connector

Battery

Battery cover

Connector

Battery

Red cable

Black cable

Battery cover

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.11 Removing the Battery 247

24

Removing the battery from GT2505-V, GT2107-W, GT2105, GT2104-R, GT2104-P The following shows the battery removal procedure, taking GT2505-V, GT2107-W, GT2105, GT2104-R, GT2104-P as an example.

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Open the battery cover as shown below.

3. After removing the battery from the battery holder of the GOT, unplug the connector.

Battery cover

For GT2104-R For GT2104-P

Battery cover

Battery cover

Connector

For GT2505-V and GT2105For GT2107-W

Battery cover

Connector

For GT2104-R For GT2104-P

Connector Battery

Connector

Battery

Battery cover

Connector

For GT2505-V and GT2105

Battery

For GT2107-W

Battery cover

Connector Battery

8 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.11 Removing the Battery

6

4. Push and close the battery cover until it clicks.

For GT2104-R For GT2104-P

Battery cover Battery cover

Battery cover

For GT2505-V and GT2105For GT2107-W

Battery cover

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.11 Removing the Battery 249

25

6.12 Installing the SD Card

The SD card installation procedure differs depending on the GOT model.) Page 251 GT27, GT25, GT23 Page 255 GT25HS-V Page 256 GT21

GT27, GT25, GT23(Except for GT2505-V, GT25HS-V) After inserting an SD card into the GOT, make sure to close the SD card cover. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written. GT2505-V, GT25HS-V After inserting an SD card into the GOT, make sure to turn on the SD card access switch. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written. GT21 After inserting an SD card into the SD card unit, make sure to enable the SD card access in the GOT utility. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written.

Turning off the GOT while it accesses the SD card results in damage to the SD card and files. When using the GOT with an SD card inserted, check the following items.

CAUTION

0 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.12 Installing the SD Card

6

GT27, GT25, GT23

GT27, GT25 (except GT25-W and GT2505-V), GT23 1. Open the SD card cover as shown below.

2. Make sure that the SD card access LED is off when the SD card cover is open 90 degrees or more, and then insert an SD card with its front side up.

3. Push and close the SD card cover until it clicks.

4. When the SD card cover is closed, the access to the SD card is allowed.

Open the cover of the SD card interface 90 degrees or more.SD card access LED

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.12 Installing the SD Card 251

25

GT25-W 1. Open the SD card cover as shown below.

2. Open the SD card cover completely, and check that the SD card access LED is off. Then, hold an SD card with its front side facing up, and insert the card into the SD card interface.

SD card access LED

Open the SD card cover completely.

2 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.12 Installing the SD Card

6

3. Push and close the SD card cover until it clicks.

4. When the SD card cover is closed, the access to the SD card is allowed.

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.12 Installing the SD Card 253

25

GT2505-V 1. Turn off the SD card access switch, and check that the SD card access LED turns off.

2. Open the SD card cover. Insert an SD card into the SD card interface with its front side (label side) facing toward the GOT rear face.

3. Close the SD card cover, and turn on the SD card access switch. The SD card becomes accessible afterward.

Front side of the SD card

4 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.12 Installing the SD Card

6

GT25HS-V The following shows the installation procedure, taking GT2506HS-V as an example.

1. Open the interface environmental protection cover in the arrow-pointing direction.

2. Turn off the SD card access switch, and check that the SD card access LED turns off.

3. Insert an SD card into the SD card interface with its front side (label side) facing toward the GOT rear face.

4. Turn on the SD card access switch. The SD card becomes accessible afterward.

5. Close the interface environmental protection cover.

Front

MEMORY

Interface environmental protection cover

SD card access switch

SD card access LED

SD card Interface

Insertion direction

Front

SD card label side

Front

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.12 Installing the SD Card 255

25

GT21

GT21 Before inserting or removing an SD card, turn off the GOT or select [Access inhibit] in the SD card access setting of the GOT.

1. Touch [Utility main menu] [Data control] [SD card access] [Permissions], and select [Access inhibit]. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Check that the SD card access LED turns off. When the LED is off, the SD card can be inserted or removed at the GOT power-on.

2. Open the SD card cover, and insert the SD card with its front side (name plate side) facing outward. Close the SD card cover.

3. Touch [SD card access] [Access inhibit], and select [Permissions]. Check that the SD card access LED turns on.

Front side of the SD card

6 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.12 Installing the SD Card

6

6.13 Removing the SD Card

The SD card removal procedure differs depending on the GOT model. Page 258 GT27, GT25, GT23 Page 262 GT25HS-V Page 263 GT21

If the SD card mounted on drive A of the GOT is removed while the GOT is accessed, processing for the GOT might be interrupted about for 20 seconds. The GOT cannot be operated during this period. The functions that run in the background including a screen updating, alarm, logging, scripts, and others are also interrupted. This stop affects the system operation, causing an accident. Remove the SD card after checking the following items.

GT27, GT25, GT23Except for GT2505-V, GT25HS-V Check that the SD card access LED is off before removing the SD card.

GT21 Disable the SD card access in the GOT utility, and then check that the SD card access LED is off before removing the SD card.

GT2505-V, GT25HS-V Make sure to turn off the SD card access switch before removing the SD card. Not doing so may damage the SD card and files.

WARNING

If the data storage mounted on the GOT is removed while the GOT is accessed, the data storage and files are damaged. To remove the data storage from the GOT, check that the access to the data storage in SD card access LED, the system signal, and others is not performed.

GT27, GT25, GT23 When inserting a SD card into the GOT, make sure to close the SD card cover. Failure to do so causes the data not to be read or written. GT21 When inserting an SD card into the SD card unit, make sure to enable the SD card access in the GOT utility in advance.

When removing the SD card from the GOT, make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop out. Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break. Before removing the data storage from the GOT, follow the procedure for removal on the utility screen of the GOT. After the successful completion dialog is displayed, remove the data storage by hand carefully. Failure to do so may cause the data storage to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

When using the GOT with an SD card inserted, check the following items.

CAUTION

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.13 Removing the SD Card 257

25

GT27, GT25, GT23

GT27, GT25 (except GT25-W and GT2505-V), GT23 1. Open the SD card cover as shown below.

2. Make sure that the SD card access LED is off when the SD card cover is open 90 degrees or more, and then push the SD card in to eject it.

3. Close the cover of the SD card interface.

Open the cover of the SD card interface 90 degrees or more.SD card access LED

8 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.13 Removing the SD Card

6

GT25-W 1. Open the SD card cover as shown below.

2. Open the SD card cover completely, and check that the SD card access LED is off. Then, push the SD card in to eject it.

SD card access LED

Open the SD card cover completely.

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.13 Removing the SD Card 259

26

3. Close the cover of the SD card interface.

0 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.13 Removing the SD Card

6

GT2505-V 1. Turn off the SD card access switch, and check that the SD card access LED turns off.

2. Open the SD card cover. Eject the SD card.

3. Close the SD card cover.

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.13 Removing the SD Card 261

26

GT25HS-V The following shows the installation procedure, taking GT2506HS-V as an example.

1. Open the interface environmental protection cover in the arrow-pointing direction.

2. Set the SD card access switch of the GOT to OFF, and check that the SD card access LED turns off.

3. Eject and remove the SD card.

4. Close the interface environmental protection cover.

Front

MEMORY

Interface environmental protection cover

SD card access switch

SD card access LED

SD card Interface

Front

2 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.13 Removing the SD Card

6

GT21 Before inserting or removing an SD card, turn off the GOT or select [Access inhibit] in the SD card access setting of theGOT.

1. Touch [Utility main menu] [Data control] [SD card access] [Permissions], and select [Access inhibit]. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Check that the SD card access LED turns off. When the LED is off, the SD card can be inserted or removed at the GOT power-on.

2. Open the SD card cover, and remove the SD card.

Cautions for removing the SD card While the SD card access LED is on, do not remove the SD card or power off the GOT. Doing so results in damage to the SD card and files. When removing the SD card from the GOT, make sure to hold the SD card as it may pop out. Enabling or disabling the SD card access when the SD card cover is removed (GT27 and GT25 only) The SD card access is enabled or disabled by closing or opening the SD card cover. If the SD card cover is faulty and remains opened, the SD Card Access Switch Status Control (GS1820.b0) turns on. To enable or disable the SD card access, turn on or off GS1820.b1.

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.13 Removing the SD Card 263

26

6.14 Installing and Removing the USB Devices The following shows the procedure for installing and removing a USB device.

Connecting the USB hub devices to the USB interface (Host) When connecting the devices to the USB interface (Host) using USB hub with the GOT power on, drive assignment of connected USB devices may be changed.To use the USB hub devices, turn on the GOT with the devices connected.

Installing the USB devices

For GT27 and GT25 equipped with the USB interface (Host) on the front face 1. Push the [PUSH] mark on the USB environmental protection cover to open the cover.

2. Insert the USB device to the USB interface (Host) as shown below. Make sure to insert the USB interface connector in the correct direction.

For GT27, GT25, GT23, and GT2107-W equipped with the USB interface (Host) on the rear face 1. Insert the USB device to the USB interface (Host) as shown below. Make sure to insert the USB interface connector in the correct direction.

4 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.14 Installing and Removing the USB Devices

6

Removing the USB devices

For GT27 and GT25 equipped with the USB interface (Host) on the front face 1. Place the USB device in removable mode.For the setting method, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

2. Remove the USB device from the USB interface (Host) as shown below.

3. Push the [PUSH] mark on the USB environmental protection cover to close the cover.

For GT27, GT25, GT23, and GT2107-W equipped with the USB interface (Host) on the rear face 1. Place the USB device in removable mode.For the setting method, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

2. Remove the USB device from the USB interface (Host) as shown below.

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.14 Installing and Removing the USB Devices 265

26

6.15 Installing and Removing the USB cable The following shows the procedure for installing and removing a USB cable to the USB interface on the GOT rear face. The locations of the USB interface (Host) and the USB interface (Device) vary by model. Page 119 PART NAMES AND SETTINGS Attach a cable clamp depending on the usage environment, such as when fixing a cable is difficult. Use a cable clamp RSG-130-V0 manufactured by KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD. or equivalent.

Installing the USB cable Install the USB cable to the GOT in the following procedure.

1. Install the USB cable to a USB interface (Host/device) on the GOT rear face.

2. Insert a cable clamp to the mounting hole for a cable clamp shown in the following figure and push it until you hear a clicking sound. For the direction that the band goes through, refer to the arrow in the figure.

3. Pass the USB cable through a hole of the cable clamp and pull the band to fix the cable.

6 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.15 Installing and Removing the USB cable

6

Removing the USB cable When removing the mounted cable clamp and USB cable, refer to the following procedure.

1. Remove the cable clamp band. Draw out the band while pushing up the tab of the cable clamp with a screwdriver or other tools.

2. Remove the cable clamp while holding its both sides (Arrow A in the figure). Removing the USB cable.

The USB cable can be removed from the unit with the cable clamp. Remove the cable with holding both sides of the cable clamp (Arrow A in the figure).

TabBand Driver

A

A

A

A

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.15 Installing and Removing the USB cable 267

26

6.16 Installing and Removing the Panel-Mounted USB Port Extension

The panel-mounted USB port extension is a waterproof USB extension cable. The cable is used to route the USB interface (Host) or USB interface (Device) of the GOT rear face to the front side of the control panel.

Applicable panel-mounted USB port extension The following panel-mounted USB port extensions are applicable. : Applicable, -: Not applicable

*1 This cable is usable for GT2107-WTBD, GT2107-WTSD. *2 This cable is usable for GT2712-STWA, GT2712-STWD, GT2710-VTWA, GT2710-VTWD. *3 This cable is usable for GT2512F-STNA, GT2512F-STND, GT2510-VTWA, GT2510-VTWD, GT2510F-VTNA, GT2510F-VTND,

GT2508-VTWA, GT2508-VTWD, GT2508F-VTNA,GT2508F-VTND and GT2507T-WTSD. *4 This cable is usable for GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBD, GT2104-PMBDS, GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2104-PMBLS, GT2103-PMBD,

GT2103-PMBDS, GT2103-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBLS.

Parts name The following shows the parts name of panel-mounted USB port extension.

Model name Supported model

GT27 GT25 GT23 GT21 GT14-C10EXUSB-4S - *1

GT10-C10EXUSB-5S *2 *3 - *4

Cap installation chart

USB plug NutSeal Cable

Model name label

Waterproof cap

Ferrite core

8 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.16 Installing and Removing the Panel-Mounted USB Port Extension

6

Installing and removing the panel-mounted USB port extension

Installing and removing the panel-mounted USB port extension to/from the control panel Install or remove the panel-mounted USB port extension as follows with attention to the curve or twist of the waterproof cap, seal, and nut.

Install the waterproof cap to the panel-mounted USB port extension so that the control panel surface is IP67F-rated. Overtightening or undertightening may disable the waterproof effect. Tighten the waterproof cap properly when the cable is not used.

Nut

Waterproof cap

Seal

Panel thickness

19.40.1

(0 .8

2 0.

01 )

(0.770.01)

Panel Cutting Dimensions

20 .8

0 .1

GT14-C10EXUSB-4S

14.80.1

(0 .6

1 0.

01 )

(0.580.01)

15 .6

0 .1

GT10-C10EXUSB-5S

Panel thickness: 2 to 4mm (0.08 to 0.16inch) Specified torque range: 0.30 to 0.34N

Panel thickness: 1.6 to 2mm (0.06 to 0.08inch) Specified torque range: 0.28 to 0.32N

6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.16 Installing and Removing the Panel-Mounted USB Port Extension 269

27

Precautions on installing the panel-mounted USB port extension Run power lines, servo amplifier drive wires, and panel-mounted USB port extensions so that they do not cross each other. Install the panel-mounted USB port extension away from noise sources such as equipment. Do not twist, bend at a sharp angle or a right angle, and stretch the panel-mounted USB port extension since the cable may be broken. Install it while considering the following control panel inside dimensions. Dimensions in the depth direction of the GOT

Dimension of the protruding cable

Insert the USB plug part of the tip of the panel-mounted USB interface (Host) extension securely to the USB port of the GOT. The USB plug part may work loose or become unplugged due to vibrations, impacts, or being yanked. Use cable ties or others to fix the cable portion to the structure inside the control panel, the cable fixing hole on the GOT, or others.

80 (3.15) or more

Unit: mm (inch)

80 (3.15) or more

Unit: mm (inch)

0 6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 6.16 Installing and Removing the Panel-Mounted USB Port Extension

7

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT

Page 271 Connector Conversion Box Page 304 Emergency Stop Switch Guard Cover Page 305 Wall-mounting Attachment Page 308 Overview of Communication Cable Page 312 External Cable, Relay Cable

7.1 Connector Conversion Box The Handy GOT can monitor a PLC CPU or other controllers through the connector conversion box. For the PLC CPU that can be monitored, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 The connector conversion box supplies power to the power supply input terminal of the Handy GOT, and relays signals from the emergency stop switch of the GOT. The connector conversion box has a mechanism to mount or demount the Handy GOT in operation.

Applicable connector conversion box The following connector conversion box is applicable to the Handy GOT. : Usable, -: Not usable

Connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB-42S)

Specifications General specifications Other specifications are the same as Handy GOT.

Power supply specifications Other specifications are the same as Handy GOT.

Product name Model Content GT2506HS-V GT2505HS-V Connector conversion box

GT16H-CNB-42S Gasket for panel installation 1 (accessory), flange for GT10-9PT5S 1 (accessory) Screws for flange installation (M3 8) 2 (accessory)

GT16H-CNB-37S Bracket for installing a connector conversion box on the panel 1 (accessory) Screws for installing the bracket (M3 8) 3 (accessory)

GT11H-CNB-37S

Item Specifications Operating ambient temperature 0 C to 55 C

Storage ambient temperature -20C to 70C

Vibration resistance When installing DIN rail Frequency Acceleration Half-amplitude Sweep count

5 Hz to 8.4 Hz 1.75 mm 10 times each in X, Y and Z directions8.4 Hz to 150 Hz 4.9 m/s2

Item Specifications Input power supply voltage 24 V DC (+10% -15%)

Power consumption 13.7 W or less (570 mA/24 V DC) (When including the consumption current of Handy GOT)

Connector conversion box only

2.2 W (90 mA/24 V DC) (When excluding the consumption current of Handy GOT)

Inrush current 25 A or less (at max. load) 2 ms

Permissible instantaneous power failure time

Within 5 ms

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 271

27

Internal relay contact specifications

*1 The system may not match the safety standards. Before using the system, please check the safety standards which are required.

Item Contact rating Specifications Operation switch SW1 to SW6

10 mA/24 V DC (resistance load only)

Each contact coordinates the operation switch status of Pressed (close)/Not pressed (open). When the external cable is not connected, contacts are always open regardless of the switch status.

Emergency stop switch ES1A to ES3A

1 A/24 V DC (resistance load) 0.3 A/24 V DC (induction load)

Each contact coordinates the emergency stop switch status of Pushed (open)/Return (close). When the external cable is not connected, contacts are always open regardless of the emergency stop switch status. Causing a short circuit of the ES B terminal which is close to the ES A terminal by a short pin (prepared by user) enables to set each contact in the close status even if the external cable is not connected. *1

Page 352 Emergency stop switch wiring When using the short-circuited ES B terminal which is close to the ES A terminal Contacts are normally operated in the close status. When pushing the emergency stop switch, the contacts become open. In the following situations, contacts are closed regardless of the status of the emergency stop switch and the external cable. When GT16H-CNB-42S is turned OFF When GT16H-CNB-42S is not supplied with the power supply (24 V DC)

Grip switch DSW1, DSW2

1 A/24 V DC (resistance load) 0.3 A/24 V DC (induction load)

Each contact coordinates the grip switch status of Pressed (close)/Not pressed (open). When the external cable is not connected, contacts are always open regardless of the grip switch status.

Keylock switch (2-position switch) KSWC, KSW1, KSW2

1 A/24 V DC (resistance load) 0.3 A/24 V DC (induction load)

Each contact coordinates the position of the keylock switch. When the key is on the left: KSW1 and KSWC are short-circuited. When the key is on the right: KSW2 and KSWC are short-circuited. When the external cable is not connected, contacts are always open regardless of the keylock switch.

2 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

Part name and external dimensions (GT16H-CNB-42S)

Weight: about 0.5 kg

ON ID No.

ES1A ES2A ES2B ES3A ES3B FGES1B

U

RS-232

10BASE-T 100BASE-TX

RS-422

L OFF

ES1A ES2A ES2B ES3A ES3B - INPUT 24VDC +ES1B

SW-COM SW6SW4 KSW1 DSW1 DSW2SW2 SW1 SW5 KSW2KSW-COM DSW1 DSW2SW3

2) 3) 4)

5) 1)

12)

6) 7)

11)

10)

13)

8)

14)

9) 16)

15)

Terminal block cover opened

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 273

27

No. Name Specifications 1) Connector for Handy GOT (42-pin female) Connects the Handy GOT through an external cable.

2) Power switch Supplies the power to the Handy GOT. When this switch is set to ON, the power is supplied. Turn off the power when attaching or detaching the Handy GOT.

3) POWER LED Lit in green: Power is correctly supplied. Not lit: Power is not supplied.

4) Hole for the panel installation Used to install the gasket when the panel is mounted. For M4 screw, depth 6 mm

5) Gasket attachment groove Used to install the gasket when the panel is mounted.

6) Hook for DIN rail Used for fixing the connector conversion box when mounting DIN rail (35 mm).

7) Hole for the screw installation Used for fixing on the board, etc. For M4 screw

8) Terminal block 1 Connects the GT16H-CNB-42S, the 24 V DC power supply of Handy GOT, and the emergency stop switch (ES1 to 3) with M3 terminal screws and the cover.

9) Terminal block 2 Connects the operation switch of the Handy GOT (SW1 to 6), the grip switch (DSW-1, 2) and the keylock switch (KSW-1, 2) with M3 terminal screws and the cover.

10) External connection device communication connector (RS-232: D-sub 9-pin male) Connector model name: JES-9P-2A3A (JST) or equivalent

GT2506HS-V For connecting with a controller (RS-232 connector and RS-422/485 connector cannot be used at the same time.) GT2505HS-V Cannot be used for GT2505HS-V. For connecting the GT2505HS-V and a connector conversion box via the RS-422 or RS-232 interface, use a connector conversion box (GT11H-CNB-37S). Page 298 Connector conversion box (GT11H-CNB-37S)

11) External connection device communication connector (RS-422/485: D-sub 9-pin female) Connector model name: 17JE-13090-37D23A (DDK) or equivalent

12) External connection device communication connector (Ethernet: RJ45 module jack)

Connects the external connection device via Ethernet with using a LAN cable.

13) Rotary switch (U) Sets the ID number of GT16-CNB-42S. Sets one ID number using both rotary switches (U) and (L).14) Rotary switch (L)

15) ID number valid/invalid selection switch Enables the recognition function of ID number (ON=Valid, OFF=Invalid). When connecting the external connection device with using 10) and 11), set OFF (invalid).

16) Hole for the flange installation Used for fixing the flange when using the connector conversion adapter.

4 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

Part name and External dimensions (GT16H-CNB-42S)

Unit: mm (inch)

55 (2.17)56 (2.20) 110 (4.33)

12 6

(4 .9

6)

about 65 (2.56)

about 130 (5.12)

*1

*1

External cable connected

*1 Space required for connecting the cable

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 275

27

Installation (GT16H-CNB-42S) The connector conversion box can be installed on the panel face directly or on the DIN rail.

Mounting on the panel face (When setting the connector for Handy GOT and the power supply switch on the panel surface)

1. Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions shown below.

2. Install the accessory gasket to the attachment groove of the connector conversion box. Be sure to install the gasket.

Drill 4- 50.5 (0.20.02)

Panel cut area Unit: mm (inch)61+1,-0 (2.410.04,-0)

(Panel opening)

770.5 (3.040.02)

85 0

.5 (3

.3 5

0. 02

)

87 +1

,-0 (3

.4 3+

0. 04

,-0 )

(P an

el o

pe ni

ng )

4-R3 (0.12)max (Panel opening)

Packing attachment chase

Elevation view

6 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

3. Fit the connector conversion box into the installation hole from the back side of the control panel, and fix the box with four M4 screws (user prepared).

In the connector conversion box, thread of M4, 6 mm in depth is cut in each mounting hole. Prepare four M4 mounting screws separately while considering the thickness of the panel face. Tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.69 Nm to 0.88 Nm). Overtightening the screws may cause damage. To connect a PLC connection cable, make sure that no object is located within 65 mm from the back side of the connector. Also, make sure that interfering objects are not located within 25 mm from the upper side so that the terminal block is not hindered. Make sure that interfering objects are not located within 50 mm from the lower side so that the Ethernet port and terminal block are not hindered.

Unit: mm (inch)

ON ID No.

ES1A ES2A ES2B ES3A ES3B FGES1B

U

RS-232

10BASE-T 100BASE-TX

RS-422

LOFF

ES1A ES2A ES2B ES3A ES3B -INPUT 24VDC+ES1B

SW-COM SW6SW4 KSW1 DSW1 DSW2SW2 SW1 SW5 KSW2KSW-COM DSW1 DSW2SW3

65 (2.56)

25 (0.99)

25 (0.99) Other device

Other device

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 277

27

Mounting on the panel face (When setting the connector for Handy GOT and the power supply switch on the panel surface)

1. Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions shown below.

2. Mount the connector conversion box on the control panel. Tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.69 Nm to 0.88 Nm). Overtightening the screws may cause damage.

430.2

11 8

0. 2(

4. 65

0 .0

1)

Panel cut area Unit: mm (inch)

Drill 4- 50.5 (0.20.02)

(1.690.01)

M4 screw and nut 4 sets (prepared by user)

4- 4.5 (0.18)

11 8

(4 .6

5) 4

(0 .1

6)43 (1.7) 6 (0.24)

ON

OFF

Unit: mm (inch)

8 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

Installation on the DIN rail Install the connector conversion box on the DIN rail with using its DIN rail hook.

The clearance between screws for installing the DIN rail should be 150 mm or less.

1. Pull out the hook for DIN rail.

2. Adapt the upper side of the DIN rail installation slot to the DIN rail.

3. Press the connector conversion box against the DIN rail, and lock the hook for DIN rail. When installing the DIN rail, fix the cables. Otherwise, the hook for DIN rail and other parts may be damaged by the cable load.

Applicable DIN rail DIN46277 (width: 35 mm)

DIN rail depth more than 10mm (0.4"inch)

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 279

28

Connector conversion adapter installation Installing the connector conversion adapter and the flange is required to connect the RS-485 unfastened cable with the connector conversion adapter.

Installation of the connector conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S (sold separately) and the flange (packed together with the connector conversion box)

Install to the adapter and the flange with two screws which are packed together with the connector conversion adapter. Tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.3 Nm to 0.6 Nm). Tightening screws too much may cause damage on the connector conversion adapter.

Installation to the connector conversion box Mount the connector conversion adapter to the RS-422/485 connector of the connector conversion box and fix them with two screws which are packed together with the connector conversion box. Tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.3 Nm to 0.6 Nm). Tightening screws too much may cause damage on the connector conversion box and the flange.

Connection Conversion Adapter

Flange

0 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

Wiring to the connector and the terminal block Pin assignment and signal names The 42-pin connector of the external cable is converted to the PLC connection connector (D-sub 9-pin, module jack) and the following terminal block.

External device communication connector RS-422/485 (D-sub 9-pin female)

External device communication connector (RS-232 (D-sub 9-pin male))

GT16H-CNB-42S Application

External device communication connector RS-422/485

Pin No. Signal name 1 TXD+(SDA) Signal line for external device communication

For wiring, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 that covers the controller used

2 RXD+(RDA)

3 RTS+(RSA)

4 CTS+(CSA)

5 SG

6 TXD-(SDB)

7 RXD-(RDB)

8 RTS-(RSB)

9 CTS-(CSB)

GT16H-CNB-42S Application

External device communication connector RS-232

Pin No. Signal name 1 CD Signal line for external device communication

For wiring, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 that covers the controller used

2 RXD(RD)

3 TXD(SD)

4 DTR(ER)

5 SG

6 DSR(DR)

7 RTS(RS)

8 CTS(CS)

9 N.C

Connector for Handy GOT 42pin Connector female

M2.6 (Metric screw thread)

#4-40UNC (Inch screw thread)

Terminal block 1

Terminal block 2External device communication connector

Ethernet

External device communication connector

RS-422/485

D-Sub 9pin female

1

RJ45

5

69

External device communication connector

RS-232

D-Sub 9pin male

51

96

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 281

28

Terminal block 1, 2

Terminal block 1

GT16H-CNB-42S Application

Terminal block 1

Terminal No. Signal name 1 24VDC+ 24 V DC power supply "+

2 FG Frame ground

3 24VDC- 24 V DC power supply "-

4 Not used

5

6

7

8

9 ES3B For Emergency stop switch

10 ES3B

11 ES3A

12 ES3A

13 ES2B

14 ES2B

15 ES2A

16 ES2A

17 ES1B

18 ES1B

19 ES1A

20 ES1A

Terminal block 1 (Terminal block for power supply and emergency stop switch)

Terminal block 2 (Terminal block for Handy GOT operation switches, grip switch, keylock switch)

2 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

Terminal block 2

Wiring to the terminal block Terminal screws are M3. Wire as described below. Do not tighten the terminal screws with a torque outside the specified range. Doing so can cause a failure or malfunction.

Installing and removing of external cable When installing or removing the external cable from the connector conversion box, make sure that the power switch is turned OFF. Connect the external cable with the connector conversion box in the same procedure as connecting the external cable with Handy GOT. Refer to the following. Page 317 Installing and removing of external cable

GT16H-CNB-42S Application

Terminal block 2

Terminal No. Signal name 1 SW-COM For Operation switch

2 SW1

3 SW2

4 SW3

5 SW4

6 SW5

7 SW6

8 KSW-COM For Keylock switch

9 KSW1

10 KSW2

11 DSW1 For Grip switch

12 DSW1

13 DSW2

14 DSW2

Wire size For power supply: 0.75 mm2 or more, For grounding: 2 mm2 or more

Solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 (Applicable solderless terminal: RAV1.25-3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A)

Tightening torque 0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm

6.2(0.24) or less

6.2(0.24) or less

3.2(0.13)

3.2(0.13)

When wiring one cable to one terminal

When wiring two cables to one terminal

Terminal screw

Solderless terminal

Terminal screw

Solderless terminal

Unit: mm (inch)

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 283

28

ID recognition function When the Handy GOT is connected to a PLC CPU or other controllers by Ethernet, the GOT can acquire the ID number (set by the rotary switch) from the connector conversion box. ID number can be used as information for switching the station number. When the ID number is stored to the station No. switching device by using the trigger action function or the script function, connecting the GOT to the connector conversion box monitors the controller corresponding to the ID number.

For details on the switching the station number, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

How to use the ID number recognition function The ID recognition function is usable only when the Handy GOT is connected with a controller by Ethernet. To acquire the ID number, establish MODBUS/RTU communications between the RS-232 interface of the Handy GOT and the connector conversion box. When RS-232 interface is used by the multi-channel function, the ID number recognition function is not available.

Setting the ID number Set the ID number with the rotary switch of the connector conversion box. The setting range is 00H to FFH. Set the second digit of the hexadecimal with U, and the first digit of the hexadecimal with L. After setting the ID number, turn the ID number valid/invalid selection switch to valid (ON).

ID 1 2 5 8

192.168.5.50 192.168.5.0 192.168.5.25 192.168.5.66

192.168.5.50

192.168.5.66

192.168.5.25

IP

IP address is acquired from the table in the project.

Handy GOT ID

acquisition

ID 1 2 5 8

192.168.5.50 192.168.5.0 192.168.5.25 192.168.5.66

IP

IP address is acquired from the table in the project.

When connected to a Connector Conversion Box with ID number 1, the GOT monitors the PLC (A).

(A)

(B)

(C)

ID number: 1

ID number: 2

ID number: 5

ID number: 8 ID

acquisition

When connected to a Connector Conversion Box with ID number 8, the GOT monitors the PLC (B).

Handy GOT

ID No.

U L

4 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

Handy GOT side settings Set the RS-232 communication interface of the Handy GOT. Set the Ethernet interface according to the connected equipment to be monitored.

1. For GT2506HS-V, set the selection connector to the RS-232 interface. For GT2505HS-V, set the selection connector to the Ethernet interface.

2. Install the communication driver [MODBUS/RTU Master] on the Handy GOT in addition to the Ethernet communication driver for communication with the controller.

3. Make the connected equipment settings of the RS-232 interface. Select [MODBUS/RTU Master] as the communication driver and set the following items in the communication detail setting.

Reading the ID number ID number can be read to Handy GOT by connecting Handy GOT to the connector conversion box. Handy GOT can acquire ID number by reading the input register 300001.

Station number switching When the value (ID number) of input register 300001 is read to the station No. switching device by using the trigger action function or the script function, the GOT monitors the controller corresponding to the ID number.

Example of setting procedure The following shows an example of the station No. switching setting procedure using the ID recognition function of the connector conversion box. In this example, the trigger action function is used to set the value of the station No. switching device.

1. Set the ID number of the connector conversion box. The ID number set with the connector conversion box corresponds to the station number of the PLC to be monitored. Page 284 Setting the ID number

2. Switch the serial communication interface of the handy GOT. For GT2506HS-V, set the selection connector to the RS-232 interface. For GT2505HS-V, set the selection connector to the Ethernet interface. Page 310 Selection of RS-232 connection and RS-422/485 connection (GT2506HS-V) Page 311 Selection of the RS-232 connection, RS-422 connection, or Ethernet connection

3. Install the communication driver to the handy GOT. Install the following communication drivers on the Handy GOT: Ethernet communication driver for communication with the controller and the [MODBUS/RTU Master] communication driver for communication with the connector conversion box. Page 285 Handy GOT side settings

Item Set value Baud rate 19200bps

Data length 8bit

Stop bit 1bit

Parity Even

Host address 1

32 bit order LH Order

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 285

28

4. Make the controller settings of the project data to be transferred to the handy GOT. Controller setting Configure the settings to connect the GOT by Ethernet. Set all PLCs which the GOT may be connected to via Ethernet. In this example, [Net No.] is fixed to 1.

Make the MODBUS/RTU communication settings using RS-232 to connect the GOT to the connector conversion box.

6 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

Station No. switching device setting Select [Use Station No. Switching] to set the device that specifies the station No. of the connected PLC. In this example, the GOT internal device GD500 is set.

5. Set the trigger action function. Operation trigger setting Set the GOT internal device GB40 (always ON during the GOT operation) as the trigger of the target action. Select [Common] [Trigger Action] from the menu to display the [Trigger Action] dialog.

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 287

28

Click the [Add] button in the [Project] tab.

In the [Trigger] tab, set [ON] for [Trigger Type] of Trigger 1. Set [GB40] for [Trigger Device].

Operation setting Store the value set by the rotary switch to the station No. switching device (GD500). The station No. switching device stores unsigned 16-bit data. The 8 higher-order bits represent a network number, and the 8 lower-order bits represent a station number. Configure the following settings. In the [Action] tab, set [Data Set 16bit] for [Action] and [Unsigned BIN16] for [Data]. Set a station No. switching device [GD500] to [Device]. To set the rotary switch value of the connector conversion box, select [Indirect]. Click the [...] button to display the [Select CH No.] dialog.

8 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

In the [Select CH No.] dialog, select [MODBUS Slave(GOT:Master)]) to display the device setting dialog.

Input 3-00001 to Device. Select [Host] for Network. Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. 3-00001 is a fixed register to access to the rotary switch of the connector conversion box by the MODBUS communication.

In the [Action] tab, check that [@2 300001] is displayed in [Indirect]. Tick the check box of [Fixed] and enter 256. Since [Net No.] is fixed to 1, 256 is entered. For [Fixed], enter the value calculated by the expression 256 [Net No.]. Click the [OK] button when entering is completed.

After checking that both Trigger and Action are set, click the [OK] button.

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 289

29

6. Set the project data to use the station No. switching. Select [Screen] [Screen Property] from the menu to display the [Screen Property] dialog. Tick the check box of [Switch Station No.] in the [Basic] tab. Perform this operation in all screens where the station No. is switched.

7. Place objects on the screen. Finally, place objects on the screen. Select [Host] for [Network]. When the station No. switching device value is 0, the host is monitored.

Transfer the project data to the GOT and check the operation.

0 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

Connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB-37S)

Specifications General specifications Other specifications are the same as Handy GOT.

Power supply specifications Other specifications are the same as Handy GOT.

Internal relay contact specifications

Item Specifications Operating ambient temperature

0 C to 55 C

Storage ambient temperature

-20C to 60C

Vibration resistance When installing DIN rail Frequency Acceleration Half-amplitude Sweep Count

5 Hz to 8.4 Hz 1.75 mm 10 times each in X, Y and Z directions8.4 Hz to 150 Hz 4.9 m/s2

Item Specifications Input power supply voltage 24 V DC (+10% -15%)

Power consumption 13.7 W or less (570 mA/24 V DC) (When including the consumption current of Handy GOT)

Connector conversion box only

2.2 W (90 mA/24 V DC) (When excluding the consumption current of Handy GOT)

Inrush current 25 A or less (at max. load) 2 ms

Permissible instantaneous power failure time

Within 5 ms

Item Contact rating Specifications Operation switch SW1 to SW6

10 mA/24 V DC (resistance load only)

Each contact coordinates the operation switch status of Pressed (close)/Not pressed (open). When the external cable is not connected, contacts are always open regardless of the switch status.

Emergency stop switch ES1 to ES3

1 A/24 V DC (resistance load) 0.3 A/24 V DC (induction load)

Each contact coordinates the emergency stop switch status of Pushed (open)/Return (close). When the external cable is not connected, contacts are always open regardless of the emergency stop switch status.

Grip switch DSW1, DSW2

1 A/24 V DC (resistance load) 0.3 A/24 V DC (induction load)

Each contact coordinates the grip switch status of Pressed (close)/Not pressed (open). When the external cable is not connected, contacts are always open regardless of the grip switch status.

Keylock switch (2-position switch) KSWC, KSW1, KSW2

1 A/24 V DC (resistance load) 0.3 A/24 V DC (induction load)

Each contact coordinates the position of the keylock switch. When the key is on the left: KSW1 and KSWC are short-circuited. When the key is on the right: KSW2 and KSWC are short-circuited.

When the external cable is not connected, contacts are always open regardless of the keylock switch.

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 291

29

Part name

No. Name Specifications 1) Connector for Handy GOT (D-sub 37-pin (female)) Connects the Handy GOT through an external cable.

2) Power switch Supplies the power to the Handy GOT, when this switch is set to ON. Turn off the power when attaching or detaching the Handy GOT.

3) Mounting hole Used to fix the connector conversion box to a panel directly or to a board with the mounting fixtures. For M3 screw

4) Terminal block 1 Connects the GT16H-CNB-37S, the 24 V DC power supply of Handy GOT and the operation switch (SW1 to 6). With M3 terminal screws and the cover

5) Terminal block 2 Connects the emergency stop switch of the Handy GOT (ES1, 2, and 3), the grip switch (DSW-1, 2) and the keylock switch (KSW-1, 2). With M3 terminal screws and the cover

6) External connection device communication connector (Ethernet: RJ45 modular jack)

Connects the external connection device via Ethernet with using a LAN cable.

6

4

5

Weight: Approx. 0.2 kg (0.4 lb)

When the terminal block cover is open

2)

3) 1)

3)

3)

3)

3)

2 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

External dimensions 82 (3.23) 37.5 (1.48)

11 3

(4 .4

5)

Unit: mm (inch)

When the terminal block cover is open

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 293

29

Installing a connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB-37S) Install a connector conversion box on the panel directly or with a mounting bracket.

Mounting on the panel face (When setting the connector for Handy GOT connection and the power supply switch on the panel surface)

1. Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions shown below.

2. Fit the connector conversion box into the installation holes from the back side of the panel, and fix the box with M3 screws (prepared by user).

In the connector conversion box, thread of M3, 6 mm in depth is cut in each mounting hole. Prepare four M3 mounting screws separately while considering the thickness of the panel face. Tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.49 Nm to 0.68 Nm). Overtightening the screws may cause damage. To connect a PLC connection cable, make sure that no object is located within 50 mm from the bottom side of the connector. Keep a space of 25 mm or more on both sides of the connector conversion box.

4-3.5

Panel cut area

64

91

25 60

Unit: mm (inch)28+10 (Panel opening)

0. 5

0. 5

+ 1 0

(P an el o pe ni ng )

+0.5 0

0.5 Drill

(3 .5 8 )

+ 0. 04 0

(0.14 )+0.02 0

(2.52 )+0.02 0

(1.1 )+0.04 0

(0 .9 8 )

+ 0. 02 0

(2 .3 6 )

+ 0. 02 0

Thread depth 6 (0.23)

25 (0.98)

50 (1 .9 7)

M3 screw x 4 pcs (prepared by user)

Panel face

25 (0.98)

Unit: mm (inch)

4 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

Installation with the mounting bracket 1. Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions shown below.

2. Install the supplied mounting bracket on the connector conversion box. Tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.49 Nm to 0.68 Nm). Overtightening the screws may cause damage.

3. Mount the connector conversion box on the control panel. Tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.69 Nm to 0.88 Nm). Overtightening the screws may cause damage.

32 0. 5

3-4+0.50Drill

Unit: mm (inch)

(0.16 )+0.02 0

(1 .2 6 )

+ 0. 02 0

32 0. 5

(1 .2 6 )

+ 0. 02 0

Mounting bracket (accessory)

Mounting screw (accessory) M3 3

10(0.39)

32 (1 .2 6)

84 (3 .3 1)

20(0.79)

Connector conversion box

Mounting bracket

M4 screw and nut x 3 sets (prepared by user)

Unit: mm (inch)

32 (1 .2 6)

3-4.5(0.18)

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 295

29

Pin layout and signal names of the connector and terminal blocks The D-sub 37-pin connector of the external cable is converted to the following terminal blocks and the PLC connection connector (modular jack).

C on ne ct or f or H an dy G O T

M2.6 (Metric screw thread)

D -S ub 3 7 pi n (f em al e)

1 19

20 37

External connection device communication connector

Ethernet

RJ45

1 2

4

6

8

10

12

3

5

7

9

11

Terminal block 1 1 2

4

6

8

10

12

14

3

5

7

9

11

13

(For power supply and Handy GOT operation switch)

Terminal block 2 (For emargency stop switch and selector switch)

6 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

Terminal block 1, 2

*1 Use C or later version of GT11H-C -37P.

GT11H-C-37P *1 GT16H-CNB-37S Application

Connector for Handy GOT connection Terminal block

D-sub 37-pin Signal name 36, 37 DC24V+ Terminal block 1 1 24 V DC power supply "+

1 FG 2 Frame ground

18, 19 DC24V- 3 24 V DC power supply "-

N.C 4 Not used

N.C 5

34 SW6 6 For Operation switch

33 SW5 7

16 SW4 8

15 SW3 9

14 SW2 10

13 SW1 11

12 SW-COM 12

31 ES3 Terminal block 2 1 For Emergency stop switch

32 ES3 2

N.C 3 Not used

30 KSW-2 4 For Keylock switch

29 KSW-1 5

28 KSW-C 6

27 DSW-2 7 For Grip switch

26 DSW-2 8

25 DSW-1 9

24 DSW-1 10

23 ES2 11 For Emergency stop switch

22 ES2 12

21 ES1 13

20 ES1 14

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 297

29

Connector conversion box (GT11H-CNB-37S)

Specifications General specifications Other specifications are the same as Handy GOT.

Power supply specifications Other specifications are the same as Handy GOT.

Internal relay contact specifications

Item Specifications Operating ambient temperature

0 C to 55 C

Storage ambient temperature

-20C to 60C

Vibration resistance When installing DIN rail Frequency Acceleration Half-amplitude Sweep Count

5 Hz to 8.4 Hz 1.75 mm 10 times each in X, Y and Z directions8.4 Hz to 150 Hz 4.9 m/s2

Item Specifications Input power supply voltage 24 V DC (+10% -15%)

Power consumption 13.7 W or less (570 mA/24 V DC) (When including the consumption current of Handy GOT)

Connector conversion box only

2.2 W (90 mA/24 V DC) (When excluding the consumption current of Handy GOT)

Inrush current 25 A or less (at max. load) 2 ms

Permissible instantaneous power failure time

Within 5 ms

Item Contact rating Specifications Operation switch SW1 to SW6

10 mA/24 V DC (resistance load only)

Each contact coordinates the operation switch status of Pressed (close)/Not pressed (open). When the external cable is not connected, contacts are always open regardless of the switch status.

Emergency stop switch ES1 to ES3

1 A/24 V DC (resistance load) 0.3 A/24 V DC (induction load)

Each contact coordinates the emergency stop switch status of Pushed (open)/Return (close). When the external cable is not connected, contacts are always open regardless of the emergency stop switch status.

Grip switch DSW1, DSW2

1 A/24 V DC (resistance load) 0.3 A/24 V DC (induction load)

Each contact coordinates the grip switch status of Pressed (close)/Not pressed (open). When the external cable is not connected, contacts are always open regardless of the grip switch status.

Keylock switch (2-position switch) KSWC, KSW1, KSW2

1 A/24 V DC (resistance load) 0.3 A/24 V DC (induction load)

Each contact coordinates the position of the keylock switch. When the key is on the left: KSW1 and KSWC are short-circuited. When the key is on the right: KSW2 and KSWC are short-circuited.

When the external cable is not connected, contacts are always open regardless of the keylock switch.

8 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

Part name

*1 The cable for the ES-3 signal is provided in the connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S regardless of whether the terminal name ES-3 is printed on the box or not.

External dimensions

No. Name Specifications 1) Connector for Handy GOT (D-sub 37-pin (female)) Connects the Handy GOT through an external cable.

2) Power switch Supplies the power to the Handy GOT. When this switch is set to ON, the power is supplied. Turn off the power when attaching or detaching the Handy GOT.

3) Mounting hole Used to fix the connector conversion box to a panel directly or to a board with the mounting fixtures. For M3 screw.

4) Terminal block 1 Connects the GT11H-CNB-37S, the 24 V DC power supply of Handy GOT, and the operation switch (SW1 to 6). With M3 terminal screws and the cover

5) Terminal block 2 Connects the operation switch of the Handy GOT (SW1 to 6), the grip switch (DSW-1, 2) and the keylock switch (KSW-1, 2). With M3 terminal screws and the cover

6) Connector for PLC (RS-422: D-sub 9-pin female) Connects the PLC through a PLC connection cable. RS-422 and RS-232 are not available simultaneously.7) Connector for PLC (RS-232: D-sub 9-pin male)

2)

3) 1) 6) 7)

4) 5)

Terminal name: ES3*1

3)

3)

3)

3)

When the terminal block cover is open

Weight: Approx. 0.17kg (0.4 lb)

82(3.23) 37.5(1.48)

11 3(

4. 45

)

When the terminal block cover is open

Unit: mm (inch)

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 299

30

Installing a connector conversion box (GT11H-CNB-37S) Install a connector conversion box on the panel directly or with a mounting bracket.

Mounting on the panel face (When setting the connector for Handy GOT connection and the power supply switch on the panel surface)

1. Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions shown below.

2. Fit the connector conversion box into the installation holes from the back side of the panel, and fix the box with M3 screws (prepared by user).

In the connector conversion box, thread of M3, 6 mm in depth is cut in each mounting hole. Prepare four M3 mounting screws separately while considering the thickness of the panel face. Tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.49 Nm to 0.68 Nm). Overtightening the screws may cause damage. To connect a PLC connection cable, make sure that no object is located within 100 mm from the bottom side of the connector. Keep a space of 25 mm or more on both sides of the connector conversion box.

4-3.5

Panel cut area

64

91

25 60

Unit: mm (inch)28+10 (Panel opening)

0. 5

0. 5

+ 1 0

(P an el o pe ni ng )

+0.5 0

0.5 Drill

(3 .5 8 )

+ 0. 04 0

(0.14 )+0.02 0

(2.52 )+0.02 0

(1.1 )+0.04 0

(0 .9 8 )

+ 0. 02 0

(2 .3 6 )

+ 0. 02 0

100 (3.93) M3 screw x 4 pcs (prepared by user) Panel face

Thread depth 6 (0.23)

25 (0.98)

25 (0.98)

Unit: mm (inch)

0 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

Installation with the mounting bracket 1. Open installation holes on the panel with the dimensions shown below.

2. Install the supplied mounting bracket on the connector conversion box. Tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.49 Nm to 0.68 Nm). Overtightening the screws may cause damage.

3. Mount the connector conversion box on the control panel. Overtightening the screws may cause damage. Tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.69 Nm to 0.88 Nm).

32 0. 5

3-4+0.50Drill

Unit: mm (inch)

(0.16 )+0.02 0

(1 .2 6 )

+ 0. 02 0

32 0. 5

(1 .2 6 )

+ 0. 02 0

Mounting bracket (accessory)

Mounting screw (accessory) M3 3

M4 screw and nut x 3 sets (prepared by user)

Connector conversion box

84 (3 .3 1)

32 (1 .2 6)

32 (1 .2 6)

Mounting bracket 20(0.79) 10(0.39)

Unit: mm (inch)

3-4.5(0.18)

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 301

30

Pin layout and signal names of the connector and terminal blocks The D-sub 37-pin connector of the external cable is converted to the following terminal blocks and the PLC connection connector (D-sub 9 pins).

RS-422 connector (D-sub 9- pin female) for connecting to a PLC

RS-232 connector (D-sub 9-pin male) for connecting to a PLC

GT11H-C-37P GT11H-CNB-37S Application

Connector for Handy GOT connection Connector for PLC RS- 422D-sub 37-pin Signal name

2 TXD+(SDA) 1 Signal line for PLC communication (For wiring, refer to the chapter corresponding to the connected controller.) GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1

6 RXD+(RDA) 2

4 RTS+(RSA) 3

8 CTS+(CSA) 4

10 SG 5

3 TXD-(SDB) 6

7 RXD-(RDB) 7

5 RTS-(RSB) 8

9 CTS-(CSB) 9

GT11H-C-37P GT11H-CNB-37S Application

Connector for Handy GOT connection Connector for PLC RS- 232D-sub 37-pin Signal name

N.C 1 Signal line for PLC communication (For wiring, refer to the chapter corresponding to the connected controller.) GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1

4 RXD(RD) 2

2 TXD(SD) 3

3 DTR(ER) 4

10 SG 5

5 DSR(DR) 6

6 RTS(RS) 7

7 CTS(CS) 8

N.C 9

M2.6 (Metric screw thread) #4-40UNC (Inch screw thread)

1 19

20 37

Connector for PLC RS-422

D-Sub 9pin female

15

69

Connector for PLC RS-232

D-Sub 9pin male

51

96

1 2

4

6

8

10

12

3

5

7

9

11

1 2

4

6

8

10

12

14

3

5

7

9

11

13

Terminal name: ES3*1

C on ne ct or f or H an dy G O T

D -S ub 3 7 pi n (f em al e)

M2.6 (Metric screw thread)

Terminal block 1 (For power supply and

Handy GOT operation switch)

Terminal block 2 (For emargency stop switch and selector switch)

2 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box

7

Terminal block 1, 2

*1 The cable for the ES-3 signal is provided in the connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S regardless of whether the terminal name ES-3 is printed on the box or not.

*2 Use C or later version of GT11H-C -37P. *3 ES-3 is not provided for B or earlier version of GT11H-C -37P.

GT11H-C-37P *2 GT11H-CNB-37S Application

Connector for Handy GOT connection Terminal block

D-sub 37-pin Signal name 36, 37 DC24V+ Terminal block 1 1 24 V DC power supply "+

1 FG 2 Frame ground

18, 19 DC24V- 3 24 V DC power supply "-

N.C 4 Not used

N.C 5

34 SW6 6 For Operation switch

33 SW5 7

16 SW4 8

15 SW3 9

14 SW2 10

13 SW1 11

12 SW-COM 12

31 ES3 *3 Terminal block 2 1 For Emergency stop switch

32 ES3 *3 2

N.C 3 Not used

30 KSW-2 4 For Keylock switch

29 KSW-1 5

28 KSW-C 6

27 DSW-2 7 For Grip switch

26 DSW-2 8

25 DSW-1 9

24 DSW-1 10

23 ES2 11 For Emergency stop switch

22 ES2 12

21 ES1 13

20 ES1 14

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.1 Connector Conversion Box 303

30

7.2 Emergency Stop Switch Guard Cover The emergency stop switch guard cover is attached to prevent the emergency stop SW from being operated incorrectly.

Applicable emergency stop switch guard cover The following emergency stop switch guard cover is applicable for the Handy GOT. : Usable, -: Not usable

Installing procedure 1. Remove the Handy GOT from the device or turn the entire system power off. Make sure that operating the emergency stop switch of the Handy GOT does not affect the system during the installation of the emergency stop switch guard cover.

2. Align the installation hole of the emergency stop switch guard cover with the relevant installation hole on the Handy GOT. Tighten the supplied screw (M36) within the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) to fix the cover. Too much tightening may cause damage. Example) GT2506HS-V

Product name Model name Contents GT2506HS-V GT2505HS-V Emergency stop switch guard cover

GT16H-60ESCOV Mounting screw (M3 6) 1 (accessory)

GT14H-50ESCOV

4 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.2 Emergency Stop Switch Guard Cover

7

7.3 Wall-mounting Attachment The wall-mounting attachment is available to fix the handy GOT on the wall, stand or panel.

Applicable wall-mounting attachment The following wall-mounting attachment is applicable for Handy GOT. : Usable, -: Not usable

Mounting

Attaching the wall-mounting attachment on the panel surface Processing the panel surface (wall surface or stand surface) Open an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions shown below.

Product name Model Contents GT2506HS-V GT2505HS-V Wall-mounting attachment GT14H-50ATT Mounting screw (M4-14), Nut (M4)

600.5(2.360.02) Drill 4-50.5 (0.20.02)

10 0

0. 5(

3. 94 0

.0 2)

Unit: mm (inch)

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.3 Wall-mounting Attachment 305

30

Attaching the wall-mounting attachment on the panel surface Fit the wall-mounting attachment on the panel front face, and fix it with M4 screws and nuts (which are packed together). Holes of 4.5 are drilled for mounting the wall-mounting attachment Tighten the screws within the specified torque range (0.69 Nm to 0.88 Nm). Overtightening the screws may cause damage. Make sure that interfering objects are not present in the downward direction so that connection of the external connection cable will not be hindered. When opening and closing the environment-resistant interface cover (for using the USB/SD card connector located inside the cover) while the handy GOT is attached, make sure that interfering objects are not present in the upward direction.

6 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.3 Wall-mounting Attachment

7

Attachment of handy GOT The figure shows an image of attaching the handy GOT to the wall-hanging fixture.

Post

Panel surface

Post

Mounted image as viewed from the side

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.3 Wall-mounting Attachment 307

30

7.4 Overview of Communication Cable The following communication cables are available.

External cable: This cable connects Handy GOT and a connector conversion box. To use the external cables which include unfastened cables on one side (GT11H-C ), process the cables according to the application. This cable must be prepared to use the Handy GOT. PLC connection cable: A cable which connects a connector conversion box and a controller. There are several types which can be selected according to a controller. However, this cable must be prepared by the user depending on the controller to be used.

External cablePLC connection cable

External cable

Relay cable External cable

Controller

Connector Conversion Box

Handy GOT

8 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.4 Overview of Communication Cable

7

: Usable, -: Not usable.

*1 Use C or later version.

Name Model Length GT2506HS-V GT2505HS-V Remark External cable GT16H-C30-42P 3 m For connection to the 42-pin

connector conversion boxGT16H-C60-42P 6 m

GT16H-C100-42P 10 m

GT14H-C30-42P 3 m

GT14H-C60-42P 6 m

GT14H-C100-42P 10 m

GT16H-C30-37PE 3 m For connection to the 37-pin connector conversion boxGT16H-C60-37PE 6 m

GT16H-C100-37PE 10 m

GT11H-C30-37P *1 3 m For connection to the 37-pin connector conversion box For connecting to a PLC cable (37 pins)

GT11H-C60-37P *1 6 m

GT11H-C100-37P *1 10 m

GT11H-C30 *1 3 m For connection to the unfastened relay cableGT11H-C60 *1 6 m

GT11H-C100 *1 10 m

Relay cable (for connecting the external cable and a PLC)

GT11H-C15R4-8P *1 1.5 m For connecting the FXCPU (MINI-DIN 8 pins at the PLC end)

GT11H-C15R4-25P *1 1.5 m For connecting an A/QnACPU, FX1, FX2, or FX2C PLC (D-sub 25-pin at the PLC end)

GT11H-C15R2-6P *1 1.5 m For connecting a QCPU (MINI-DIN 6 pins at the PLC end)

PLC connection cable (for connecting between PLCs and connector conversion box)

Select or prepare appropriate cables for the communication method and controllers. For the details, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.4 Overview of Communication Cable 309

31

Selection of RS-232 connection and RS-422/485 connection (GT2506HS-V) GT2506HS-V can be connected to a controller using the RS-232 or RS-422/485 connection.

For GT2506HS-V, the RS-232 or RS-422/485 connection can be used with the Ethernet connection.

To select the RS-232 or RS-422/485 connection, connect the cable connector for PLC communication in the environmental protection back cover to the connector of either connections. For the RS-232 connection, connect the cable connector for PLC communication to RS-232 connector. For the RS-422/485 connection, connect the cable connector for PLC communication to RS-422/485 connector. The cable connector for PLC communication is connected to the RS-422/485 connector at factory shipment.

The selected connection method (RS-232 connection or RS-422 connection) is applied when the Handy GOT power is turned on. The connector can be checked through the window when the environmental protection back cover is closed. It can be used as a method to check the connection type from the outside of Handy GOT.

An external cable can be used for both connections.

Precautions for switching between the RS-232 connection and the RS-422/485 connection Before connecting or disconnecting the cable connector for PLC communication, make sure to turn off the Handy GOT. Not doing so may cause a failure.

Cable connector for PLC communication

RS-232 connector RS-422/485 connector

Environmental protection back cover window

0 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.4 Overview of Communication Cable

7

Selection of the RS-232 connection, RS-422 connection, or Ethernet connection GT2505HS-V can be connected to a controller using the RS-232, RS-422, or Ethernet connection. Select the RS-232 connection, RS-422 connection, or Ethernet connection by using the cable connector for the PLC communication in the environmental protection back cover. For the RS-232 connection, connect the cable connector for PLC communication to RS-232 connector. For the RS-422 connection, connect the PLC communication cable connector with the RS-422 connector. For the Ethernet connection, connect the PLC communication cable connector with the Ethernet connector. The Ethernet connection is selected at factory shipment.

The selected connection method (RS-232 connection or RS-422 connection) at the Ethernet connection is applied when the Handy GOT power is turned on. The connector can be checked through the window when the environmental protection back cover is closed. It can be used as a method to check the connection type from the outside of Handy GOT.

The available connection type differs depending on the external cable to be used. GT14H-C-42P: Ethernet connection GT11H-C-37P: RS-232, RS-422, and Ethernet connection GT11H-C: RS-232 connection and RS-422 connection

Precautions for switching among the RS-232, RS-422, and Ethernet connections Before connecting or disconnecting the cable connector for PLC communication, make sure to turn off the Handy GOT. Not doing so may cause a failure.

Cable connector for PLC communication

Environmental protection back cover opened

Environmental protection back cover window

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.4 Overview of Communication Cable 311

31

7.5 External Cable, Relay Cable Pin layout and signal names of the external cable

GT11H-C-37P (Use C or later version.)

Layout and color-coding for the core wires of GT11H-C (Use C or later version.)

D-SUB 37pin (male)

(From the engagement face)

1 19

20 37

Group(2) AWG28

BK R BK

R

W

GR Y

BWBLGY O

PL

PK

YG LB

Cross section of the cable

Group(4) AWG20

Group(1) AWG28

Group(3) AWG25

Colored differently

Untied wire (31-core type)

A

BInsulation color Dot mark color Dot mark type

A

Arrangement of color (color type)

Black Red White Green Yellow Brown Blue Gray Orange Purple Pink Yellow green Light blue

BK: R : W : GR:

Y : BW: BL: GY: O : PL: PK: YG: LB:

2 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.5 External Cable, Relay Cable

7

Signal names of GT11H-C-37P and GT11H-C

*1 ES3 is not provided for version B or earlier of GT11H-C-37P and GT11H-C.

External cable Communication, power, operation switch signal name

Application

GT11H-C-37P GT11H-C RS-422 RS-232C

D-sub pin No. Core wire Wire diameter

Wire color (color type)

1 Shield FG (Shield) Frame ground

2 Core wire 1) AWG28 For Emergency stop switch

W/R (A) TXD+(SDA) TXD(SD) Signal line for PLC communication3 W/BK (A) TXD-(SDB) DTR(ER)

4 GY/R (A) RTS+(RSA) RXD(RD)

5 GY/BK (A) RTS-(RSB) DSR(DR)

6 O/R (A) RXD+(RDA) RTS(RS)

7 O/BK (A) RXD-(RDB) CTS(CS)

8 Y/R (A) CTS+(CSA) N.C.

9 Y/BK (A) CTS-(CSB) N.C.

10 AWG28 PK/R (A) SG Signal ground

11 N.C. Not used

12 Core wire 2) AWG28 W/R (B) SW-COM (common) For Operation switch

13 W/BK (B) SW1

14 GY/R (B) SW2

15 GY/BK (B) SW3

16 PK/BK (A) SW4

17 N.C. Not used

18 Core wire 4) AWG20 Black DC24G 24 V DC power supply "-

19 Transition wiring with 18

DC24G

20 Core wire 3) AWG25 Purple ES1 For Emergency stop switch

21 Orange ES1

22 Gray ES2

23 Blue ES2

24 Brown DSW-1 For Grip switch

25 Yellow DSW-1

26 Green DSW-2

27 Red DSW-2

28 White KSW-C (common) For Keylock switch

29 Black KSW-1

30 Light blue KSW-2

31 Yellow green ES3 *1 For emergency stop switch

32 Pink ES3 *1

33 Core wire 2) AWG28 O/R (B) SW5 For Operation switch

34 O/BK (B) SW6

35 N.C. Not used

36 Core wire 4) AWG20 Red DC24V+ 24 V DC power supply "+

37 Transition wiring with 36

DC24V+

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.5 External Cable, Relay Cable 313

31

Pin layout of the relay cable

GT11H-C15R4-8P relay cable (Use C or later version.) This cable is usable for connecting the following controllers. FX0 series FX0S series FX0N series FX1S series FX1N(C) series FX2N(C) series FX3G(C) series FX3U(C) series

*1 ES-3 is not provided for B or earlier version of the cables.

Connecting to external cable

To PLC MINI-DIN 8pin

For FG

For operation switches

For power supply

500 (19.69)

1500 (59.06)

D-SUB 37pin female connector (panel face mounting type)

Accessories Jack socket Nut 2 for each

Ferrite core 1 Ferrite core 2

Ferrite core 3

Label

Unit: mm (inch)

Connector for external cable connection

D-SUB 37pin, female (From the engagement face)

19 1

37 20

12 13 14 15 16 18

MINI-DIN 8pin, male (From the engagement face)

5

1 2

3 4

6

7

8

1 2 3

7 8 9

6

2 1 7

5 6 4

310 SHELL

FG

19 20

MINI-DIN 8Pin, male

D-SUB 37pin, female

Untied wires Wire for power supply, operation switch and emergency stop switch

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 DC24VG DC24VG ES1 ES1 ES2 ES2 DSW-1 DSW-1 DSW-2 DSW-2 KSW-C KSW-1 KSW-2

SW5 SW6 DC24V+ DC24V+

ES3 *1

ES3 *1

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 36 37

SW-COM

Connector for FX0, FX0S, FX1S, FX0N, FX1N(C), FX2N(C), FX3G(C) or FX3U(C) connection

4 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.5 External Cable, Relay Cable

7

GT11H-C15R4-25P relay cable Use C or later version. This cable is usable for connecting the following controllers. ACPU QnACPU FX1 series FX2 series FX2C series

*1 ES-3 is not provided for B or earlier version of the cables.

Connecting to external cable

To PLC D-Sub 25pin

500 (19.69)

1500 (59.06)

D-SUB 37pin female connector (panel face mounting type)

Accessories Jack socket Nut

2 for each

For FG

For operation switches

For power supply

Ferrite core 1 Ferrite core 2

Ferrite core 3

Label

D-SUB 25pin, male (From the engagement face)

1 13

14 25

Connecting to external cable

D-SUB 37pin female connector (panel face mounting type)

19 1

37 20

1 2 3

7 8 9

6

10

FG

D-SUB 25pin, male

D-SUB 37pin, female

2

4

3 16

18

17

15

7

5

8 Hood

12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20

4 5

Untied wires Wire for power supply, operation switch and emergency stop switch

SW-COM SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 DC24VG DC24VG ES1 ES1 ES2 ES2 DSW-1 DSW-1 DSW-2 DSW-2 KSW-C KSW-1 KSW-2

SW5 SW6 DC24V+ DC24V+

ES3 *1

ES3 *1

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 36 37

21

Connector for QnA, A, FX1, FX2 or FX2C series connection

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.5 External Cable, Relay Cable 315

31

GT11H-C15R2-6P relay cable (Use C or later version.) The cable is usable for connecting a QCPU.

*1 ES-3 is not provided for B or earlier version of the cables.

Connecting to external cable

To PLC MINI-DIN 6pin

D-SUB 37pin female connector (panel face mounting type)

Accessories Jack socket Nut

2 for each

For FG

For operation switches

For power supply

Ferrite core 1 Ferrite core 2

Ferrite core 3

Label 1500 (59.06)

500 (19.69)

Unit: mm (inch)

Connector for external cable connection

D-SUB 37pin, female (From the engagement face)

19 1

37 20

1 1

SHELL

FG

MINI-DIN 6pin, male

D-SUB 37pin, female

4

1 2

3 5

6

Connector for Q series connection

MINI-DIN 6Pin, male (From the engagement face)

Untied wires Wire for power supply, operation switch and emergency stop switch

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 DC24VG DC24VG ES1 ES1 ES2 ES2 DSW-1 DSW-1 DSW-2 DSW-2 KSW-C KSW-1 KSW-2

SW5 SW6 DC24V+ DC24V+

ES3 *1

ES3 *1

2 3 4 5 7 10

12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 36 37

5 2 6

3

SW-COM

6 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.5 External Cable, Relay Cable

7

Connector specifications

Connector for GT11H-C -37P The following connector or equivalent connector is used to connect the relay cable for the external cable (GT11H-C - 37P). For the connector to be connected to GT11H-C -37P and its cover, use products applicable to the GT11HC.

Controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the controller. For details, refer to the manual of the controller to be used.

Installing and removing of external cable

Installation procedure of external cable (GT2506HS-V) 1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Insert the connector adjusting the triangle marks of the main unit side connector and cable side connector.

3. After inserting the connector, push the lock lever. The connectors are locked after the lever is pushed into.

Connector model Connector type Manufacturer 17JE-23370-02(D8A2)-CG D-sub 37-pin (male)

M2.6 metric screw thread DDK Ltd.

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.5 External Cable, Relay Cable 317

31

Removal procedure of the external cable (GT2506HS-V) 1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Pull up the lock lever with inserting a flat-blade screwdriver into the release hole of the lock lever.

3. Hold the coupling and pull the connector toward the cable side to remove the cable.

Installation procedure of external cable (GT2505HS-V) 1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Insert the connector adjusting the triangle marks of the main unit side connector and cable side connector. (The connectors are locked after the lever is inserted.)

Removal procedure (GT2505HS-V) 1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Pull out the cable while turning the triangle mark side of the cable side connector to the left.

Flat screwdriver

Coupling

A cable or device (For example: a relay cable)

8 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.5 External Cable, Relay Cable

7

Installation procedure of external cable (GT16H-CNB-42S) 1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Insert the connector adjusting the triangle marks of the main unit side connector and cable side connector.

3. After inserting the connector, push the lock lever. The connectors are locked after the lever is pushed into.

Removal procedure (GT16H-CNB-42S) 1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

2. Pull up the lock lever with inserting a flat-blade screwdriver into the release hole of the lock lever.

3. Hold the coupling and pull the connector toward the cable side to remove the cable.

Flat screwdriver

Coupling

7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.5 External Cable, Relay Cable 319

32

MEMO

0 7 OPTION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR HANDY GOT 7.5 External Cable, Relay Cable

8

8 WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION Page 323 Wiring of External Power Supply Page 324 Power Supply Wiring to the GOT Page 326 Grounding Page 330 Wiring Inside and Outside the Control Panel Page 331 Attaching a Surge Suppressor to Control Equipment Page 332 Grounding the Extension Unit

This section describes wiring to the GOT power supply section. For the connection to a controller, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 that covers the controller used For external dimensions of connection cable, refer to the following. Page 387 APPENDICES

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring. Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions. When grounding the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section, note the following points. Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction. GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q Make sure to ground the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section solely for the GOT (ground resistance: 100 or less, ground cable diameter: 1.6 mm or more). (GT2705-V, GT25-W, GT2505-V, GT2107-W, and GT2105-Q do not have the LG terminal.) GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P Make sure to ground the FG terminal of the GOT power supply section with a ground resistance of 100 or less. (For GT2104-PMBLS and GT2103-PMBLS, grounding is unnecessary.) Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product. Not doing so can cause a fire or failure. Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT. Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.

WARNING

Plug the communication cable into the connector to be connected, and tighten the mounting screws and the terminal screws in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

CAUTION

8 WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION 321

32

General preventive measures against noise There are two kinds of noises: Radiated noise that is transmitted into the air and Conductive noise that is directly transmitted along connected lines. Countermeasures must be taken considering both kinds of noises and referring to the following 3 points. Protecting against noise (a) Keep signal lines away from noise sources such as a power cable or a high-power drive circuit. (b) Shield the signal lines. Reducing generated noise (a) Use a noise filter, etc. to reduce the level of the noise generated due to a source such as a high-power motor drive circuit. (b) Attach a surge suppressor on the terminal of the molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), electromagnetic contactor, relay, solenoid valve, or induction motor to suppress the noise. Releasing noise to the ground (a) Make sure to connect the ground cable to the ground. (b) Use a short and thick cable to lower its ground resistance. (c) Ground the power system and the control system separately.

2 8 WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION

8

8.1 Wiring of External Power Supply

Separating the power supply system Carry out wiring so that the power supply system is separated into the GOT, I/O equipment, and power equipment as shown below. When frequent noise is identified, connect an isolation transformer.

Separating the power cables from the main circuit line and the I/O signal line Separate the 100 V AC, 200 V AC, and 24 V DC cables from the main circuit lines (high voltage, large current) and I/O signal lines. Keep a distance of 100 mm or more between them as a guide.

Treatment on power cables Twist 100 V AC, 200 V AC, and 24 V DC cables as closely as possible, and connect the cables with the minimum length between the power supply and each device.

For GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, and GT2105-Q Use a thick wire (cross-sectional area: about 0.75 mm2 to 2 mm2) for less voltage drop. Use the solderless terminal for M3, and tighten the terminal firmly with a torque of 0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm.

For GT2104-R, GT2104-P, and GT2103-P Connect a stranded or solid wire directly, or use the rod terminal with an insulation sleeve. Tighten the terminal firmly with a torque of 0.22 Nm to 0.25 Nm.

Connecting the lightning surge absorber As measures against surge due to lightning, connect a lightning surge absorber as shown below.

Separate the grounding of the lightning surge absorber (E1) from the grounding of the GOT (E2). Select an appropriate lightning surge absorber that has the maximum allowable circuit voltage withstanding the maximum power supply voltage.

GOT

I/O equipment

Main circuit equipment

GOT power

Isolation transformerMain power

I/O power

Main circuit power

T1

AC

E1

E2

GOT

Lightening surge absorber

8 WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION 8.1 Wiring of External Power Supply 323

32

8.2 Power Supply Wiring to the GOT The following shows the examples of wiring the power cable, ground cable and other cables to the GOT power supply terminal.

INPUT 100-240VAC

GOT

INPUT 24VDC

Fuse For 100 V AC

+-

Ground cable Grounding

For 24 V DC GOT

GT27, GT25, GT23

+-

For 24 V DC (GT2705, GT25-W) GOT

INPUT 24VDC

Ground cable Grounding

For GT2104, GT2103

GOT power supply terminal

Ground cable Grounding

For GT2107-W, GT2105

GOT power supply terminal

24VDC 10% 15%

24VDC 10% 15%

4 8 WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION 8.2 Power Supply Wiring to the GOT

8

Precautions (GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105) Treatment on power cables For 100 V AC, 200 V AC, and 24 V DC cables, use thick wires as much as possible (Cable cross section: 0.75 mm2 to 2 mm2), and make sure to twist them to the terminals. To prevent a short circuit due to loose screws, use a solderless terminal with an insulation sleeve.

Grounding After connecting the LG terminal and the FG terminal, make sure to connect them to the ground. Otherwise, the system is susceptible to noise. The LG terminal has a potential equal to a half of the input voltage. Therefore, touching the terminal may lead to an electric shock. For GT2705-V, GT25-W, GT2505-V, GT2107-W, and GT2105, ground only the FG terminal because the models do not have the LG terminal.

Precautions (GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P) Terminal processing of power cables Connect a stranded wire or a solid wire directly, or use a rod terminal with an insulation sleeve. Do not tighten the terminal screws in the specified torque range or more. Doing so can cause a failure or malfunction. When connecting a stranded wire or a solid wire directly Twist the end of the stranded wire to prevent the elemental wires from protruding. Do not apply a solder plating to the end of the wire.

When using a rod terminal with an insulation sleeve A wire with a thick sheath cannot enter the insulation sleeve smoothly. Select a wire referring to the figure of external dimensions below.

Tool Tighten the power supply terminal using a commercially-available small screwdriver. The tip of the screwdriver must be straight and as wide as the shaft, as shown in the figure below.

Grounding Make sure to ground the FG terminal. Otherwise, the system is susceptible to noise.

Manufacturer Swage PHOENIX CONTACT CRIMPFOX 6

Manufacturer Model PHOENIX CONTACT SZS 0.4 2.5

Approx. 5 mm

(0.20inch)

6mm (0.24inch)

10.5mm to 12 mm (0.42inch to 0.48inch)

2mm to 2.5 mm (0.08inch) to (0.10inch)

Contact part Insulation sleeve

0.4mm (0.02inch)

2.5mm (0.10inch)

Straight tip

8 WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION 8.2 Power Supply Wiring to the GOT 325

32

8.3 Grounding Each GOT has the following ground terminals. GT27 (except GT2705-V), GT25 (except GT25-W and GT2505-V), GT23: FG terminal and LG terminal GT2705-V, GT25-W, GT2505-V, GT21: FG terminal

Grounding the GOT

Grounding method Ground the GOT as shown below.

For GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, and GT2105-Q Use independent grounding as much as possible for the GOT. Ground the GOT with a ground resistance of 100 or less. When independent grounding cannot be applied for the GOT, use shared grounding as shown in (2) below.

For the grounding methods of (1) and (2) above, use a cable with 2 mm2 or more cross section. Make a ground point near the GOT as much as possible to shorten the ground cable.

For GT2104-R, GT2104-P, and GT2103-P Use independent grounding as much as possible for the GOT. Ground the GOT with a ground resistance of 100 or less. When independent grounding cannot be applied for the GOT, use shared grounding as shown in (2) below.

Make a ground point near the GOT as much as possible to shorten the ground cable.

GOT GOT GOT Other device Other device Other device

Grounding (ground resistance:

100 or less)

Grounding (ground resistance:

100 or less)

(1) Independent grounding Best (2) Shared grounding Good (3) Common grounding Not allowed

GOT GOT GOT Other device Other device Other device

(1) Independent grounding Best (2) Shared grounding Good (3) Common grounding Not allowed

6 8 WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION 8.3 Grounding

8

Grounding examples Independent grounding (Best) For grounding for control system, ground the system at one end. Especially for the control devices communicating each other, ground the system at one end.

Shared grounding (Good) Ground the system at one end. To prevent noise from entering the GOT, use a short and thick wire for grounding between the ground and the control panel to lower ground resistance.

Common grounding (Not allowed) Do not connect the ground cables of the power equipment and control equipment with a wire. When the cables are connected, noise from the power equipment may affect the control equipment, causing a malfunction.

GOT

CN1A CN1B

CN2 CN3

FG LG

Grounding for control system

Ground terminal block

Connection cable

Panel grounding

Grounding for power system

FG

FG

LG

Power equipment (such as servo)

Ground terminal block

GOT

CN1A CN1B

CN2 CN3

FG LG

Connection cable

Panel grounding Panel grounding

Use as short and thick a wire as possible.

FG

FG

LG

Power equipment (such as servo)

GOTFG LG

Connection cable

Panel grounding Panel grounding

FG

FG

CN1BCN1A

CN3CN2 LG

Power equipment (such as servo)

The power equipment and the control equipment are connected with a wire.

8 WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION 8.3 Grounding 327

32

Recommended terminal shape (GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q)

Causes of wiring-related malfunction and countermeasure examples Causes of a malfunction due to grounding of the GOT include potential difference caused by grounding and noise. The following measures may reduce potential difference and noise.

Wiring of the ground cable and power line of the GOT When the ground cable and power line of the GOT are installed together, the GOT may malfunction due to noise. Separating the ground cable and power line of the GOT in wiring reduces the influence of noise.

When leading the ground cable from the control panel having control equipment into the control panel having the GOT When a single ground cable is led from the control panel having control equipment, including a PLC, into the control panel having the GOT, the cable may be directly connected to the power terminal of the GOT.

The malfunction due to the potential difference caused by the grounding in such a case may be prevented by reducing the voltage as shown in countermeasure example 1 below.

Applicable solderless terminal RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

Terminal screw

Solderless terminal

Terminal screw

6.2 mm or less

3.2

3.2

6.2 mm or less

When wiring one cable to one terminal

When wiring two cables to one terminal

Solderless terminal

GOT

FGLG

Power for the power equipment

Good example: The ground and power cables are separated in wiring.

Power for the power equipment

Bad example: The ground and power cables are installed together.

GOT

FGLG

Connection cable

Ground cable led from the panel having the control equipment

GOTFG

LG

8 8 WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION 8.3 Grounding

8

Countermeasure example 1 When any potential difference between the ground cable and the control panel having the GOT affects the GOT, also connect the ground cable to the control panel. When Countermeasure example 1-1 is difficult to be taken, such as the wiring is impossible, carry out wiring as shown in Countermeasure example 1-2.

If noise further affects the GOT by taking Countermeasure example 1, Countermeasure example 2 may reduce the influence of noise.

Countermeasure example 2 If the noise from the control panel having the GOT adversely affects the GOT even after Countermeasure example 1 is taken, attach the ferrite core (KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD. RFC-H13 or equivalent). When attaching a ferrite core, insert the cable through the ferrite core several times (approximately three times). When Countermeasure example 2-1 is difficult to be taken, such as the wiring is impossible, carry out wiring as shown in Countermeasure example 2-2.

GOT

Grounding to the panel

Ground wires

Use as short and thick a wire as possible.

FG LG

Connection cable

Measure example 1-1 Measure example 1-2

GOT

Grounding to the panel

Ground wires FG LG

Connection cable

GOT

Grounding to the panel

Ferrite coreGround wires Use as short and thick a wire as possible.

FG

LG

Connection cable

GOT

Grounding to the panel

Ground wires

FG

LG

Connection cable

Ferrite core

Measure example 2-1 Measure example 2-2

8 WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION 8.3 Grounding 329

33

8.4 Wiring Inside and Outside the Control Panel Control panel inside wiring As shown in the following figure, power lines, including power cables and servo amplifier driving cables, and communication cables, including bus connection cables and network cables, must not be mixed. Mixing the power lines and communication cables may cause a malfunction due to noise. When devices that generate surge noise, including a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), electromagnetic contactor (MC), relay (RA), solenoid valve, and induction motor, are used, a surge suppressor is effective. For the surge suppressor, refer to the following. Page 331 Attaching a Surge Suppressor to Control Equipment

Control panel outside wiring To lead the power line and the communication cable outside the control panel, open cable holes at two separate places to lead the cables separately out. When the cables are led out through the same cable hole for wiring reasons, the cables are more easily affected by noise.

Separate the power line and communication cable each other 100 mm or more in the duct. When the cables are close each other for wiring reasons, use a separator (made of metal). Doing so reduces the noise influence.

Terminal block

Inside control panel

Separately wired power lines and communication cables

Power cable

GOT connection cable

PLC I/O wire

Driving control line

NFB

MC MC RA RA

Terminal block

Inside control panel

Mixed power lines and communication cables

Power cable

NFB

MC MC RA RA

GOT connection cable

PLC I/O wire

Driving control line

Power line

Communication cable

Cable hole

Power line Communication cable

Wiring the power lines and the communication cables outside the control panel

Power line Wiring duct Separator

Power line Signal wire Communication

cable

100 mm or more

Wiring of power line and communication cable in the duct

0 8 WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION 8.4 Wiring Inside and Outside the Control Panel

8

8.5 Attaching a Surge Suppressor to Control Equipment

When the GOT fails to work properly, for example a communication error occurs, in synchronization with the ON/OFF status of the specific control equipment, including a molded case circuit breaker, electromagnetic contactor, relay, solenoid valve, and induction motor (hereinafter described as load), the GOT may be affected by surge noise. In such a case, separate the ground cable and the communication cable from the load. When the ground cable or communication cable has to be installed close to the load, attaching a surge suppressor is effective. Attach a surge suppressor closest to the load.

Measures against AC inductive load

Measures against DC inductive load

AC

C R

Output equipment such as PLC's output module

The surge suppressor must be attached close to the load.

The GOT ground cable and the communication cable must not be installed close to the load.

Output

L

L o a d

DC

D

Output equipment such as PLC's output module

The surge suppressor must be attached close to the load.

The GOT ground cable and the communication cable must not be installed close to the load.

Output

L

L o a d

8 WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION 8.5 Attaching a Surge Suppressor to Control Equipment 331

33

8.6 Grounding the Extension Unit Wiring of the FG cable of a bus connection cable This section explains wiring of FG cables when a GOT is connected to a PLC CPU with bus connection cables.

Cables connected to the PLC CPU Do not install the connection cable together with or close to the main circuit lines (high voltage, large current) or I/O signal lines.

Connecting the QCPU/Motion CPU (Q series) and GOT Grounding of the FG cable for the QCPU and Motion CPU (Q series) is unnecessary since they have no FG cable.

Connecting the QnACPU/ACPU/Motion CPU (A series) and GOT Ground a GOT as shown below when GT15-CEXSS-1 or GT15-CBS is used.

Terminals of the GOT Layout of terminal blocks of a GOT differs depending on the GOT model.Check the terminal layout of the GOT to be used and perform wiring. Ground cables Up to two ground cables can be connected to each of LG and FG of the GOT.When three or more ground cables need to be connected, connect the third and later cables to the LG.

For GT15-CEXSS-1

1. Connect the LG and FG of the GOT power supply at the terminal block and ground them with one cable.

2. Wire the FG cable of the GT15-CBS. The length of the cable must be 28 cm or shorter.

3. Do not connect the ground cable for FG of the GT15-EXCNB.

4. Connect the FG cable of the GT15-CBS at the GOT side to FG of the power terminal block of the GOT.

5. Connect the FG cable of the GT15-CBS at the PLC side to the FG of the power supply module of the PLC.

6. Connect the LG and FG of the PLC at the terminal block and ground them with one cable.

For GT15-CBS Perform the grounding at the GOT side (described in (1)) for both GOTs.

FG LG N L

PLC Not connected

(GT15-EXCNB)

GOT

OUT IN

FGLGNL

2SQ wire FG terminal 28 cm or less

(GT15-CBS)

2 8 WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION 8.6 Grounding the Extension Unit

9

9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH

HANDLING Page 335 Internal Wiring Diagram of Handy GOT Page 337 Power Wiring Page 341 Wiring inside and outside the panel Page 343 Switch Wiring

For the dimensional drawing of connection cables, refer to the following. Page 387 APPENDICES

Make sure to attach the back cover to the Handy GOT before turning on the power and starting operation after the installation or wiring work. Not doing so may cause an electrical shock.

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring. Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions. The DC power supply is used for the Handy GOT. Supply power within the specifications to the power supply, operation switch, and emergency stop switch. Not doing so may cause a fire or failure.

Correctly wire the 24 V DC power cable (terminal) of the Handy GOT and [+]/[-] of the DC power supply as shown in this manual. Not doing so may cause a failure.

Ground the drain wire (FG) of the Handy GOT. Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems. Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction.

WARNING

When processing the connection cable or performing wiring work, avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the Handy GOT. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.

When the Handy GOT is used, the cable connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped. Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

CAUTION

When the Handy GOT is used, do not hold and pull the cable portion to unplug the cable connected to the unit. Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 333

33

General preventive measures against noise There are two kinds of noises: Radiated noise that is transmitted into the air and Conductive noise that is directly transmitted along connected lines. Countermeasures must be taken considering both kinds of noises and referring to the following 3 points.

Protecting against noise Keep signal lines away from noise sources such as a power cable or a highpower drive circuit. Shield the signal lines.

Reducing generated noise Use a noise filter, etc. to reduce the level of the noise generated due to a source such as a high-power motor drive circuit. Attach surge killers to the terminals on the No Fuse Breaker (NFB), electromagnetic contactors, relays, solenoid valves, and generators to suppress noise interference.

Releasing noise to the ground Make sure to connect the ground cable to the ground. Use a short and thick cable to lower its impedance. Ground the power system and the control system separately.

Operation at momentary power failure The GOT continues to operate even upon 5ms or shorter instantaneous power failure. The GOT stops operating if there is extended power failure or voltage drop, while it automatically resumes operation as soon as the power is restored.

4 9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING

9

9.1 Internal Wiring Diagram of Handy GOT GT2506HS-V The following shows the internal wiring diagram of GT2506HS-V.

For PC connection

USB IF

(Device)

USB IF

(Host)

SD card IF

Display unit

Pow er circuit

Display circuit Display section

Touch panel

Control and communication circuit

CPU memory

communi -cation

RS-422/485 interface

SW1 LED SW2 LED SW3 LED SW4 LED SW5 LED

SW6 LED

GRIP SW LED

O utput interface

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6

SW-COM

ES-1 ES-1 ES-2 ES-2 ES-3 ES-3

DSW-1

KSW-1

RS-232 interface

Ethernet interface

DC24V+ DC24G FG

Power supply Display LED

Operation switch

Emergency stop switch

Grip switch

Keylock switch (2-position SW)

Connector for external cable

Either RS-422/485 or RS-232 selected (RS-422/485 at factory shipment)

For PLC communication

Keylock switch (2-position SW) contact action When the key position is left = KSW-1 and KSW-C are short-circuited When the key position is right = KSW-2 and KSW-C are short-circuited

DSW-1 DSW-2 DSW-2

KSW-2

KSW-C

9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.1 Internal Wiring Diagram of Handy GOT 335

33

GT2505HS-V The following shows the internal wiring diagram of GT2505HS-V.

For PC connection

USB IF

(Device)

USB IF

(Host)

SD card IF

Display unit

Pow er circuit

Displa y circuit Display se ction

Touch panel

CPU memory

communi -cation

RS-422 IF

GRIP SW LED

O utput interface

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6

SW-COM

ES-1 ES-1 ES-2 ES-2 ES-3 ES-3

DSW-1

KSW-1

RS-232 IF

Ethernet IF

DC24V+ DC24G FG

Power supply

Display LED

Operation switch

Emergency stop switch

Grip switch

Keylock switch (2-position SW)

Connector for external cable

Either RS-422 or RS-232 or Ethernet IF selected (Ethernet IF at factory shipment)

For PLC communication

Keylock switch (2-position SW) contact action When the key position is left = KSW-1 and KSW-C are short-circuited When the key position is right = KSW-2 and KSW-C are short-circuited

DSW-1 DSW-2 DSW-2

KSW-2

KSW-C

Control and communication circuit

6 9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.1 Internal Wiring Diagram of Handy GOT

9

9.2 Power Wiring Power wiring and grounding GOT power is supplied from the external power. In addition, the following table shows the input power supply voltage and the consumed current.

Example of feeding with external power Connect the external cable to the external power.

When the input powers are the same

When the input powers of the PLC main unit and external power (24VDC) are the same, connect the FG cable of the GOT and the ground terminal of the PLC ( ) and carry out the grounding.

When the input powers are different

When the input powers are different (PLC: 200VAC, Power: 100VAC), connect the ground terminal ( ) of PLC and the FG cable of GOT separately and carry out the independent grounding.

Item Specifications

GT2506HS-VTBD GT2505HS-VTBD Input power supply voltage 24VDC(+10% -15%)

Power consumption 11.6W or less (480mA/24VDC) 8.4W or less (350mA/24VDC)

At backlight off 8.2W or less (340mA/24VDC) 7.0W or less (290mA/24VDC)

Inrush current 30A or less (at max. load) 2ms

To the Handy GOT operation switch

PLC Grounding (100 or less)

External power supply

Handy GOT

24+ COM X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 FG 24V- 24V+ *1

*1Cautions for grounding with the input power

Grounding (100 or less)

PLC External power supply

Handy GOT

FG Grounding (100 or less)

PLC External power supply

Handy GOT

FG

AC200V AC100V

Grounding (100 or less)

9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.2 Power Wiring 337

33

Pin layout

*1 The external cable has three braided shields. Bundle the three shields and ground them. *2 Be sure to ground FG terminal.

The cause of malfunctions related wiring/Remedy Grounding of the GOT may cause electric potential difference and noise interference, which may result in GOT malfunctions. These problems may be resolved by taking the following measures.

Wiring path of the GOT's ground cable and power line Bundling the GOT's ground cable and power line together can cause interference noise, which may result in malfunctions. Keeping the GOT's ground cable and power line away from each other will help minimize noise interference.

Connecting the ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment to the panel to which the GOT is grounded When running a single ground cable from the panel that houses such piece of control equipment as a PLC to the panel to which the GOT is grounded, the ground cable may have to be directly connected to the terminal on the GOT. When using the connector conversion box

Cable Terminal No.

24VDC+ 24VDC- FG External cable GT11H-C-37P 36,37

(Short-circuit inside of the connector) 18,19 (Short-circuit inside of the connector)

1

GT11H-C Red, (core wire 4) Black, (core wire 4) Shield *1

Relay cable 24+ (label) 24G (label) FG (label)

Connector conversion box Terminal block 1) 1

Terminal block 1) 3

Terminal block 1) *2

2

FG

Power supply for power equipment

Good: Wiring the ground cable away from the power cable

FG

Power supply for power equipment

Bad: Bundling the ground cable and the power cable

FGGround cable from the panel that houses control equipment

Connection cable

Connector conversion box

8 9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.2 Power Wiring

9

When using the external cable

If electric potential difference between the ground points created by it causes malfunctions, lowering the voltage as shown in Remedy 1 below may solve the problem.

Remedy 1 (Refer to the figures Remedy 1-1 and 1-4 below.) If the electric potential difference between the ground cable and the panel that houses the GOT is creating problems, connect the ground cable to the panel also. If taking Remedy 1 worsens noise interference, taking Remedy 2 may alleviate it. When using the connector conversion box If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 1-1 is not feasible, follow Remedy 1-2.

When using the external cable If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 1-3 is not feasible, follow Remedy 1-4.

FG

Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment

Connection cable

Remedy1-1 Remedy1-2

FG

Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment

Panel grounding Panel grounding

Use the thickest cable possible.

Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment Use the thickest cable possible.

Connection cable

FG

Connection cable

Connector conversion box

Connector conversion box

FG

Use the thickest cable possible.

Connection cable

Panel grounding

Remedy1-3

FG

Connection cable

Remedy1-4

Ground cable from the panel that house control equipment

Panel grounding

Ground cable from the panel that house control equipment

Use the thickest cable possible.

9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.2 Power Wiring 339

34

Remedy 2 (Refer to the figures Remedy 2-1 and 2-2 below.) Attach a ferrite core to the cable if noise from the GOT panel has adverse effects on the GOT when Remedy 1 is taken. Wind the wire around the ferrite core several times (approx. 3 times), if a ferrite core is used. When using the connector conversion box If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 2-1 is not feasible, follow Remedy 2-2.

When using the external cable If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 2-3 is not feasible, follow Remedy 2-4.

FG

Ferrite core

FG Ferrite core

Connector conversion box

Connector conversion box

Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment Use the thickest cable possible.

Connection cable

Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment Use the thickest cable possible.

Connection cable

Panel grounding Panel grounding

Remedy2-1 Remedy2-2

FG FG

Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment Use the thickest cable possible.

Connection cable

Remedy2-3 Panel grounding

Ferrite core

Connection cable

Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment Use the thickest cable possible.

Ferrite core

Remedy2-4 Panel grounding

0 9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.2 Power Wiring

9

9.3 Wiring inside and outside the panel Wiring inside Run power lines, servo amplifier drive wires, and communication cables so that they do not cross each other. Noise interference that is generated by cables that cross each other may cause malfunctions. Surge suppressors are an effective way to filter out surge noise that is generated from no fuse breakers (NFB), electromagnetic contactors (MC), relays (RA), solenoid valves, and induction motors. Refer to the section to follow for surge killers. Page 230 Installing the Battery

Outside the panel To pull the power line and communication cable out of the panel, make two pullout holes away from each other and pull the cables through. Putting both cables through the same pullout hole will increase noise interference.

Keep the power line and communication cable inside the duct at least 100 mm away from each other. If that is not possible, the use of a metal separator inside the duct can reduce noise interference.

NFB

MC

PLC

MC RA RA

Crossing power lines and communication cables

GOT connection cable

PLC I/O wire

Drive control wire

NFB

MC

PLC

MC RA RA

Terminal block Terminal block

Uncrossed power lines and communication cables

GOT connection cable

PLC I/O wire

Drive control wire

Power cable

Power cable

Pullout hole Pullout hole

Power line

Connection cable

Power line Connection cable

100(3.94) or more

Power line

Signal line

Wiring duct Separator

Signal linePower line

Unit: mm (inch)

9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.3 Wiring inside and outside the panel 341

34

Attaching surge killers to control equipment If communication errors happen in synch with the on/off signals from certain control equipment (referred to as "load" hereafter) such as no fuse breakers, electromagnetic contactors, relays, solenoid valves, and induction motors, surge noise interference is suspected. If this problem happens, keep the ground cable and communication cable away from the load. If that is not possible, an installation of a surge killer will help reduce noise interference. Place the surge killer as close to the load as possible. Remedy for AC inductive load

Remedy for DC inductive load

Output

AC

C

R L: Load

Keep the ground cable and communication cable away from each other.

Place the surge killer near the load.Output equipment

such as PLC output unit

Output

DC

D L: Load

Keep the ground cable and communication cable away from each other.

Place the surge killer near the load.Output equipment

such as PLC output unit

2 9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.3 Wiring inside and outside the panel

9

9.4 Switch Wiring Overview for switch Example) GT2506HS-V

Switch The following switches require the connection to a PLC or a controller through an external cable. Operation switch Emergency stop switch Grip switch Keylock switch (2-position SW)

LED The following LED is turned ON/OFF in the serial communication with a controller. The independent wiring to control the LED is not required. Operation switch display LED (GT2506HS-V only) Grip switch display LED

No. Name Abbreviations Specifications 1) Operation switch (6 switches) SW1 to SW6 Switch for external direct wiring (independent contact)

2) Emergency stop switch ES-1, ES-2, ES-3 Switch for external direct wiring (independent contact)

3) Grip switch DSW-1, DSW-2 Switch for external direct wiring (independent contact)

4) Keylock switch (2-position SW) KSW-1, KSW-2 Switch for external direct wiring (independent contact)

3)

4)

2)

Grip switch display LED

Operation switch display LED

1 Operation switch (6 switches) SW1 to SW6 (from left to right)

9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring 343

34

Switch wiring example

When connecting general load Connector conversion box GT16H-CNB-42S

*1 The internal contact is closed when the power switch of the connector conversion box is turned OFF or the connector conversion box is not supplied with the power (POWER LED turns off.)

1)

Terminal block 2

Terminal block 1

2) 3) 4) 5)

8)

11) 12) 13)

20) 19) 18) 17) 16) 15) 14) 13) 12) 11)

10) 9)

14)

9) 10)

6) 7)

ES3B

ES2B ES2B

ES1B

Internal contact*1 ES1B

ES3B

To enter the emergency stop status when the Handy GOT is removed

To avoid entering the emergency stop status when the Handy GOT is removed

External cable

Handy GOT Connector conversion box

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6

KSW-C KSW-1 KSW-2

DSW-1 DSW-1 DSW-2 DSW-2

ES-1 ES1A

SW-COM

ES-2 ES2A

ES-3 ES3A

4 9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring

9

Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S or GT16H-CNB-37S

12 11 10 9 8 7

11 12

13 14

1 2

6

6 5 4

10 9 8 7

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6

KSW-C KSW-1 KSW-2

DSW-1 DSW-1 DSW-2 DSW-2

ES1 ES1

SW-COM

ES2 ES2

ES3 ES3

Handy GOT External cable

Connector conversion box

Terminal block 2

9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring 345

34

When connecting PLC input Connector conversion box GT16H-CNB-42S

*1 The internal contact is closed when the power switch of the connector conversion box is turned OFF or the Connector Conversion Box is not supplied with the power (POWER LED turns off.)

Terminal block 2

PLC (Example of FX series)

COM

ES3B

ES2B ES2B

ES1B ES1B

ES3B

External cable

Handy GOT Connector conversion box

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6

KSW-C KSW-1 KSW-2

DSW-1 DSW-1 DSW-2 DSW-2

ES-1

SW-COM

ES-2

ES-3

ES1A

ES2A

ES3A

X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005

X010 X011

X020

To the external load Terminal block 1

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

8)

11) 12) 13) 14)

9) 10)

20) 19) 18) 17) 16) 15) 14) 13) 12) 11)

10) 9)

Internal contact*1

For setting emergency stop status when Handy GOT is removed

For avoiding emergency stop status when Handy GOT is removed

6 9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring

9

Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S or GT16H-CNB-37S

12

Terminal block 2

PLC (Example of FX series)

11 10

COM

9 8 7

11 12

13 14

1 2

6

6 5 4

10 9 8 7

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6

KSW-C KSW-1 KSW-2

DSW-1 DSW-1 DSW-2 DSW-2

ES1

SW-COM

ES2

ES3

ES1

ES2

ES3

X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005

X010 X011

X020

To the external load

Handy GOT Connector conversion boxExternal

cable Terminal block 1

9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring 347

34

Operation switch wiring The operation switch is connected to the PLC through an external cable and the connector conversion box.

Connection example Connector conversion box GT16H-CNB-42S

Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S or GT16H-CNB-37S

Pin layout

Operation switch input The operation switch (SW1 to SW6) can directly connect to the PLC input and be used in the sequence program as general input devices. The operation switch is loaded into the PLC as the momentary switch of the a contact.

In the case of handling the input as the b contact or the alternate switch, create the input in the sequence program.

Product name Model Terminal No.

SW-COM SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 Connector Conversion Box

GT16H-CNB-42S Terminal block 2 1

Terminal block 2 2

Terminal block 2 3

Terminal block 2 4

Terminal block 2 5

Terminal block 2 6

Terminal block 2 7

GT11H-CNB-37S GT16H-CNB-37S

Terminal block 1 12

Terminal block 1 11

Terminal block 1 10

Terminal block 1 9

Terminal block 1 8

Terminal block 1 7

Terminal block 1 6

Handy GOT Connector conversion box

Terminal block 2

PLC

SW-COM

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW5

SW6

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

COM

X0

X1

X2

X3

X4

X5

SW-COM

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW5

SW6

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

COM

X0

X1

X2

X3

X4

X5

Handy GOT Connector conversion box PLC

Terminal block 1

X0 Y0

ON OFF

ON OFF

Operation switch action

X0

When wired to PLC X0

8 9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring

9

LED setting of operation switch (GT2506HS-V) For operation check, the green LED is attached to the six operation switches (SW1 to SW6). Each LED is related to the bit 0 to bit 5 of the word device. The LED is lit when the bit value is 1, and not lit when it is 0.

Allocation of device to control LED The device to control LED is allocated by the drawing software. The external input and output function/output information (read device +1) set in [Read device (ControllerGOT)] of [System information] in [GOT Environment Setting] from [Common Settings] is allocated to the LED control. The following shows the relationship between each bit and the LED of the external input and output function/output information. The LED is lit when the bit value is 1 and not lit when the bit value is 0. External input and output function/output information

For example, when D100 is set in the read device of system information, each bit value of D101 is reflected to the LED lit/not lit.

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6

b0 of D101LED of SW1 b1 of D101LED of SW2 b2 of D101LED of SW3 b3 of D101LED of SW4 b4 of D101LED of SW5 b5 of D101LED of SW6

9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring 349

35

Drawing software settings Set the system information in the following procedure.

1. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [System Information] from the menu to display the [Environmental Setting] window.

2. Select [Use System Information].

3. In [Read Device (ControllerGOT)], set [First Device].

4. Click [Selection/Sort Setting] to display the [Selection/Sort Setting] dialog.

5. Set [External I/O Function Output Information] as a target item. Click the [OK] button.

6. In [Write Device (GOTController)], set [First Device].

7. Once the settings are configured, click the [OK] button to close the [Environmental Setting] window.

Program example The following shows a sequence program example. System information: Set the read device to D101 (using the drawing software) Wiring: Wire the operation switch of SW1 to X0, SW2 to X1, SW3 to X2, SW4 to X3, SW5 to X4 and SW6 to X5. Device allocation: The LED lit is allocated from M10 with the sequence program.

X0 M10

X5 M15

Lit in green when SW1 is pressed.

M8000 MOV K2M10 D102

Lit in green if SW6 has been pressed.

Reads M10 to M17 and transfers them to device+1

.....

0 9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring

9

Operation switch name sheet creation (GT2506HS-V) This section describes the operation switch name sheet creation.

Creating the name sheet 1. Prepare the name sheet board and OHP sheet (clear and colorless) included with the Handy GOT.

2. Write an original switch name for the user on the name sheet board. Create the name sheet in the following dimensions.

3. Copy the contents of the name sheet board to the OHP sheet in full size (100%) with a copier. When using another OHP sheet, prepare the following sheet. In addition, the sheet must be copiable. Material: polyester film Thickness: 0.1mm

Mounting the name sheet 1. Insert the operation name sheet to the slit from side.

(37.5)191919191937.5C2

4

8 +0 -1

31 108=Range of character arrangement effective

16 19 19

170

19 19 (16)

SW6 CenterSW5 CenterSW4 CenterSW3 CenterSW2 CenterSW1 Center

1

6= R

an ge

o f c

ha ra

ct er

a

rr an

ge m

en t e

ffe ct

iv e

Operation switch (For 6 pieces)

Without partitions

With partitions

[Examples of creation]

Operation switch name sheet

9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring 351

35

Emergency stop switch wiring The emergency stop switch is connected to the PLC with an external cable via the connector conversion box. Use the emergency stop switch signal as control signals of external device power ON/OFF. Do not use it as the input signal of external device. When turning ON/OFF the external device power, set the load up to 24VDC/1A (contact specification). For the emergency stop circuit, be sure to configurate the circuit outside the PLC.

For the emergency stop SW, the b contact type is used. When the Handy GOT is removed from the connector conversion box, the emergency switch goes off, and the Handy GOT goes into the same state as when the switch is pressed. Connector conversion box contains a parallel circuit to avoid emergency stop while the Handy GOT is being removed. Connector conversion box requires wiring a parallel circuit.

Example of connection using a connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB-42S) When setting the connector conversion box to the emergency stop state while Handy GOT is

removed

ES1

ES3

Handy GOT

ES1

ES3

Connector conversion box

Used as control signals of external device power ON/OFF

Handy GOT Connector conversion box

Used as input signals of PLC COM

COM

X0

X2

ES2ES2 COM

X1

ES-1

Handy GOT Connector conversion box Terminal

block 1

Internal contact

ES1B

20

16

15

14

13

10

9

12

11

19

18

17

ES-2

Used as control signals of external device power ON/OFF

ES-3

ES1A

ES2A

ES3A

ES2B

ES3B

2 9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring

9

When avoiding to set the connector conversion box to the emergency stop state while Handy

GOT is removed

The internal contact operates as follows. When the connector conversion box is supplied with the power and the power switch is ON (POWER LED turns on.) Since the internal contact opens and the insulation status occurs between ESBs, the status between ESAs coordinates with those of the emergency stop switch and the external cable. When the connector conversion box is not supplied with the power and the power switch is OFF (POWER LED turns off.) Since the internal contact closes and the short-circuit status occurs between ESBs, the status between ESAs closes regardless of the status of the emergency stop switch and the external cable.

When using the connector conversion box (GT11H-CNB-37S or GT16H-CNB-37S) When setting the connector conversion box to the emergency stop state while Handy GOT is

removed

ES-1

Handy GOT Connector conversion box

Internal contact

ES1B

20

16

15

14

13

10

9

12

11

19

18

17

ES-2

ES-3

ES1A

ES2A

ES3A

ES2B

ES3B

Terminal block 1

Used as control signals of external device power ON/OFF

ES1

Handy GOT Connector conversion box Terminal

block 2

14

12

11

1

2

13

ES2

Used as control signals of external device power ON/OFF

ES3

ES1

ES2

ES3

9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring 353

35

When avoiding to set the connector conversion box not to the emergency stop state while Handy GOT is removed

Pin layout

Precautions when using the emergency stop switch When using the emergency stop switch of the Handy GOT, use the emergency stop switch according to your risk assessment. When using the parallel circuit (which sets the connector conversion box to the emergency stop status while Handy GOT is removed), the system may not match the safety standards. Before using the system, please check the safety standards which are required. If a shock which exceeds the general specifications of the Handy GOT is applied, a chattering may occur in the emergency stop switch due to the structure of the switch. Check your usage condition and decide whether to use or not.

Product name Model Terminal No.

ES1A or ES1

ES1B ES2A or ES2

ES2B ES3A or ES3

ES3B

Connector conversion box GT16H-CNB-42S Terminal block 1

Terminal block 1

Terminal block 1

Terminal block 1

Terminal block 1

Terminal block 1

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

GT11H-CNB-37S GT16H-CNB-37S

Terminal block 2

- Terminal block 2

- Terminal block 2

-

13 14 11 12 1 2

Handy GOT Connector conversion box Terminal

block 2 Used as control signals of external device power ON/OFFES1

14

12

11

1

2

Parallel circuit

13

ES2

ES3

ES1

ES2

ES3

4 9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring

9

Grip switch The grip switch is on the side surface of the Handy GOT and wired to the input of PLC, etc.

The grip switch is the 3-position system switch and makes the ON/OFF state of Handy GOT as shown below.

Grip switch

GT2505HS-VGT2506HS-V

Grip switch

OFF ON OFF

When released When half-pressed When fully pressed

Release

Press further

Release

Press lightly

Grip switch

9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring 355

35

Grip switch wiring The grip switch is a switch with two circuits of the above 3-position system a contact.

Connection example When using the connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB-42S)

Set the load up to 24VDC/1A (contact specification) for each contact.

When using the connector conversion box (GT11H-CNB-37S or GT16H-CNB-37S)

Set the load up to 24VDC/1A (contact specification) for each contact.

Pin layout Model name Terminal No.

DSW-1 DSW-1 DSW-2 DSW-2 Connector conversion box

GT16H-CNB-42S Terminal block 2 11

Terminal block 2 12

Terminal block 2 13

Terminal block 2 14

GT11H-CNB-37S GT16H-CNB-37S

Terminal block 2 9

Terminal block 2 10

Terminal block 2 7

Terminal block 2 8

Used as input signals of PLC

DSW-1

Handy GOT Terminal block 2

11

13

14

12

DSW-2 Used as control signals of external device power ON/OFF

COM

X10

Connector conversion box

Used as input signals of PLC

DSW-1

Connector conversion box Terminal

block 2

9

7

8

10

DSW-2 Used as control signals of external device power ON/OFF

COM

X10

Handy GOT

6 9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring

9

LED settings of grip switch Grip switches (DSW1, DSW2) contain green LED for checking operation. The grip switch LED coordinates with b6 of the external input and output function/output information (read device +1) and operates the LED ON/OFF display.

Allocation of device to control LED The device to control LED is allocated by the drawing software. The external input and output function/output information (read device +1) set in [read device] of [system information function] in the [common settings] is allocated to the LED control. The LED control for the grip switch is allocated to b6 (7th bit from the lower) of the device allocated to the external input and output function/output information. The LED is lit when the bit value is 1 and notlit when the bit value is 0. External input and output function/output information (read device +1)

For example, when D100 is set in the read device of system information, the value in b6 of D101 is reflected to the LED lit/not lit.

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Grip switch

9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring 357

35

Keylock switch (2-position SW) The keylock switch (2-position SW) is used with wiring to the input of PLC

Connection example The following shows a connection example where the notch of the switch is set to the left.

Set the load up to 24VDC/1A (contact specification) for each contact.

When using the connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB-42S)

When using the connector conversion box (GT11H-CNB-37S or GT16H-CNB-37S)

Pin layout Model name Terminal No.

KSW-C KSW-1 KSW-2 Connector conversion box GT16H-CNB-42S Terminal block 2

8 Terminal block 2 9

Terminal block 2 10

GT11H-CNB-37S GT16H-CNB-37S

Terminal block 2 6

Terminal block 2 5

Terminal block 2 4

Notch of the switch is set to the left

Notch of the switch is set to the left

GT2505HS-VGT2506HS-V

KSW-C

KSW-1

KSW-2

Handy GOT PLC

COM

X20

X21

8

9

10

Terminal block 2

Connector conversion box

KSW-C

KSW-1

KSW-2

Handy GOT PLC

COM

X20

X21

6

5

4

Terminal block 2

Connector conversion box

8 9 HANDY GOT POWER WIRING AND SWITCH HANDLING 9.4 Switch Wiring

10

10 OPERATING THE GOT Page 359 Outline Procedure to Start the GOT Page 362 Creating Project Data

10.1 Outline Procedure to Start the GOT This section explains the outline procedure to operate the GOT.

Preparing project data 1. Install GT Designer3 Version1 on the personal computer. For how to install GT Designer3 Version1, refer to the following. GT Works3 Version1 Installation Instructions

2. Create project data with GT Designer3 Version1. For how to use GT Designer3 Version1 and create project data, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Installing an extension unit and option 1. Install options other than the SD card and USB memory to the GOT. For how to install options, refer to the following. Page 230 Installing the Battery User's Manual of each option

2. Install an extension unit to the GOT. For how to install extension units, refer to the following. Page 227 Installing and Removing the Extension Unit

Installing the GOT, and power supply wiring 1. Install the GOT to the control panel. For how to install the GOT, refer to the following. Page 204 Installing the GOT

2. Carry out wiring of power cables for the GOT. For the wiring of power cables, refer to the following. Page 321 WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY SECTION

Start

Preparing project data

Installing an extension unit and option

Connecting the GOT and the controller

Starting monitoring

End

Writing package data

Installing the GOT, and power supply wiring

10 OPERATING THE GOT 10.1 Outline Procedure to Start the GOT 359

36

Writing package data Write package data with GT Designer3 Version1. The writing procedure differs depending on the data writing method.

Terms Basic software The basic software is equivalent to an operating system of the GOT. A GOT in which no basic software is written cannot be started. Package data The package data contains project data and applications necessary to execute the project data. Writing the package data into the GOT enables you to use the user-created project data on the GOT.

Writing package data directly from a personal computer to the GOT Connect the GOT and a personal computer, and write the package data to the GOT.

1. Connect the personal computer with the GOT. USB: Connect the USB interface (Device) and the USB port of the personal computer with a USB cable. Ethernet: Connect the Ethernet interface and the Ethernet port of the personal computer with an Ethernet cable. To write the package data to the GOT by Ethernet, install the basic software to the GOT and configure the communication settings to enable the communication between the GOT and the personal computer by Ethernet in advance. Via PLC (GT27, GT25 only): Connect the GOT and a personal computer via the PLC connected to the GOT. For each connection setting, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

2. Turn on the GOT.

3. Write the package data with GT Designer3 Version1. For how to write the package data, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Writing package data from the data storage to the GOT Write the package data to the GOT using the data storage such as an SD card.

1. Install a data storage such as an SD card to the personal computer.

2. Write the package data to the data storage with GT Designer3 Version1. For how to write the package data, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

3. Install the data storage to the GOT. SD card (drive A): installed to the SD card interface Data storage (drive B, E, F, or G) (GT27, GT25 and GT23) should be installed to the USB interface (Host)

4. Turn on the GOT. To start the GOT with the built-in flash memory (drive C), write the package data to the built-in flash memory (drive C) of the GOT. For how to write the package data, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) To start the GOT with the data storage (drive A, B, D to G), writing the package data to the built-in flash memory (drive C) of the GOT is not required.

0 10 OPERATING THE GOT 10.1 Outline Procedure to Start the GOT

10

Connecting the GOT and the controller 1. Check the communication settings in the utility screen of the GOT. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

2. Turn off the power of the GOT.

3. Connect the GOT and controller with a cable. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 that covers the controller used

Starting monitoring 1. Turn on the GOT and the connected system.

2. The GOT starts monitoring.

Precautions when the startup source of the GOT is any other than the built-in flash memory (drive C) GOT startup time The GOT startup time is longer than the normal startup time. The GOT startup time differs depending on the data storage type, number of written applications, and package data size. Handling the SD card during the GOT startup When the startup source is the SD card (drive A), do not open the cover of the SD card interface during the GOT startup. Doing so causes the GOT to fail to start normally. Corrective actions when the GOT cannot be started The GOT cannot be started in any of the following conditions. Take the following corrective actions, and turn on the GOT again.

Condition Corrective action

The type of the physical GOT differs from the GOT type of the package data stored in the SD card.

Prepare the SD card that stores the package data containing the GOT type same as the GOT to be used.

.TOG eht fo yromem eht ni atad yrassecennu eteleD.yromem tneiciffusni sah TOG ehT GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

10 OPERATING THE GOT 10.1 Outline Procedure to Start the GOT 361

36

10.2 Creating Project Data Create project data with GT Designer3 Version1. For how to operate GT Designer3 Version1, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Precautions for drawing Starting GT Designer3 Version1 When starting GT Designer3 Version1, make sure to start the GOT2000 application. You cannot create the GOT2000 screens with the GOT1000 application.

2 10 OPERATING THE GOT 10.2 Creating Project Data

11

11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Page 364 Daily Inspection Page 365 Periodic Inspection Page 366 Screen Cleaning Method Page 367 Low-voltage Battery Detection and Battery Replacement

When power is on, do not touch the terminals. Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction. Correctly connect the battery connector. Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire. Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire. Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all phases. Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

WARNING

Do not disassemble or modify the unit. Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire. Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly. Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure. The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped. Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault. When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull from the cable portion. Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault. Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metals, etc. to discharge static electricity from human body, etc. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

CAUTION

When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations. (Refer to 9.4 Low-voltage Battery Detection and Battery Replacement for details of the battery directive in the EU member states.)

11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 363

36

11.1 Daily Inspection The GOT does not have consumable components that shorten its life. However, the battery and liquid crystal display have limited life. The periodical replacement of the battery is recommended. For replacing the liquid crystal display, consult Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. For the battery and the liquid crystal display, refer to the following. Page 66 Performance Specifications

Daily inspection items

For the model of the protective sheet and the replacement procedure, refer to the following. User's manual of the protective sheet

Item Inspection item Inspection method Criterion Corrective action 1) GOT installation status Check for loose screws. Securely tightened Retighten screws with the

specified torque.

2) Connection status Loose terminal screws

Retighten screws with a screwdriver. Not loose Retighten terminal screws.

Proximity of solderless terminals

Visual check Proper intervals Correct intervals.

Loose contactors Visual check Not loose Retighten contactor fixing screws.

3) Usage status Dirt on the protective sheet

Visual check Not outstanding Replace the sheet with a new sheet.

Foreign material adherence

Visual check No foreign matter adherence Remove the foreign material and clean.

4 11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 11.1 Daily Inspection

11

11.2 Periodic Inspection

Half-yearly or yearly inspection items Inspect the following items when moving or modifying equipment, or changing wiring.

*1 The criterion varies with the installation orientation. For the details, refer to the following. Page 198 Control Panel Inside Temperature and GOT Installation Angle

Item Inspection item Inspection method Criterion Corrective action 1 Surrounding

environment Ambient temperature Measure corrosive gas with a

thermometer or hygrometer. Display section 0 C to 40 C For use in a control panel, the

control panel inside temperature is the ambient temperature.

Other sections *1

Ambient humidity 10 % RH to 90% RH

Atmosphere No corrosive gas

2 GOT with 100 V AC - 240 V AC power

Power supply voltage check

Measure voltage across the 100 V AC terminal to the 240 V AC terminal.

85 V AC to 242 V AC Change the power supply.

GOT with 24 V DC power

Input polarity of 24 V DC power

Measure voltage across 24 V DC terminals.

Connected according to terminal markings on the GOT power supply section

Change wiring.

3 Installation status Looseness Move the unit. Mounted firmly Retighten screws.

Foreign material adherence

Visual check No foreign matter adherence Remove the foreign material and clean.

4 Connection status Loose terminal screws

Retighten screws with a screwdriver. Not loose Retighten terminal screws.

Proximity of solderless terminals

Visual check Proper intervals Correct intervals.

Loose contactors Visual check Not loose Retighten contactor fixing screws.

5 Battery Check the voltage status of the GOT built-in battery in [Time] of the utility. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

No alarm Replace the battery with a new battery when the current battery has reached the specified life span, even if the low voltage is not indicated.

11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 11.2 Periodic Inspection 365

36

11.3 Screen Cleaning Method Use the GOT always in a clean condition.

Cleaning and disinfecting the GOT For your safety, be sure to turn off the GOT before cleaning and disinfecting the surface. Carefully wipe the GOT screen with a soft cloth moistened with neutral detergent or ethanol. Do not apply too much disinfectant to the cloth. If you use alcohol for disinfection, the main component of the alcohol must be ethanol or isopropyl alcohol. Do not spray disinfectant directly to the GOT because doing so may cause electrical failure of the GOT and peripheral

devices. After wiping the surface, dry the GOT completely before turning it on.

Precautions Do not use the following solvents. Solvents may deform the protective sheet, dissolve the surface, or peel the paint on the surface. Chlorine-based cleaners (bleach or other solvents) Peroxides (including hydrogen peroxide) Acetone, ammonia, paint thinner, benzene, methylene chloride, toluene, or other solvents

Clean

6 11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 11.3 Screen Cleaning Method

11

11.4 Low-voltage Battery Detection and Battery Replacement

Low-voltage battery detection and battery replacement The battery is used to hold the SRAM data, clock data, and backup data of the system status log data. The periodical replacement of the battery is recommended. For the battery replacement procedure, refer to the following. Page 230 Installing the Battery You can check if the battery has a low voltage by using the utility and the system alarm. For details of the battery status display by using the utility, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) GT27, GT25 and GT23 can display a low battery voltage message with the system alarm on such an occasion. To display the message by the system alarm, set [Battery alarm display] to ON. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

For the details of the system alarm, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Battery replacement timing When a low-voltage battery is detected, replace the battery immediately. The GOT retains the data for 14 days after the low-voltage battery detection. However, after the period, the GOT cannot retain the data.

System alarm

500 Warning! Built-in battery voltage is low.

11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 11.4 Low-voltage Battery Detection and Battery Replacement 367

36

Handling of batteries and devices with built-in batteries in EU member states This section explains the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and for exporting batteries and devices with built-in batteries to EU member states.

Precautions for disposal EU member states have a separate collection system for waste batteries. Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection/recycling center. The following symbol is printed on batteries and packaging of devices with built-in batteries used for Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT).

This symbol is valid in the EU member states only. The symbol is specified in Article 20 "Information for end-users" and ANNEX II of the new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC). The symbol indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes.

Precautions for export The new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) requires the following when batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries are sold and exported to EU member states. To print the symbol on batteries, devices, or their packaging To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products The batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries manufactured before the EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) took effect are also subject to the directive. Labelling the symbol To market or export batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries, which have no symbol, to EU member states, print the symbol as shown in (1) above on the GOT or its packaging. Attaching the manual To export devices incorporating the GOT to EU member states, attach this manual. If no GOT manual is included with the equipment, separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to the manuals of each device.

8 11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 11.4 Low-voltage Battery Detection and Battery Replacement

12

12 TROUBLESHOOTING Page 369 GOT Restoration Sheets Page 381 Troubleshooting for the Bus Connection Page 384 Error Messages and System Alarms

12.1 GOT Restoration Sheets This section provides check sheets for restoration in cases where the GOT does not operate normally. The following explains how to use each sheet.

When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions (GOT status check sheet) When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions, identify the cause of the malfunction using the GOT status check sheet, and take a corrective action. When the GOT is restored, see the status for a while.

When the wiring needs to be improved (GOT installation status check sheet) As a result of the GOT status check, if the cause of the malfunction or others is due to the noise generated by the GOT wiring status, take a corrective action for wiring by using the GOT installation status check sheet. When the GOT is restored, see the status for a while.

When a corrective action other than the above is required (System configuration check sheet) If a malfunction or others still occurs even after the above checks, fill out the system configuration check sheet with details about your system, and consult your local sales office. When sending a faulty product, attach the GOT restoration sheets (GOT status check sheet, GOT installation status check sheet, and the system configuration check sheet) checked in this section. Keep copies of the GOT restoration sheets.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.1 GOT Restoration Sheets 369

37

GOT status check sheet Check the GOT starting from GOT status. Mark checkboxes that apply to the symptom of your GOT. Proceed according to the corrective actions.

GOT status Check of failure frequency, such as the GOT does not operate and an error occurs on the

screen

Check of the displayed error code (system alarm)

Check of the POWER LED

Check of the screen display

Check Symptom Cause Corrective action Always occurs. Frequency:

Example: Once a month

Proceed to the following. Check of the displayed error code (system alarm) Occurs sometimes.

Check Symptom Cause Corrective action Can be checked. Error code (system alarm):

Example: 460 Communication unit error

Take the corrective action for the error code (system alarm) or error message. If the status does not change with the corrective action, proceed to the following. Check of the POWER LED

Cannot be checked. Proceed to the following. Check of the POWER LED

Check Symptom Cause/status Corrective action Lit in blue.

(GT27, GT25, GT23, and GT2105-Q)

The power is supplied normally. Proceed to the following. Check of the screen display

Lit in orange. (GT27, GT25, GT23, and GT2105-Q)

Screen saving is being performed. When the read device of the system information was set, the device was turned on and the screen was switched to the forced screen saving status.

Check the setting of the read device. If no problem is found in the setting, proceed to the following. Check of the screen display

Blinking in orange and blue. (GT27, GT25, GT23, and GT2105-Q)

A backlight failure has occurred. Proceed to the following. Faulty product investigation

Not lit The power is not supplied. Check if the power is supplied. If the GOT is not restored, proceed to the following. Faulty product investigation

If the power is supplied, the GOT hardware may be faulty.

Check Symptom Cause/status Corrective action The screen is black. The LCD or basic software may be faulty. Perform the following in order.

1) Write the package data again. 2) Install the basic software again. If the GOT is not restored by the above operations, proceed to the following. Faulty product investigation

The screen is white. The GOT hardware may be faulty. Proceed to the following. Faulty product investigation A line is displayed on the screen. The GOT hardware may be faulty.

Example: A vertical line is displayed. Other faulty displays

The screen freezes. The screen display is not updated and operation is unavailable.

Proceed to the following. Check of buzzer sound

0 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

12

Check of buzzer sound

Status of the GOT when it freezes (screen operation stopped) Check of switching to the utility screen

Executing the I/O check from the GOT utility

Check of the objects that are not displayed on the monitor screen

Check Symptom Cause/status Corrective action No buzzer sound Proceed to the following.

Status of the GOT when it freezes (screen operation stopped)

Continues to beep randomly. Buzzer sound:

Example: The rhythm repeats as three beeps, one beep, and two beeps.

Continues to beep in a particular pattern.

Beeps continuously. When the read device of the system information was set, the device was turned on and the Buzzer Output signal was input.

Check the setting of the read device. If the Buzzer Output signal has no error, proceed to the following. Status of the GOT when it freezes (screen operation stopped)

Check Symptom Cause/status Corrective action Possible Error code (system alarm):

Example: 460 Communication unit error

When the system alarm display function can be used, take the action for the error code (system alarm) displayed. If the corrective action cannot be taken, proceed to the following. Executing the I/O check from the GOT utility

Impossible The system alarm cannot be used. Proceed to the following. Check of the objects that are not displayed on the monitor screen

Check Symptom Cause/status Corrective action Communication error Display details:

Example: A message indicating that the cause may be a connection error has been displayed.

Proceed to the following. Check of the objects that are not displayed on the monitor screen

No error The hardware such as a communication interface has no error.

Proceed to the following. PLC status

Check Symptom Cause/status Corrective action Found Details:

Example: The numerical display object is not displayed.

Proceed to the following. PLC status Not found

12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.1 GOT Restoration Sheets 371

37

PLC status PLC failure Check Symptom Cause/status Corrective action Always occurs. CONTROL-BUS. ERROR, SP. UNIT LAY.

ERROR, or others is considered. Error code (system alarm):

Example: 1204 CPU H/W failure

Proceed to the following. Page 381 Troubleshooting for the Bus Connection

Occurs sometimes. The PLC CPU may be affected by noise or the hardware may be faulty. Frequency:

Example: Once a month Error code (system alarm):

Example: 1204 CPU H/W failure

Proceed to the following. GOT restoration procedure

Operates normally.

2 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

12

GOT restoration procedure Follow the procedure below starting from 1), and check if the GOT is restored. Perform the action in each check item and mark the corresponding checkbox. If the GOT is restored, take the action after restoration. If the GOT is not restored, proceed to the next check item.

*1 Models other than GT23 are the targets. The GOT reset switch does not operate when the bus connection is used.

*2 Models other than GT23 are the targets. When using the bus connection, do not turn off and then on the GOT while the PLC power is on. Make sure to turn off the PLC first, and turn off and then on the GOT.

*3 Models other than GT23 are the targets. Powering off the GOT causes an error in the control station for the MELSECNET/H connection or in the master station for the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).

Faulty product investigation If you cannot restore the GOT, consult your local sales office. Depending on the problem details, we may ask you to send the faulty product to us. In that case, attach the GOT status check sheet, GOT installation status check sheet, and system configuration check sheet filled with details about your system.

No. Check item Check Cause/status Action after restoration 1) Press the GOT reset switch. *1*3 Restored

Not restored If the GOT is restored by the operation on the left, a temporary malfunction or others due to noise is considered.

Perform the following. Page 374 GOT installation status check sheet2) Power on/off the GOT. *2*3 Restored

Not restored

3) Reset or power on/off the PLC CPU. Restored Not restored

4) Power on/off the GOT and PLC CPU simultaneously.

Restored Not restored

5) Connect the cable again. Restored Not restored

If the GOT is restored by the operation on the left, the cable connection may be faulty.

Securely connect the cable. If an error occurs again, proceed to the following. Faulty product investigation

6) Write the package data again. Restored Not restored

If the GOT is restored by the operation on the left, data may have been destroyed by an action such as powering off the GOT during the package data writing or basic software installation.

Do not power off the GOT during data transfer. If an error occurs again, proceed to the following. Faulty product investigation

7) Install the basic software again. Restored Not restored

8) Take the preventive measures against noise, which is described in the following. Page 374 GOT installation status check sheet

Restored Not restored

A temporary malfunction or others due to noise is considered.

Perform the following. Page 374 GOT installation status check sheet

9) Replace the unit. Restored Not restored

If the GOT is restored by the operation on the left, the unit may has a hardware failure.

Install the failure unit to the GOT again to check that the unit causes the malfunction. After the check, proceed to the following. Faulty product investigation

10) If the GOT is not restored by 1) to 9), proceed to the following. Faulty product investigation

12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.1 GOT Restoration Sheets 373

37

GOT installation status check sheet Check the installation status of your GOT regarding the following items. Control panel inside wiring Control panel outside wiring Wiring of the FG cable and power line for the GOT Measures against surge Installation status Grounding status of the control panel having the GOT Power supply system Mark the checkboxes that apply to the current status, and take the relevant measures if necessary. If the measures is taken, mark the checkbox of the effect.

Each GOT has the following ground terminals. GT27 (except GT2705-V), GT25 (except GT25-W and GT2505-V), GT23: FG terminal and LG terminal GT2705-V, GT25-W, GT2505-V, GT21: FG terminal

Control panel inside wiring Current status Check if power lines, such as power cables and servo amplifier driving cables, and communication cables, such as bus connection cables (except for GT23) and network cables, are mixed in the wiring duct inside the control panel.

Measure for the mixed cables Wiring the power lines and the communication cables inside the control panel without mixing them in the duct reduces the influence of noise.

Check result Mixed Not mixed

Effect Effective Ineffective

NFB

MC MC RA RA

NFB

MC MC RA RA

4 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

12

Control panel outside wiring Current status Check if the power line and the communication cable are installed together.

Measure for the cables tied in a bundle As shown in the figure below, leading the power line and communication cable separately from different places to the outside of the control panel reduces the influence of noise from the power line.

Separating the communication cable from the power line or using a separator (made of metal) in the duct, as shown below, reduces the influence of noise.

Wiring of the FG cable and power line for the GOT Current status Check if the FG cable and power line of the GOT are installed together.

Measure for the cables tied in a bundle Separating the FG cable and power line of the GOT reduces the influence of noise.

Check result Installed together Not installed together

Effect Effective Ineffective

Effect Effective Ineffective

Check result Installed together Not installed together

Effect Effective Ineffective

Power line

Communication cable

Communication cable

Power line

Power line

Wiring duct Separator

Power line

Signal wire Communication

cable

100 mm or more

GOT

LG FG

Power for the power equipment

GOT

Power for the power equipment

LG FG

12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.1 GOT Restoration Sheets 375

37

Measures against surge Current status Check if a surge suppressor is used for the wiring of the load such as a molded case circuit breaker, electromagnetic contactor, relay, solenoid valve, or induction motor. When a surge suppressor is used, enter the surge suppressor model and the name of the equipment that uses the surge suppressor in the columns.

Entry column

Measure for the equipment without a surge suppressor Attaching a surge suppressor close to the load reduces the influence of surge on the GOT.

Check result Used Not used

Surge suppressor model Equipment name

Effect Effective Ineffective

AC

C

ROutput

L

L o a d

PLC

AC

C

ROutput

L L o a d

PLC

The surge suppressor must be attached close to the load.

6 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

12

Installation status Current status Check if the FG cables of the control equipment (such as a PLC) and the power equipment (such as a servo amplifier) are connected as shown in "a" of the following figure.

Measure when a single ground cable is led Perform independent grounding at two places as shown in Figure A. The independent grounding reduces the influence of noise. When independent grounding is unavailable, perform shared grounding as shown in Figure B.

Check result Applicable Not applicable

Effect Effective Ineffective

GOTFG LG

Connection cable

Panel grounding Panel grounding

FG

FG

CN1BCN1A

CN3CN2 LG

a

PLCServo amplifier

GOT FG LG

Connection cable

Panel grounding

Grounding for power system Grounding for power system

Grounding for control system

Terminal block Terminal block

Panel grounding

FG

FG

CN1BCN1A

CN3CN2 LG

PLCServo amplifier

Figure A

GOTFG LG

Connection cable

Panel grounding

Panel grounding

FG

FG

CN1BCN1A

CN3CN2 LG

PLCServo amplifier

Figure B

12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.1 GOT Restoration Sheets 377

37

Grounding status of the control panel having the GOT Current status Check if a single ground cable is led from the control panel having the control equipment such as a PLC to the control panel having the GOT.

Measure when a single ground cable is led Measure 1 A malfunction may be prevented by connecting the ground cable to the control panel having the GOT as shown in Figure A to reduce the potential difference. If wiring as shown in Figure A is unavailable, perform wiring as shown in Figure B.

Measure 2 By attaching a ferrite core (KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD. RFC-H13 or equivalent) to the ground cable connected to the control panel having the GOT as shown in Figure C, the influence of noise is reduced. If wiring as shown in Figure C is unavailable, perform wiring as shown in Figure D.

Check result Applicable Not applicable

Effect Effective Ineffective

Effect Effective Ineffective

Connection cable

Ground cable led from the panel having the control equipment

GOT FG LG

GOT

Grounding to the panel

Ground wires

Use as short and thick a wire as possible.

FG LG

Connection cable

Figure A

GOT

Grounding to the panel

Ground wires FG LG

Connection cable

Figure B

GOT

Grounding to the panel

Ferrite coreGround wires

FG LG

Connection cable

Use as short and thick a wire as possible.

Figure C

GOT

Grounding to the panel

Ground wires FG LG

Connection cable

Ferrite core

Figure D

8 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

12

Power supply system Current status Check if the power is supplied for the GOT, I/O equipment (such as a relay), and power equipment (such as a servo amplifier) from the same system.

Measure when a single ground cable is led By separately wiring the GOT power and the I/O equipment power/power equipment power, and connecting an isolation transformer, the influence of noise is reduced.

Check result Applicable Not applicable

Effect Effective Ineffective

Main power 200VAC

I/O power

Main circuit power

Isolation transformer

PLC GOT

I/O equipment

Power equipment

PLC power

Main power 200VAC

I/O power

Main circuit power

Isolation transformer

PLC GOT

I/O equipment

Power equipment

PLC power

12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.1 GOT Restoration Sheets 379

38

System configuration check sheet Fill in the following table with the details of the system configuration, such as the GOT type and unit model.

System configuration for the GOT

System configuration for the PLC

Entry column for recurrence (when the malfunction has occurred after the corrective action was taken)

Item System configuration

Usage Model GOT (Example: GT2710-STBA)

Communication interface Communication unit Used, Not used

GOT built-in interface Used, Not used

Option unit Used, Not used

Cable between the controller and GOT

Cable length

When using any other units or options, describe them.

Item System configuration

Usage Model Power supply module

CPU

Serial communication module Computer link module

Used, Not used

Network module Used, Not used

Interrupt module Used, Not used

Positioning module Used, Not used

Number of PLC extension base units extension base units

When using any other units or others, describe them.

Describe the operation situation when the GOT screen froze or the GOT display is faulty at the recurrence.

0 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.1 GOT Restoration Sheets

12

12.2 Troubleshooting for the Bus Connection If an error occurs in the bus connection between the GOT and the PLC CPU and the cause is not clear with the system alarm, perform the troubleshooting described in this section. For the details of the system alarm, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) For the details of the bus connection, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 that covers the controller used

Identifying the error position This section explains how to identify the error position. For the details of the PLC CPU error and special register, refer to the User's Manual of the PLC CPU used.

How to identify the error position Identify the error position, modify the sequence program or replace the module where the error occurs, and check whether the error occurs again. If the error occurs again, other causes are considered. Refer to the following to narrow possible error positions. Refer to the User's Manual of the PLC CPU you use.

Checking the error in the PLC 1. Check the type of the error detected in the PLC using GX Works2 or others.

2. Check each module and the installation and grounding status of the cables according to the error message on the PLC CPU.

Checking the error occurrence timing Check the timing of the error occurrence. An error occurs when the power is turned on or immediately after the PLC is reset. The error may be detected in the initial process of the PLC CPU. In this case, since the faulty module cannot be usually identified, set only the END instruction in the sequence program and remove the modules one by one. When the error is eliminated after a specific module has been removed, the module may have caused the error. An error occurs after or several seconds after a specific operation. The error may occur in the sequence program. Check the error step where the error may occur and the sequence program in the step. You can determine whether the whole sequence program has a problem by setting only the END instruction in the sequence program. An error occurs when a specific device operates. A malfunction caused by noise is considered. Check if any signal line such as a bus connection cable is not installed close to the operating device. If the line is close to the device, keep a distance of 100 mm or more between the line and the device.

Identifying the module where an error occurs Identify the module where an error occurs using the PLC CPU error codes and special resister information.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.2 Troubleshooting for the Bus Connection 381

38

Narrowing the possible error positions If the system cannot be restored even though the module with an error is replaced, another module may cause the error. Disconnect the extension cables and bus connection cables in order, starting from the module at the end of the system, and check for the error. The module, extension cable, or bus connection cable disconnected immediately before the error does not occur is considered to cause the error. The following shows examples of narrowing possible error positions. (When QnASCPU and an extension base unit are used)

Repeat examples 1 and 2 above to identify the error position.

Precautions for narrowing the possible error positions When disconnecting the modules from the extension base unit in order, setting only the END instruction in the sequence program eliminates errors arising from the sequence program. Therefore, you can check the error occurrence easily. When the error does not occur frequently, take time to check the error occurrence with the modules disconnected. This check is effective to identify a noise invading route when the malfunction is caused by noise.

Turn off the power of the GOT.

Disconnect the bus connection cable (IN side) from the GOT located at the final stage.

If an error does not occur, the GOT located at the final stage may be faulty.

Example 1: Example 2:

Turn off the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the GOT.

Turn off the power of the GOT.

Disconnect the bus connection cable (OUT side) from the GOT located at one stage before the final stage.

If an error does not occur, the GOT located at the final stage and the bus connection cable connected to that GOT may be faulty.

Turn off the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the GOT.

2 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.2 Troubleshooting for the Bus Connection

12

Specific example of troubleshooting With the following system as an example, this section shows a troubleshooting when an error occurs in the PLC CPU. (When QnASCPU and an extension base unit are used)

PLC (main base unit) GOT 1) GOT 2)

PLC (extension base unit) Bus connection

cable Bus connection cable

Extension cable

Start

Check the error code/step appearing on the PLC CPU. (Identify the status of the error and the location where the error occurs.)

Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 2) at IN side. (to further identify the error positions)

The SP. UNIT DOWN message appears on the PLC CPU.

Turn off the power of the GOT. Turn off the power of the PLC.

Replace the faulty PLC CPU with a new one.

Turn on the power of the PLC. Turn on the power of the GOT.

A further error occurs. (not on PLC CPU.)

Turn off the power of the GOT. Turn off the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the PLC. Turn on the power of the GOT.

A further error occurs. (not on the GOT 2) (bus connection unit)).

Turn off the power of the GOT. Turn off the power of the PLC.

Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 1) at OUT side. (to further identify the error positions)

Turn on the power of the PLC. Turn on the power of the GOT.

No error occurs.

The bus connection cable connecting the GOT 1) to the GOT 2) is identified as faulty. Replace the faulty bus connection cable with a new one.

End

12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.2 Troubleshooting for the Bus Connection 383

38

12.3 Error Messages and System Alarms This section explains the error messages and system alarms displayed on the GOT. The system alarm function displays the error code and error message when an error occurs in the GOT, controller, or network. For the details of the system alarm, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Error code and channel No. You can check error codes in the error code storage area of the system information function. You can check the channel No. where an error occurs with the GOT special register (GS262 to 264). For the details of the system information and GOT special register, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Displayed contents The section explains an example of displaying an error code and error message on the GOT.

Displaying the error codes and error messages with the popup display (Alarm popup display) When an error occurs, the GOT can display the error code and error message with the popup display at the front of the monitor screen. Since an alarm pops up regardless of the screen, you cannot miss the error.

Displaying the error codes and error messages in a list (System alarm display) When an error occurs, the GOT can display the error codes and error messages in the list set on the screen. Displaying multiple errors and recording the events as history are available.

A 1254

348B A 1254

348B

04/6/1 13:20 Power module

Generated alarms are popped up regardless of the screen.

04/6/1 8:05 Fuse error

Date Time Message Recovered Checked 04/6/1 10:25 Temp.error

Create a screen to display alarms, and confirm the details of the alarms and take measures for the errors.

11:25 10:45

4 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.3 Error Messages and System Alarms

12

Checking error messages with the utility (Utility) You can check the error codes and error messages using the system alarm display of the utility even though its object is not set. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Error codes and reference manuals

*1 For the details of the GOT special registers (GS262 to GS264), refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*2 FXCPU has error codes 100 to 109, indicating the status of M8060 to M8069. (Example) If error code (100) occurs, handle the error according to the M8060 description.

*3 The GOT displays the error code displayed on the servo amplifier (hexadecimal) in decimal + 20000. Therefore, when referring to the manual of the servo amplifier with the error code displayed on the GOT using the system alarm, subtract 20000 from the GOT error code and convert the last 3 digits into the hexadecimal number. (Example: When the GOT system alarm shows 20144, the error code of the servo amplifier is 90H.)

*4 Depending on the error code, the channel No. is not stored. For channel No. storage availability of each error code, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

*5 With the system alarm related to the file access, you cannot identify the drive where the alarm occurs. However, you can identify the drive by checking the File Access Error signal (b7 to b10) of System signal 2-2.

Error source Error code Description Storage location of channel No. with error *1

Reference

Controller 0 to 99 (Value of D9008)

Error code of CPU (ACPU) GS263 User's Manual of the ACPU connected to the GOT

100 to 299 Error code of the following controllers FXCPU *2

Non-Mitsubishi Electric PLC Temperature controller (OMRON temperature controller only)

Manual of the controller connected to the GOT Deal with errors according to the error messages.

GOT *5 300 to 399 Error code of the GOT main unit function GS262 *4 GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

400 to 499 Error code of the GOT communication function

500 to 699 Error code of the GOT main unit function

Network 800 to 999 Error code of the network GS264

CPU 1000 to 10000 (Value of SD0)

Error code of the CPU (QCPU, LCPU, or QnACPU)

GS263 User's Manual of the QCPU, LCPU, or QnACPU connected to the GOT

Error code of an RCPU or Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series)

A system alarm message appears to indicate the code of the error occurring in an RCPU. For the displayed contents of the system alarms, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) For error handling, check the manual of the RCPU.

Error code of an FX5CPU A system alarm message appears to indicate the code of the error occurring in an FX5CPU. For the displayed contents of the system alarms, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) For error handling, check the manual of the FX5CPU.

Motion CPU 10001 to 10999 Error code of a Motion CPU (Q173D(S)CPU/Q172D(S)CPU/ Q170M(S)CPU)

*6

CNC C70 11000 to 11999 Error code of the CNC (Q173NCCPU)

*7

Robot controller 12000 to 12999 Error code of the robot controller *8

CPU 15000 to 15999 Error code of an RCPU *9

16000 Error code of an FX5CPU *10

Servo amplifier *3 20016 to 21121 Error code of the servo amplifier User's Manual of the servo amplifier connected to the GOT

12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.3 Error Messages and System Alarms 385

38

*6 The GOT displays the error code corresponding to an error occurring in the multiple CPU system. Check the error details with MT Developer or MT Works2. For error handling, refer to the manual of the Motion CPU.

*7 The GOT displays the error code corresponding to an error occurring in the multiple CPU system. Check the error details with the CNC monitor. For error handling, refer to the manual of the CNC.

*8 The GOT displays the error code corresponding to an error occurring in a robot controller in the multiple CPU system or a standalone robot controller. Check the error details with RT ToolBox2 or RT ToolBox3. For error handling, refer to the manual of the robot controller.

*9 The GOT displays the error code corresponding to an error occurring in an RCPU or Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series). Check the error details with GX Works3 or MT Works2. For error handling, refer to the manual of the RCPU or Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).

*10 The GOT displays the error code corresponding to an error occurring in an FX5CPU. Check the error details with GX Works3. For error handling, refer to the manual of the FX5CPU.

Error messages and system alarms For the details of the error messages and the system alarms displayed on the GOT, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

6 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12.3 Error Messages and System Alarms

13

13 APPENDICES Page 388 External Dimension Diagrams Page 415 Cable Bend Radius for GT27 with an Extension Unit Page 420 Cable Bend Radius for GT25 with an Extension Unit Page 423 Depth Dimensions for the GOT with an SD Card Unit Page 424 Depth Dimensions for the GOT with Extension Units Mounted in Multiple Stages Page 426 External Dimension Diagrams of the Communication Cable Page 429 External Dimension Diagrams of the External Cable for Handy GOT Page 432 Confirming of Versions and Conforming Standards Page 433 Transportation Precautions Page 434 Calculating Consumed Current of GT2705-V Page 435 Open Source Software

13 APPENDICES 387

38

13.1 External Dimension Diagrams GT27

GT2715-X

397 (15.63)

30 0

(1 1.

81 )

20 (0

.7 9)

28 1

(1 1.

06 )

60 (2

.3 6)

46 (1

.8 1)

322 (12.68)

322 (12.68)

382 (15.04)10 (0.39)

Unit: mm (inch)

6 (0

.2 4)

10 (0

.3 9)

10

(0 .3

9)

10 (0.39)

8 13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams

13

GT2712-S

316 (12.44)

24 6

(9 .6

9)

22 7

(8 .9

4) 10

(0 .3

9)

10 (0

.3 9)

52 (2

.0 5)

6 (0

.2 4)

241 (9.49)

241 (9.49)

301 (11.85)

Unit: mm (inch)

13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams 389

39

GT2710-S, GT2710-V

303 (11.93)

208 (8.19)

228 (8.98)

288 (11.34)

21 8

(8 .5

8)

19 9

(7 .8

3) 10

(0 .3

9) 10

(0 .3

9)

52 (2

.0 5)

6 (0

.2 4)

Unit: mm (inch)

0 13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams

13

GT2708-S, GT2708-V

241 (9.49)

166 (6.54)

226 (8.90)

171.6 (6.76) 37.5 (1.48)

37.5 (1.48)

17 5

(6 .8

9)

19 4

(7 .6

4)

10 (0

.3 9)

10 (0

.3 9)

52 (2

.0 5)

6 (0

.2 4)

Unit: mm (inch)

13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams 391

39

GT2705-V

167 (6.57)

117 (4.61)

89 (3.50)

152 (5.98)

13 9

(5 .4

7)

12 0

(4 .7

2)

Unit: mm (inch)

10 (0

.3 9)

10 (0

.3 9)

6 (0

.2 4)

60 (2

.3 6)

2 13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams

13

GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W

GT2512-WX

Unit: mm (inch)

21 0

(8 .2

7) 10

(0 .3

9) 10

(0 .3

9)

290 (11.42)

299 (11.77)

21 9

(8 .6

2)

48 (1

.8 9)

230 (9.06) 35

(1.38)

230 (9.06)35 (1.38)

6 (0

.2 4)

13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams 393

39

GT2510-WX 10

18 5

(7 .2

8) 10

243 (9.57)

19 4

(7 .6

4) 6

48

252 (9.92)

203 (7.99)24.5

24.5 203 (7.99) (0.96)

Unit: mm (inch)

(0 .3

9)

(1 .8

9)

(0 .2

4)

(0.96)

(0 .3

9)

4 13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams

13

GT2507-W

180 (7.09)

14 2

(5 .5

9) 6

48

10 13

3 (5

.2 4)

10

189 (7.44)

142 (5.59)

145 (5.71)

Unit: mm (inch)

(0 .3

9)

(1 .8

9)

(0 .2

4)(0 .3

9)

13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams 395

39

GT2507T-W

55 (2

.1 7)

14 0

(5 .5

1)

15 8

(6 .2

2)

196 (7.72)

214 (8.43)

148 (5.83)

148 (5.83)

33 (1.30)

33 (1.30)

Unit: mm (inch)

10 (0

.3 9)

10 (0

.3 9)

6 (0

.2 4)

6 13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams

13

GT25-S, GT25-V

GT2512-S

316 (12.44)

24 6

(9 .6

9)

22 7

(8 .9

4) 10

(0 .3

9)

10 (0

.3 9)

52 (2

.0 5)

6 (0

.2 4)

241 (9.49)

241 (9.49)

301 (11.85)

Unit: mm (inch)

13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams 397

39

GT2512F-S

347 (13.66) 311 (12.24)

27 3

(1 0.

75 )

23 7

(9 .3

3)

22 7

(8 .9

4)

301 (11.85)

54 (2.13)

The values indicate the dimensions when all the fittings are installed to the GOT. Install the fittings on the top and bottom, or the right and left of the GOT.

Unit: mm (inch)

8 13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams

13

GT2510-V

303 (11.93)

208 (8.19)

228 (8.98)

288 (11.34)

21 8

(8 .5

8)

19 9

(7 .8

3) 10

(0 .3

9) 10

(0 .3

9)

52 (2

.0 5)

6 (0

.2 4)

Unit: mm (inch)

13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams 399

40

GT2510F-V

334 (13.15) 298 (11.73)

24 5

(9 .6

5) 20

9 (8

.2 3)

19 9

(7 .8

3)

Unit: mm (inch)

54 (2.13)

288 (11.34)

The values indicate the dimensions when all the fittings are installed to the GOT. Install the fittings on the top and bottom, or the right and left of the GOT.

0 13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams

13

GT2508-V

241 (9.49)

166 (6.54)

226 (8.90)

171.6 (6.76) 37.5 (1.48)

37.5 (1.48)

17 5

(6 .8

9)

19 4

(7 .6

4)

10 (0

.3 9)

10 (0

.3 9)

52 (2

.0 5)

6 (0

.2 4)

Unit: mm (inch)

13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams 401

40

GT2508F-V

272 (10.71) 236 (9.29)

22 1

(8 .7

0) 18

5 (7

.2 8)

17 5

(6 .8

9)

54 (2.13)

226 (8.90)

The values indicate the dimensions when all the fittings are installed to the GOT. Install the fittings on the top and bottom, or the right and left of the GOT.

Unit: mm (inch)

2 13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams

13

GT2505-V

164 (6.46)

12 0

(4 .7

2)

13 9

(5 .4

7)

10 (0

.3 9)

152 (5.98)

53 .5

(2 .1

1) 6

(0 .2

4)

122 (4.80) 22 (0.87)

Unit: mm (inch)

10 (0

.3 9)

122 (4.80) 22 (0.87)

13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams 403

40

GT25HS-V

GT2506HS-V

201 (7.91) 21 (0.83) 50 (1.97) 47 (1.85)

23 0

(9 .0

6)

Unit: mm (inch)

4 13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams

13

GT2505HS-V

Unit: mm (inch)

145 (5.71) 33.8

18 5

(7 .2

8)

20.5 45.5 (1.79) (0.81) (1.33)

13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams 405

40

GT23

GT2310-V

Unit: mm (inch)

303 (11.93)

208 (8.19)

228 (8.98)

288 (11.34)

21 8

(8 .5

8)

19 9

(7 .8

3) 10

(0 .3

9) 10

(0 .3

9)

56 (2

.2 0)

6 (0

.2 4)

6 13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams

13

GT2308-V

Unit: mm (inch)

241 (9.49)

166 (6.54)

166 (6.54)

226 (8.90)

19 4

(7 .6

4)

17 5

(6 .8

9) 10

(0

.3 9)

10

(0 .3

9)

56 (2

.2 0)

6 (0

.2 4)

13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams 407

40

GT21

GT2107-WTBD, GT2107-WTSD

6 (0

.2 4)

48 (1

.8 9)

14 2

(5 .5

9)

13 3

(5 .2

4) 10

(0 .3

9)

145 (5.71) 22

(0.87)

142 (5.59)

23.5 (0.93) 189 (7.44)

180 (7.09)

10 (0

.3 9)

Unit: mm (inch)

8 13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams

13

GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS

Unit: mm (inch)

122 (4.80)

122 (4.80) 16

(0.63)

164 (6.46)

13 5

(5 .3

1)

10

(0 .3

9) 10

(0

.3 9)

12 0

(4 .7

2)

152 (5.98)

55 (2

.1 7)

47 (1

.8 5)

6 (0

.2 4)

16 (0.63)

13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams 409

41

GT2104-RTBD

GT2104-PMBD

18.5 (0.73)

9.5 (0.37) 78 (3.07)

128 (5.04)

20.5 (0.81)

78 (3.07)

9. 5

(0 .3

7) 9.

5 (0

.3 7)

117 (4.61)

40 (1

.5 7)

2. 9

(0 .1

1) 4.

5 (0

.1 8)

10 2

(4 .0

2)

91 (3

.5 8)

Unit: mm (inch)

94 (3.70)

136 (5.35)

65 (2

.5 6)

4. 5

(0 .1

8)

32 .5

(1 .2

8)

145 (5.71)

76 (2

.9 9)

20.5 (0.81)9.5

(0.37)

94 (3.70)

21.5 (0.85)

9. 5

(0 .3

7) 9.

5 (0

.3 7)

29 .5

(1 .1

6)

Unit: mm (inch)

0 13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams

13

GT2104-PMBDS

GT2104-PMBDS2

65 (2

.5 6)

94 (3.70)

20.5 (0.81)9.5

(0.37)

94 (3.70)

21.5 (0.85)

145 (5.71)

76 (2

.9 9)

136 (5.35)

4. 5

(0 .1

8)

29 .5

(1 .1

6)

9. 5

(0 .3

7) 9.

5 (0

.3 7)

Unit: mm (inch)

65 (2

.5 6)

94 (3.70)

20.5 (0.81)

9.5 (0.37)

94 (3.70)21.5 (0.85)

145 (5.71)

76 (2

.9 9)

Unit: mm (inch)

136 (5.35)

4. 5

(0 .1

8)

29 .5

(1 .1

6)

9. 5

(0 .3

7) 9.

5 (0

.3 7)

13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams 411

41

GT2104-PMBLS

GT2103-PMBD

65 (2

.5 6)

94 (3.70)

20.5 (0.81)

9.5 (0.37)

94 (3.70)21.5 (0.85)

145 (5.71)

76 (2

.9 9)

Unit: mm (inch)

136 (5.35)

4. 5

(0 .1

8)

29 .5

(1 .1

6)

9. 5

(0 .3

7) 9.

5 (0

.3 7)

113 (4.45)

74 (2

.9 1)

104 (4.09)

27 (1

.0 6)

4 (0

.1 6)

65 (2

.5 6)

9. 5

(0 .3

7) 9.

5 (0

.3 7)

64 (2.52)

19 (0.75)

21 (0.83)

64 (2.52)

9.5 (0.37)

32 (1

.2 6)

Unit: mm (inch)

2 13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams

13

GT2103-PMBDS

GT2103-PMBDS2

113 (4.45)

64 (2.52)

64 (2.52)

21 (0.83)

9.5 (0.37)

19 (0.75)

Unit: mm (inch)

74 (2

.9 1)

104 (4.09)

27 (1

.0 6)

4 (0

.1 6)

65 (2

.5 6)

9. 5

(0 .3

7) 9.

5 (0

.3 7)

64 (2.52)

19 (0.75)9.5

(0.37)

21 (0.83)

64 (2.52) 113

(4.45)9. 5

(0 .3

7) 9.

5 (0

.3 7)

65 (2

.5 6)

74 (2

.9 1)

4 (0

.1 6)

27 (1

.0 6)

104 (4.09)

Unit: mm (inch)

13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams 413

41

GT2103-PMBLS

Unit: mm (inch)

19 (0.75)

64 (2.52)9.5

(0.37)

21 (0.83)

64 (2.52) 113

(4.45)

9. 5

(0 .3

7) 9.

5 (0

.3 7)

65 (2

.5 6)

74 (2

.9 1)

104 (4.09)

27 (1

.0 6)

4 (0

.1 6)

4 13 APPENDICES 13.1 External Dimension Diagrams

13

13.2 Cable Bend Radius for GT27 with an Extension Unit

The following shows the cable bend radius for the GOT with one extension unit.

If the cable from the extension unit does not hang below the bottom of the GOT, dimension A is smaller than dimension B.

GT2715-X Unit: mm (inch)

*1 For cables prepared by the user, the dimensions in the table are not applied. *2 If the cable from the extension unit does not hang below the bottom of the GOT, the dimension is 0. *3 For details of the cable for GT15-J71LP23-25 (optical loop unit), contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. *4 The bend radius depends on the Ethernet cable to be used.

Model A B C *2 R (cable bend radius) GT25-J71E71-100 *4 38 (1.50) 135 (5.31) 0 34 (1.34)

GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2

88 (3.46) 139 (5.47) 0 50 (1.97)

GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L

88 (3.46) 0 50 (1.97)

GT15-RS2-9P *1

GT15-RS4-9S *1 72.5 (2.85) 0 27.5 (1.08)

GT15-RS4-TE *1 33.5 (1.32) 0 -

GT15-J71LP23-25 *3 *3 *3

GT15-J71BR13 79 (3.11) 0 30 (1.18)

GT25-J71GN13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 135 (5.31) 0 26 (1.02)

GT15-J71GP23-SX 65 (2.56) 139 (5.47) 0 15 (0.59)

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 0 26 (1.02)

GT15-J61BT13 47 (1.85) 0 28 (1.10)

GT25-FNADP - 0 -

GT27-V4-Z 132 (5.20) 0 20 (0.79)

GT27-R2 75 (2.96) 0 32 (1.26)

GT27-R2-Z 77 (3.03) 0 32 (1.26)

GT27-V4R1-Z BNC: 132 (5.20) RGB: 77 (3.03)

0 BNC: 20 (0.79) RGB: 32 (1.26)

GT27-ROUT 75 (2.96) 0 32 (1.26)

GT27-ROUT-Z 77 (3.03) 0 32 (1.26)

GT27-VHOUT 159.5 (6.28) 140 (5.51) 19 (0.75) 54 (2.13)

GT27-MMR-Z 132 (5.20) 139 (5.47) 0 20 (0.79)

GT15-PRN 52 (2.05) 0 18 (0.71)

GT15-DIO 77 (3.03) 0 43 (1.69)

GT15-DIOR

GT15-SOUT 41 (1.61) 0 30 (1.18)

B A

CR Extension unit

Rear face

13 APPENDICES 13.2 Cable Bend Radius for GT27 with an Extension Unit 415

41

GT2712-S Unit: mm (inch)

*1 For cables prepared by the user, the dimensions in the table are not applied. *2 If the cable from the extension unit does not hang below the bottom of the GOT, the dimension is 0. *3 For details of the cable for GT15-J71LP23-25 (optical loop unit), contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. *4 The bend radius depends on the Ethernet cable to be used.

Model A B C *2 R (cable bend radius) GT25-J71E71-100 *4 38 (1.50) 81 (3.19) 0 34 (1.34)

GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2

88 (3.46) 85 (3.35) 3 (0.12) 50 (1.97)

GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L

88 (3.46) 3 (0.12) 50 (1.97)

GT15-RS2-9P *1

GT15-RS4-9S *1 72.5 (2.85) 0 27.5 (1.08)

GT15-RS4-TE *1 33.5 (1.32) 0 -

GT15-J71LP23-25 *3 *3 *3

GT15-J71BR13 79 (3.11) 0 30 (1.18)

GT25-J71GN13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 81 (3.19) 0 26 (1.02)

GT15-J71GP23-SX 65 (2.56) 85 (3.35) 0 15 (0.59)

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 0 26 (1.02)

GT15-J61BT13 47 (1.85) 0 28 (1.10)

GT25-FNADP - - -

GT27-V4-Z 132 (5.20) 47 (1.85) 20 (0.79)

GT27-R2 75 (2.96) 0 32 (1.26)

GT27-R2-Z 77 (3.03) 0 32 (1.26)

GT27-V4R1-Z BNC: 132 (5.20) RGB: 77 (3.03)

BNC: 47 (1.85) RGB: 0

BNC: 20 (0.79) RGB: 32 (1.26)

GT27-ROUT 75 (2.96) 0 32 (1.26)

GT27-ROUT-Z 77 (3.03) 0 32 (1.26)

GT27-VHOUT 159.5 (6.28) 86 (3.39) 73.5 (2.89) 54 (2.13)

GT27-MMR-Z 132 (5.20) 85 (3.35) 47 (1.85) 20 (0.79)

GT15-PRN 52 (2.05) 0 18 (0.71)

GT15-DIO 77 (3.03) 0 43 (1.69)

GT15-DIOR

GT15-SOUT 41 (1.61) 0 30 (1.18)

6 13 APPENDICES 13.2 Cable Bend Radius for GT27 with an Extension Unit

13

GT2710-S, GT2710-V Unit: mm (inch)

*1 For cables prepared by the user, the dimensions in the table are not applied. *2 If the cable from the extension unit does not hang below the bottom of the GOT, the dimension is 0. *3 For details of the cable for GT15-J71LP23-25 (optical loop unit), contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. *4 The bend radius depends on the Ethernet cable to be used.

Model A B C *2 R (cable bend radius) GT25-J71E71-100 *4 38 (1.50) 74 (2.91) 0 34 (1.34)

GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2

88 (3.46) 78 (3.07) 10 (0.39) 50 (1.97)

GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L

88 (3.46) 10 (0.39) 50 (1.97)

GT15-RS2-9P *1

GT15-RS4-9S *1 72.5 (2.85) 0 27.5 (1.08)

GT15-RS4-TE *1 33.5 (1.32) 0 -

GT15-J71LP23-25 *3 *3 *3

GT15-J71BR13 79 (3.11) 1 (0.04) 30 (1.18)

GT25-J71GN13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 74 (2.91) 0 26 (1.02)

GT15-J71GP23-SX 65 (2.56) 78 (3.07) 0 15 (0.59)

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 0 26 (1.02)

GT15-J61BT13 47 (1.85) 0 28 (1.10)

GT25-FNADP - - -

GT27-V4-Z 132 (5.20) 54 (2.13) 20 (0.79)

GT27-R2 75 (2.96) 0 32 (1.26)

GT27-R2-Z 77 (3.03) 0 32 (1.26)

GT27-V4R1-Z BNC: 132 (5.20) RGB: 77 (3.03)

BNC: 54 (2.13) RGB: 0

BNC: 20 (0.79) RGB: 32 (1.26)

GT27-ROUT 75 (2.96) 0 32 (1.26)

GT27-ROUT-Z 77 (3.03) 0 32 (1.26)

GT27-VHOUT 159.5 (6.28) 79 (3.11) 80.5 (3.17) 54 (2.13)

GT27-MMR-Z 132 (5.20) 78 (3.07) 54 (2.13) 20 (0.79)

GT15-PRN 52 (2.05) 0 18 (0.71)

GT15-DIO 77 (3.03) 0 43 (1.69)

GT15-DIOR

GT15-SOUT 41 (1.61) 0 30 (1.18)

13 APPENDICES 13.2 Cable Bend Radius for GT27 with an Extension Unit 417

41

GT2708-S, GT2708-V Unit: mm (inch)

*1 For cables prepared by the user, the dimensions in the table are not applied. *2 If the cable from the extension unit does not hang below the bottom of the GOT, the dimension is 0. *3 For details of the cable for GT15-J71LP23-25 (optical loop unit), contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. *4 The bend radius depends on the Ethernet cable to be used.

Model A B C *2 R (cable bend radius) GT25-J71E71-100 *4 38 (1.50) 52 (2.05) 0 34 (1.34)

GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2

88 (3.46) 56 (2.20) 32 (1.26) 50 (1.97)

GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L

88 (3.46) 32 (1.26) 50 (1.97)

GT15-RS2-9P *1

GT15-RS4-9S *1 72.5 (2.85) 16.5 (0.65) 27.5 (1.08)

GT15-RS4-TE *1 33.5 (1.32) 0 -

GT15-J71LP23-25 *3 *3 *3

GT15-J71BR13 79 (3.11) 23 (0.91) 30 (1.18)

GT25-J71GN13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 52 (2.05) 13 (0.51) 26 (1.02)

GT15-J71GP23-SX 65 (2.56) 56 (2.20) 9 (0.35) 15 (0.59)

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 9 (0.35) 26 (1.02)

GT15-J61BT13 47 (1.85) 0 28 (1.10)

GT25-FNADP - - -

GT27-V4-Z 132 (5.20) 76 (2.99) 20 (0.79)

GT27-R2 75 (2.96) 19 (0.75) 32 (1.26)

GT27-R2-Z 77 (3.03) 21 (0.83) 32 (1.26)

GT27-V4R1-Z BNC: 132 (5.20) RGB: 77 (3.03)

BNC: 76 (2.99) RGB: 21 (0.83)

BNC: 20 (0.79) RGB: 32 (1.26)

GT27-ROUT 75 (2.96) 19 (0.75) 32 (1.26)

GT27-ROUT-Z 77 (3.03) 21 (0.83) 32 (1.26)

GT27-VHOUT 159.5 (6.28) 57 (2.24) 102.5 (4.04) 54 (2.13)

GT27-MMR-Z 132 (5.20) 56 (2.20) 76 (2.99) 20 (0.79)

GT15-PRN 52 (2.05) 0 18 (0.71)

GT15-DIO 77 (3.03) 21 (0.83) 43 (1.69)

GT15-DIOR

GT15-SOUT 41 (1.61) 0 30 (1.18)

8 13 APPENDICES 13.2 Cable Bend Radius for GT27 with an Extension Unit

13

GT2705-V Unit: mm (inch)

*1 For cables prepared by the user, the dimensions in the table are not applied. *2 If the cable from the extension unit does not hang below the bottom of the GOT, the dimension is 0. *3 For details of the cable for GT15-J71LP23-25 (optical loop unit), contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. *4 The bend radius depends on the Ethernet cable to be used.

Model A B C *2 R (cable bend radius) GT25-J71E71-100 *4 38 (1.50) 12 (0.47) 26 (1.02) 34 (1.34)

GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2

88 (3.46) 16 (0.63) 72 (2.84) 50 (1.97)

GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L

88 (3.46) 72 (2.84) 50 (1.97)

GT15-RS2-9P *1

GT15-RS4-9S *1 72.5 (2.85) 56.5 (2.23) 27.5 (1.08)

GT15-RS4-TE *1 33.5 (1.32) 0 -

GT15-J71LP23-25 *3 *3 *3

GT15-J71BR13 79 (3.11) 63 (2.48) 30 (1.18)

GT25-J71GN13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 12 (0.47) 53 (2.09) 26 (1.02)

GT15-J71GP23-SX 65 (2.56) 16 (0.63) 49 (1.93) 15 (0.59)

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 49 (1.93) 26 (1.02)

GT15-J61BT13 47 (1.85) 0 28 (1.10)

GT25-FNADP - - -

GT15-PRN 52 (2.05) 36 (1.42) 18 (0.71)

GT15-DIO 77 (3.03) 61 (2.41) 43 (1.69)

GT15-DIOR

GT15-SOUT 41 (1.61) 0 30 (1.18)

13 APPENDICES 13.2 Cable Bend Radius for GT27 with an Extension Unit 419

42

13.3 Cable Bend Radius for GT25 with an Extension Unit

The following shows the cable bend radius for the GOT with one extension unit.

If the cable from the extension unit does not hang below the bottom of the GOT, dimension A is smaller than dimension B.

GT2512-S, GT2512F-S Unit: mm (inch)

*1 For cables prepared by the user, the dimensions in the table are not applied. *2 If the cable from the extension unit does not hang below the bottom of the GOT, the dimension is 0. *3 For details of the cable for GT15-J71LP23-25 (optical loop unit), contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. *4 The bend radius depends on the Ethernet cable to be used.

Model A B C *2 R (cable bend radius) GT25-J71E71-100 *4 38 (1.50) 81 (3.19) 0 34 (1.34)

GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2

88 (3.46) 85 (3.35) 3 (0.12) 50 (1.97)

GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L

88 (3.46) 3 (0.12) 50 (1.97)

GT15-RS2-9P *1

GT15-RS4-9S *1 72.5 (2.85) 0 27.5 (1.08)

GT15-RS4-TE *1 33.5 (1.32) 0 -

GT15-J71LP23-25 *3 *3 *3

GT15-J71BR13 79 (3.11) 0 30 (1.18)

GT25-J71GN13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 81 (3.19) 0 26 (1.02)

GT15-J71GP23-SX 65 (2.56) 85 (3.35) 0 15 (0.59)

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 0 26 (1.02)

GT15-J61BT13 47 (1.85) 0 28 (1.10)

GT25-FNADP - - -

GT15-PRN 52 (2.05) 0 18 (0.71)

GT15-DIO 77 (3.03) 0 43 (1.69)

GT15-DIOR

GT15-SOUT 41 (1.61) 0 30 (1.18)

Rear face Rear face (Open frame model)

Extension unit Extension unit

A B

CR A

B

CR

0 13 APPENDICES 13.3 Cable Bend Radius for GT25 with an Extension Unit

13

GT2510-V, GT2510F-V Unit: mm (inch)

*1 For cables prepared by the user, the dimensions in the table are not applied. *2 If the cable from the extension unit does not hang below the bottom of the GOT, the dimension is 0. *3 For details of the cable for GT15-J71LP23-25 (optical loop unit), contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. *4 The bend radius depends on the Ethernet cable to be used.

Model A B C *2 R (cable bend radius) GT25-J71E71-100 *4 38 (1.50) 74 (2.91) 0 34 (1.34)

GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2

88 (3.46) 78 (3.07) 10 (0.39) 50 (1.97)

GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L

88 (3.46) 10 (0.39) 50 (1.97)

GT15-RS2-9P *1

GT15-RS4-9S *1 72.5 (2.85) 0 27.5 (1.08)

GT15-RS4-TE *1 33.5 (1.32) 0 -

GT15-J71LP23-25 *3 *3 *3

GT15-J71BR13 79 (3.11) 1 (0.04) 30 (1.18)

GT25-J71GN13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 74 (2.91) 0 26 (1.02)

GT15-J71GP23-SX 65 (2.56) 78 (3.07) 0 15 (0.59)

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 0 26 (1.02)

GT15-J61BT13 47 (1.85) 0 28 (1.10)

GT25-FNADP - - -

GT15-PRN 52 (2.05) 0 18 (0.71)

GT15-DIO 77 (3.03) 0 43 (1.69)

GT15-DIOR

GT15-SOUT 41 (1.61) 0 30 (1.18)

13 APPENDICES 13.3 Cable Bend Radius for GT25 with an Extension Unit 421

42

GT2508-V, GT2508F-V Unit: mm (inch)

*1 For cables prepared by the user, the dimensions in the table are not applied. *2 If the cable from the extension unit does not hang below the bottom of the GOT, the dimension is 0. *3 For details of the cable for GT15-J71LP23-25 (optical loop unit), contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. *4 The bend radius depends on the Ethernet cable to be used.

Model A B C *2 R (cable bend radius) GT25-J71E71-100 *4 38 (1.50) 52 (2.05) 0 34 (1.34)

GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2

88 (3.46) 56 (2.20) 32 (1.26) 50 (1.97)

GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L

88 (3.46) 32 (1.26) 50 (1.97)

GT15-RS2-9P *1

GT15-RS4-9S *1 72.5 (2.85) 16.5 (0.65) 27.5 (1.08)

GT15-RS4-TE *1 33.5 (1.32) 0 -

GT15-J71LP23-25 *3 *3 *3

GT15-J71BR13 79 (3.11) 23 (0.91) 30 (1.18)

GT25-J71GN13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 52 (2.05) 13 (0.51) 26 (1.02)

GT15-J71GP23-SX 65 (2.56) 56 (2.20) 9 (0.35) 15 (0.59)

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *4 65 (2.56) 9 (0.35) 26 (1.02)

GT15-J61BT13 47 (1.85) 0 28 (1.10)

GT25-FNADP - - -

GT15-PRN 52 (2.05) 0 18 (0.71)

GT15-DIO 77 (3.03) 21 (0.83) 43 (1.69)

GT15-DIOR

GT15-SOUT 41 (1.61) 0 30 (1.18)

2 13 APPENDICES 13.3 Cable Bend Radius for GT25 with an Extension Unit

13

13.4 Depth Dimensions for the GOT with an SD Card Unit

The following table shows the depth dimensions for the GOT with an SD card unit.

Unit: mm (inch)

*1 GT2103-PMBLS can not mount the SD card unit.

GOT type X D GT2103-PMBD 32 (1.26) 5 (0.20)

GT2103-PMBDS GT2103-PMBDS2

27 (1.07) 5 (0.20)

SD card unit

Rear face

X D Other device

Side face 80 (3.15) or more

X

D

Other device

Side face 80 (3.15) or more

GT2103-PMBD GT2103-PMBDS, GT2103-PMBDS2

13 APPENDICES 13.4 Depth Dimensions for the GOT with an SD Card Unit 423

42

13.5 Depth Dimensions for the GOT with Extension Units Mounted in Multiple Stages

The following shows how to calculate the depth dimensions for the GOT with several extension units mounted in multiple stages.

1. Select the GOT main unit coefficient from the following table.

Unit: mm (inch)

*1 Indicates the gap between the GOT rear face and the extension interface.

GOT type G *1 X GT2715 7.5 (0.30) 54 (2.13)

GT2712 46 (1.81)

GT2710

GT2708

GT2512

GT2510

GT2508

GT2705 54 (2.13)

GT2512F-S

GT2510F-V

GT2508F-V

Side face (Open frame model)

Other device Other device

Side face

GOT rear face

Extension interface

GOT rear face

Extension interface

100 (3.94) or more 100 (3.94) or moreG G

D

X XE F

D

E F

4 13 APPENDICES 13.5 Depth Dimensions for the GOT with Extension Units Mounted in Multiple Stages

13

2. Select the option coefficient of the extension unit from the following table. Unit: mm (inch)

*1 Mounting GT27-V4-Z, GT27-R2-Z, GT27-V4R1-Z, GT27-ROUT-Z, or GT27-MMR-Z requires two stages. *2 When mounting GT15-J71GP23-SX, GT15-J71GF13-T2, or GT25-FNADP on any other units, mount it in the uppermost stage. *3 The extension unit cannot be used on GT2705, GT25. *4 Cannot be stacked with other units.

3. Substitute the coefficients selected in step 1 and step 2 to the following formula. D (for using one stage) = - G + H E (for using two stages) = - G + J + H F (for using three stages) = - G + J + J + H

Example) Unit: mm (inch)

Model J (option coefficient) H (Thickness) GT25-J71E71-100 21.6 (0.85) 27.6 (1.09)

GT27-R2 *3

GT27-ROUT *3

GT27-VHOUT *3

GT27-V4-Z *1*3 43.2 (1.70) 52.5 (2.07)

GT27-R2-Z *1*3

GT27-V4R1-Z *1*3

GT27-ROUT-Z *1*3

GT15-QBUS 21.5 (0.85) 30.5 (1.20)

GT15-QBUS2

GT15-75QBUSL *4 - 17.5 (0.69)

GT15-75QBUS2L *4

GT15-RS2-9P 21.5 (0.85) 30.5 (1.20)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT15-RS4-TE

GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J71BR13

GT15-J61BT13

GT15-PRN

GT15-DIO

GT15-DIOR

GT15-SOUT

GT27-MMR-Z *1*3 56.6 (2.23) 65.6 (2.58)

GT25-J71GN13-T2 21.6 (0.85) 27.5 (1.08)

GT15-J71GP23-SX *2 - 44 (1.73)

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *2

GT25-FNADP *2 32.3 (1.27)

Dimensions Extension unit Formula Depth dimensions D (for using one stage) First stage: GT15-PRN - 7.5 + 30.5 23 (0.91)

E (for using two stages) First stage: GT27-R2 Second stage: GT15-DIO

- 7.5 + 21.6 + 30.5 44.6 (1.76)

F (for using three stages) First stage: GT15-PRN Second stage: GT15-QBUS2 Third stage: GT15-J71GF13-T2

- 7.5 + 43.2 + 30.5 66.2 (2.61)

First and second stages: GT27-ROUT-Z Third stage: GT15-SOUT

- 7.5 + 21.5 + 21.5 + 44 79.5 (3.13)

13 APPENDICES 13.5 Depth Dimensions for the GOT with Extension Units Mounted in Multiple Stages 425

42

13.6 External Dimension Diagrams of the Communication Cable

External dimension diagrams of the bus connection cable connector

GT15-QCB, GT15-QCBS

External dimension diagrams of the RS-232 connection cable connector

GT01-C30R2-6P

GT01-C30R2-9S

GT01-C30R2-25P

GT10-C30R2-6P

Cable model Cable length (m(ft.)) External dimension diagram GT15-QCB 0.6 (2.0), 1.2 (3.9), 3 (10), 5 (16), 10 (33) Page 426 GT15-QCB, GT15-QCBS

GT15-QCBS 15 (49), 20 (66), 25 (82), 30 (98), 35 (115)

Cable model Cable length (m(ft.)) External dimensions GT01-C30R2-6P 3 (10) Page 426 GT01-C30R2-6P

GT01-C30R2-9S 3 (10) Page 426 GT01-C30R2-9S

GT01-C30R2-25P 3 (10) Page 426 GT01-C30R2-25P

GT10-C30R2-6P 3 (10) Page 426 GT10-C30R2-6P

145 (5.71)

L 95 (3.74)10 (0.39)

Unit: mm (inch)

42 (1

.6 5)

34.5 (1.36)

50 (1.97)

40 (1.57)

Approx.14 (0.55)3000

(118.11)

35 (1

.3 8)

16 (0.63)

Unit: mm (inch) Approx.14

(0.55)

16 (0.63) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97)3000 (118.11)

35 (1

.3 8)

16 (0.63)

35

6 (0.24)

Unit: mm (inch)

(1 .3

8)

3000 (118.11)

50 (1.97)

16 (0.63)

35 (1

.3 8)

53 (2.09)

55 (2

.1 7)

16 (0.63)

Unit: mm (inch)

3000 (118.11)

Unit: mm (inch)

40 (1.57)200

(7.87)

Approx. 48 (1.89)

30 (1.18)

Approx. 13 (0.51)

6 13 APPENDICES 13.6 External Dimension Diagrams of the Communication Cable

13

External dimension diagrams of the RS-422 connection cable connector

GT01-C30R4-25P

GT01-CR4-25P

GT01-CR4-8P

GT10-CR4-8P, GT21-CR4-8P5

GT10-CR4-25P, GT21-CR4-25P5

Cable model Cable length (m(ft.)) External dimensions GT01-C30R4-25P 3 (10) Page 427 GT01-C30R4-25P

GT01-CR4-25P 10 (33), 20 (66), 30 (98) Page 427 GT01-CR4-25P

GT01-CR4-8P 1 (3.3), 3 (10), 10 (33), 20 (66), 30 (98) Page 427 GT01-CR4-8P

GT10-CR4-8P 1 (3.3), 3 (10), 10 (33), 20 (66), 30 (98) Page 427 GT10-CR4-8P, GT21-CR4-8P5

GT10-CR4-25P 3 (10), 10 (33), 20 (66), 30 (98) Page 427 GT10-CR4-25P, GT21-CR4-25P5

GT21-CR4-8P5 1 (3.3), 3 (10), 10 (33), 20 (66), 30 (98) Page 427 GT10-CR4-8P, GT21-CR4-8P5

GT21-CR4-25P5 3 (10), 10 (33), 20 (66), 30 (98) Page 427 GT10-CR4-25P, GT21-CR4-25P5

GT10-C10R4-8PL 1 (3.3) Page 428 GT10-C10R4-8PL

GT10-CR4-8PC 1 (3.3), 3 (10), 10 (33), 20 (66), 30 (98) Page 428 GT10-CR4-8PC

GT10-C02H-9SC 0.2 (0.7) Page 428 GT10-C02H-9SC

50 (1.97)

16 (0.63)

Unit: mm (inch)

35 (1

.3 8)

53 (2.09)

55 (2

.1 7)

3000 (118.11)

16 (0.63)

LFig.13 50 (1.97)

16 (0.63)

35 (1

.3 8)

53 (2.09)

55 (2

.1 7)

16 (0.63)

Unit: mm (inch)

40 (1.57)

L50 (1.97)

16 (0.63)

35 (1

.3 8)

Unit: mm (inch)Approx.13 (0.51)

30 (1.18)

L 40 (1.57)250

(9.84)

Unit: mm (inch)

Approx.13 (0.51)

53 (2.09)

55 (2

.1 7)

16 (0.63)

30 (1.18)

L 250

(9.84)

Unit: mm (inch)

13 APPENDICES 13.6 External Dimension Diagrams of the Communication Cable 427

42

GT10-C10R4-8PL

GT10-CR4-8PC

GT10-C02H-9SC

External dimension diagrams of RS-485 terminal block conversion unit

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL

Cable model Cable length (m(ft.)) External dimensions FA-LTBGT2R4CBL 0.5 (1.6), 1 (3.3), 2 (6.6) Page 428 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL

1000 (39.4)

38 (1.50)

30 (1

.1 8)

30 (1.18) 250

(9.84)

Unit: mm (inch)

L52 (2.05)

250 (9.84)

40 (1.57)

25 (0.98)33 (1.30)

22 (0

.8 7)

7 (0.28) Unit: mm (inch)

Approx.13 (0.51)

200 (7.87)

52 (2.05)

45.5 (1.79)

15 (0.59)

22 (0

.8 7)

32 .5

(1 .2

8)

Unit: mm (inch) 7 (0.28)

8.1 (0.32)

50 (1.97)

47 (1.85) 18

(0.71)

4 (0.16)

29 (1.14)

11 5

(4 .5

3)

45 (1.77)

93 (3

.6 6)

33 (1

.3 0)

15 (0.59)

L

Unit: mm (inch)

8 13 APPENDICES 13.6 External Dimension Diagrams of the Communication Cable

13

13.7 External Dimension Diagrams of the External Cable for Handy GOT

GT16-C-42P

GT16H-C-37PE

GT14H-C-42P

Cable model Cable length (m(ft.)) External dimension diagram GT16H-C-42P 3 (10), 6 (20), 10 (33) Page 429 GT16-C-42P

GT16H-C-37PE 3 (10), 6 (20), 10 (33) Page 429 GT16H-C-37PE

GT14H-C-42P 3 (10), 6 (20), 10 (33) Page 429 GT14H-C-42P

GT11H-C-37P 3 (10), 6 (20), 10 (33) Page 430 GT11H-C-37P

GT11H-C 3 (10), 6 (20), 10 (33) Page 430 GT11H-C

GT11H-C15R4-8P 15 (49) Page 430 GT11H-C15R4-8P

GT11H-C15R4-25P 15 (49) Page 431 GT11H-C15R4-25P

GT11H-C15R2-6P 15 (49) Page 431 GT11H-C15R2-6P

LAbout140 (5.52) About140 (5.52)

11 (0.44)

Handy GOT side Connector conversion box side

Label

Unit: mm (inch)

Handy GOT side

About 140 (5.51)

9.4 (0.38)

L

Connector conversion box side

M2.6

45 (1.77) 16

(0.63) 71

(2 .8

)

Unit: mm (inch)

Connector conversion box sideHandy GOT side

About 70 (2.76)

28 (1.11) 9.4 (0.38) Label

L About 50 (1.97)

Unit: mm (inch)

13 APPENDICES 13.7 External Dimension Diagrams of the External Cable for Handy GOT 429

43

GT11H-C-37P

GT11H-C

GT11H-C15R4-8P

Handy GOT side Connector conversion box or relay cable side

About 70 (2.76)

28 (1.11) 9.4 (0.38)

M2.6

Label

L 45 (1.77) 16

(0.63)

71 (2

.8 )

Unit: mm (inch)

Handy GOT side

About 70 (2.76)

28 (1.11) 9.4 (0.38) Label

L

Unit: mm (inch)

500 (19.69)

1500 (59.06)

Label

LabelLead wire for grounding

6 (0.24)

Ab ou

t 4

5 (1

.7 8) About48 200 (7.88) 40 (1.58)

13

16

71 (2

.8 )

Unit: mm (inch)

(0.63) (1.89) (0

.5 1)

0 13 APPENDICES 13.7 External Dimension Diagrams of the External Cable for Handy GOT

13

GT11H-C15R4-25P

GT11H-C15R2-6P 500 (19.69)

1500 (59.06)

Label

M2.6

LabelLead wire for grounding

8 (0.32)

24 (0

.9 5)

16 (0.63)

55

36 200 (7.88) 53 (2.09) 16

71 (2

.8 )

Unit: mm (inch)

(1.42)

(2 .1

7)

(0.63)

500 (19.69)

1500 (59.06)

Label

LabelLead wire for grounding

Ab ou

t 4

5 (1

.7 8) About48

(1.89) 1 3200 (7.88) 40 (1.58)

16

71 (2

.8 )

Unit: mm (inch)

(0.63)

(0 .5

2) 6 (0.24)

13 APPENDICES 13.7 External Dimension Diagrams of the External Cable for Handy GOT 431

43

13.8 Confirming of Versions and Conforming Standards

GT27, GT25 (except GT2505-V and GT25HS-V), GT23

Rating plate The GOT hardware version, BootOS version at factory default, function version, and conforming standards can be checked with the rating plate on the GOT rear face.

Packing box The conforming standards can be confirmed by the label on the packing box. Note that the position of the label differs depending on the model or the shipment date.

QR code

Conforming standard

MAC address GOT serial number

Function version BootOS version at factory default (When the BootOS version is a two-digit character, only the character of the last digit is described.) Hardware version (When the hardware version is a two-digit character, only the character of the last digit is described.) Manufacturing date

Manufacturing year (lower two digits of the year of grace)

Manufacturing month (1 to 9: manufacturing month, X: October, Y: November, Z: December)

0 0 0 1 3 9 1 0 A A 0 0 0 0 0 - A123456789012

2013-09 00013910AA00000-A

The conforming standards (such as CE) are described.

2 13 APPENDICES 13.8 Confirming of Versions and Conforming Standards

13

GT2505-V, GT25HS-V, GT21

Rating plate The GOT hardware version, BootOS version at factory default, function version, and conforming standards can be checked with the rating plate on the GOT rear face. The following shows the rating plate of GT21 as an example.

Packing box The conforming standards can be confirmed by the label on the packing box. Note that the position of the label differs depending on the shipment date.

13.9 Transportation Precautions When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.

Relevant models The battery for the GOT2000 series is classified as shown in the table below.

*1 Batteries with a lithium content of more than 0.3 g are classified as dangerous goods (Class 9) according to packing instructions.

Transportation guidelines Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment. When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to another location, make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG Code, and other local transportation regulations. For details, please consult your transportation company.

Product name Model Description Handled as Battery for GOT2000 series GT11-50BAT Lithium battery Non-dangerous goods

GT15-BAT Dangerous goods *1

QR code

MAC address

GOT serial number

BootOS version at factory default Hardware version

Manufacture year (Last two digits of a year)

1 4 4 0 0 0 1 A A

Certification mark

Manufacture month (1 to 9, X: October, Y: November, Z: December)

The conforming standards are described.

13 APPENDICES 13.9 Transportation Precautions 433

43

13.10 Calculating Consumed Current of GT2705-V For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GT2705-V can supply. GOT other than GT2705-V, the calculation of the current value is not required. For the current that the GT2705-V can supply and the current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller, refer to the following tables. Make sure that the total of consumed current is within the capacity of the GT2705-V.

Current supply capacity of the GOT Can be supplied current of GT2705-V is 1.3A.

Current consumed by an extension unit/barcode reader/RFID controller

*1 Value used for calculating the current consumption of the multi-channel function. For the specifications of the unit, refer to the manual included with the unit.

*2 When the GOT supplies power to a barcode reader or a RFID controller from the standard interface, add their consumed current.(Maximum value is less than 0.3 A)

Calculation example When connecting the GT15-QBUS2 and GT15-RS2-9P (2 units) to the GT2705-V Current supply capacity of GT2705-V 1.3A Total consumed current 0.275+0.29+0.29=0.855A Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GT2705-V, they can be connected to the GT2705-V.

When connecting the GT15-J71GP23-SX and GT15-RS2-9P (2 units) to the GT2705-V Current supply capacity of GT2705-V 1.3A Total consumed current 1.07+0.29+0.29=1.65A Since the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the GT2705-V, such configuration is not allowed.

Module type Consumed current (A) GT25-J71E71-100 0.14

GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2 GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L

0.275 *1

GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L

0.12

GT15-RS2-9P 0.29

GT15-RS4-9S 0.33

GT15-RS4-TE 0.3

GT25-J71GN13-T2 0.92

GT15-J71GP23-SX 1.07

GT15-J71GF13-T2 0.96

GT15-J71LP23-25 0.56

GT15-J71BR13 0.77

GT15-J61BT13 0.56

GT25-FNADP 0.4

Barcode reader *2

GT15-PRN 0.09

GT15-SOUT 0.08

GT15-DIO 0.1

GT15-DIOR 0.1

RFID controller *2

4 13 APPENDICES 13.10 Calculating Consumed Current of GT2705-V

13

13.11 Open Source Software u-boot GT27 and GT25 models use U-Boot under the GNU General Public License (GPLv2). You can obtain the source code of the software and copy, distribute, or modify the software under the GPL. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation can provide the source code of U-Boot licensed under the GPL. To obtain the source code, contact your local sales office. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation will not guarantee the source code we provide if it is reused. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation will not take any responsibility for the source code. Please refrain from asking information on the source code of open source.

NOTE! This copyright does *not* cover the so-called "standalone" applications that use U-Boot services by means of the jump table provided by U-Boot exactly for this purpose - this is merely considered normal use of U-Boot, and does *not* fall under the heading of "derived work".

The header files "include/image.h" and "include/asm-*/u-boot.h" define interfaces to U-Boot. Including these (unmodified) header files in another file is considered normal use of U-Boot, and does *not* fall under the heading of "derived work".

Also note that the GPL below is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, but the instance of code that it refers to (the U-Boot source code) is copyrighted by me and others who actually wrote it. -- Wolfgang Denk

=======================================================================

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

13 APPENDICES 13.11 Open Source Software 435

43

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.

Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION

0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:

a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.

b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.

c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)

6 13 APPENDICES 13.11 Open Source Software

13

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:

a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.

13 APPENDICES 13.11 Open Source Software 437

43

6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.

7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.

9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

8 13 APPENDICES 13.11 Open Source Software

13

NO WARRANTY

11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

13 APPENDICES 13.11 Open Source Software 439

44

REVISIONS * The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Revision date * Manual Number Revision Sep. 2013 SH(NA)-081194ENG-A First printing: GT Designer3 Version1.100E

Nov. 2013 SH(NA)-081194ENG-B Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.104J Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed Abbreviations and generic terms changed Compatible with printer unit Compatible with wireless LAN connection (to be supported soon) General specifications changed Performance specifications changed Printer unit added to the list of Depth dimensions and cable bend dimensions for the GOT

with an extension unit, and Depth dimensions for the GOT with several extension units mounted in multiple stages.

Jan. 2014 SH(NA)-081194ENG-C Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.108N Abbreviations and generic terms changed Installation Position changed Depth dimensions and cable bend dimensions for the GOT with an extension unit changed

Apr. 2014 SH(NA)-081194ENG-D Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.112S Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed Abbreviations and generic terms changed GT2715-X, GT25, and options added

Jun. 2014 SH(NA)-081194ENG-E Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.117X Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed Vertical installation of GT27, GT25, and GT23 supported

Jul. 2014 SH(NA)-081194ENG-F Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.118Y Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications changed Battery installation and removal procedures changed

Oct. 2014 SH(NA)-081194ENG-G Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.122C Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS is changed. Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications are changed. GT21 is supported. GT2512-S is supported.

Jan. 2015 SH(NA)-081194ENG-H Writing errors have been corrected.

Apr. 2015 SH(NA)-081194ENG-I Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.130L Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications are changed. Field network adapter unit is supported. RGB input unit (GT27-R2) is supported. RGB output unit (GT27-ROUT) is supported. GT2705-V, GT2104-R, GT2103-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBLS is supported. The SD cards added.

May 2015 SH(NA)-081194ENG-J Writing errors have been corrected.

Jun. 2015 SH(NA)-081194ENG-K The model names of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit set have been added.

Oct. 2015 SH(NA)-081194ENG-L Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.144A Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications are changed. GT2104-PMBD, GT2104-PMBDS is supported.

Dec. 2015 SH(NA)-081194ENG-M Writing errors have been corrected.

Dec. 2015 SH(NA)-081194ENG-N Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.150G The description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS has been changed. Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications have been changed. GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, GT2508F-V, and environmental protection sheets have been

added.

May 2016 SH(NA)-081194ENG-O Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.155M Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications have been changed. The field network adapter unit is compatible with the HMS Anybus CompactCom M40

network communication module AB6909-C and AB6910-C. The wireless LAN communication unit has complied with SRRC and KC requirements.

Aug. 2016 SH(NA)-081194ENG-P Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.160S Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications have been changed. The GOT2000 series Ethernet communication unit (GT25-J71E71-100) is supported. Writing errors have been corrected.

Oct. 2016 SH(NA)-081194ENG-Q Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications have been changed. Partial corrections.

0

Jan. 2017 SH(NA)-081194ENG-R Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.170C GT2107 is supported. Descriptions of the special fitting installation hole have been added.

Apr. 2017 SH(NA)-081194ENG-S Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.175H The description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS has been changed. Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications have been changed. GT2510-WX, GT2507-W are supported. Changes have been made to the rating plate.

Jun. 2017 SH(NA)-081194ENG-T Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.180N The description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS has been changed. Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications have been changed. GT2505-V is supported.

GT2506HS-V added.

Aug. 2017 SH(NA)-081194ENG-U Writing errors have been corrected.

Oct. 2017 SH(NA)-081194ENG-V Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications have been changed. Partial corrections.

Dec. 2017 SH(NA)-081194ENG-W Partial corrections.

Apr. 2018 SH(NA)-081194ENG-X Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.195D The description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS has been changed. Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications have been changed. GT2507T-W and GT2505HS-V are supported.

Jul. 2018 SH(NA)-081194ENG-Y Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.200J The description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS has been changed. Partial corrections.

Oct. 2018 SH(NA)-081194ENG-Z Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.205P The description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS has been changed. Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications have been changed. The digital video output unit (GT27-VHOUT) is supported.

Apr. 2019 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AA Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.215Z List of Manuals for GT Works3 has been changed. Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications have been changed. Protective cover for oil (GT21-10WPCO, GT21-07WPCO, GT25-05PCO-2) have been

added. The recommended cable clamp has been changed. Partial corrections.

Jul. 2019 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AB Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.220E SAFETY PRECAUTIONS has been changed. Manuals for GT Works3 have been changed. Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons have been changed. The CC-Link IE TSN communication unit (GT25-J71GN13-T2) is supported. General specifications has been changed.

Oct. 2019 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AC Partial corrections.

Jan. 2020 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AD Partial corrections.

Apr. 2020 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AE Partial corrections.

May 2020 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AF Partial corrections.

Jun. 2020 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AG Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.240A Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons have been changed. The company name of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD. has been changed to SHIBAURA

MACHINE CO., LTD.

Aug. 2020 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AH Partial corrections.

Oct. 2020 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AI Partial corrections.

Jan. 2021 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AJ Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.250L Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed Abbreviations, generic terms, and model icons have been changed. Compatible with GT2512-WXTBD, GT2512-WXTSD Protective sheets (GT25-12WPSCC, GT25-12WPSGC) have been added. Protective cover for oil (GT21-12WPCO) has been added.

Revision date * Manual Number Revision

441

44

Apr. 2021 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AK Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.255R Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed Abbreviations, generic terms, and model icons have been changed. The user memory capacity (RAM) has been increased for the GT2715, GT2712, GT2710,

and GT2708 models. Antibacterial/antiviral protective sheets (GT25-12PSAC, GT25-10PSAC, GT25-08PSAC)

have been added.

Jul. 2021 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AL Changed the name of the direct CPU connection to the direct CPU connection (serial). Partial corrections.

Oct. 2021 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AM The recommended cable clamp has been changed. Partial corrections.

Jan. 2022 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AN Partial corrections.

Apr. 2022 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AO Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.275M The Wireless LAN communication unit has complied with the Radio Equipment Regulations

(UKCA). A description of U-Boot has been added. Partial corrections.

Jul. 2022 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AP The MELSOFT GT Works3 site license product (SW1DND-GTWK3-EC) has been added.

Jan. 2023 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AQ Partial corrections.

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

Revision date * Manual Number Revision

2

WARRANTY Please check the following product warranty details before using this product.

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module.

The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six (36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty-two (42) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.

Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the user's hardware or software design.

Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures,

judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.

Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.

Replacing consumable parts such as a battery, backlight, and fuse. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure such as

earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage. Failure caused by reasons that could not be predicted by scientific technology standards at the time of shipment from

Mitsubishi. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.

(1) Gratis Warranty Term

(2) Gratis Warranty Range (a) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified.

If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure diagnosis at the customers expense. The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

(b) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods, and usage environment, etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.

(c) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged in the following cases.

Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued. Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.

(2) Mitsubishi shall not accept a request for product supply (including spare parts) after production is discontinued.

Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ.

Overseas service

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to: Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals, or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice. Changes in product specifications

(1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.

(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway companies or Public service shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications. In addition, applications in which human life or property could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical, railway applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment, recreation and amusement devices, safety devices, shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal. Even for the above applications, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is not required, after the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative.

Product application

(1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi. (2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products. (3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for

damages to products other than Mitsubishi products. (4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.

443

44

Intellectual Property Rights Trademarks MELDAS, MELSEC, iQ Platform, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT, and CC-Link IE are trademarks or registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and other countries. Microsoft, Microsoft Access, Excel, SQL Server, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual C#, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, and Windows Vista are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA. DeviceNet is a trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.). VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries. Unicode is a trademark or registered trademark of Unicode, Inc. in the United States and other countries. PictBridge is a registered trademark of Canon Inc. Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Oracle and JavaScript are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates in the United States and other countries. QR Code is a trademark or registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan, the United States, and/or other countries. Anybus is a registered trademark of HMS Industrial Networks AB. Android and Google Chrome are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc. IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license. Safari and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the United States and other countries. The iPhone trademark is used under license from AIPHONE CO., LTD. Other company and product names herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. Copyrights The screens (screenshots) are used in accordance with the Microsoft Corporation guideline.

4 SH(NA)-081194ENG-AQ

SH(NA)-081194ENG-AQ(2301)MEE MODEL: GOT2000-U-HW-E MODEL CODE: 1D7MJ5

Specifications subject to change without notice.

When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.

HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN

</

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the GOT2000 Mitsubishi works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT23 Hardware User's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the User's Manual for Mitsubishi GOT2000 as well as other Mitsubishi manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The User's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi GOT2000. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT23 Hardware User's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT23 Hardware User's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT23 Hardware User's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT23 Hardware User's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT23 Hardware User's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.